Sony RDRGX-7 Service manual

Download

Page 1

RDR-GX7

RMT-D203A

SERVICE MANUAL

SPECIFICATIONS

System

Laser

Semiconductor laser

Format

NTSC

Channel coverage

VHF: 2 to 13 UHF: 14 to 69 CATV: A-8 to A-1, A to W, W+1 to W+84

Video reception

Frequency synthesizer system

Audio reception

Split carrier system

Antenna

75-ohm antenna terminal for VHF/ UHF

Timer

Clock: Quartz locked Timer indication: 12-hour cycle (digital) Power back-up duration: 1 hour

Video recording format

MPEG Video Audio recording format/applicable bit rate

Dolby Digital/2 ch, 256 kbps

Audio characteristics (Playback)

Frequency response

DVD (PCM 96 kHz): 4 Hz to 44 kHz

(±1.0 dB)/DVD (PCM 48 kHz): 4 Hz

to 22 kHz (±0.5 dB)/CD: 4 Hz to 20

kHz (±0.5 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio (S/N ratio)

DVD: 115 dB (LINE OUT (AUDIO

L/R) 2 jacks only) Harmonic distortion

DVD: 0.002 % Dynamic range

DVD: 110 dB/CD: 100 dB Wow and flutter

DVD: Less than detected value

(0.001% W PEAK)

Audio characteristics (Recording/ Playback)

Frequency response

DVD (Dolby Digital 48 kHz): 10 Hz-20 kHz (±1.0 dB)

Signal-to-noise ratio

DVD: 96 dB

Harmonic distortion

DVD: 0.004 %

Dynamic range

DVD: 96 dB The signals from LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R) jack are measured. When you play PCM sound tracks with a 96 kHz sampling frequency, the output signals from the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack are converted to 48 kHz sampling frequency.

Inputs and outputs

LINE OUT 1/2 (AUDIO)

Phono jack

Output level: 2 Vrms

Load impedance: 10 kilohm s (VIDEO)

Phono jack

Output level: 1.0 Vp-p (S VIDEO)

4-pin mini DIN

Output level: Y:1.0 Vp-p, C: 0.286

Vp-p (NTSC) LINE IN 1/2/3 (AUDIO)

Phono jack

Input level: 2 Vrms

Input impedance:

more than 22 kilohms (VIDEO)

Phono jack

Input level: 1.0 Vp-p

(S VIDEO)

4-pin mini DIN Input level: Y:1.0 Vp-p, C: 0.286 Vp-p (NTSC)

DV IN

4-pin i.LINK S100

DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL)

Optical output jack Output level: –18 dBm (wave length: 660 nm)

DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)

Phono jack Output level: 0.5 Vp-p Load impedance: 75 ohms

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT(Y, P

Phono jack/Y: 1.0 Vp-p/P interlace*=0.648 Vp-p, progressive

or interlace**=0.7 Vp-p * Component Black Level is On ** Component Black Level is Of f CONTROL S IN

Mini jack

General

Power requirements

120 V AC, 60 Hz Power consumption

43 W Dimensions (approx.)

430 × 89 × 381 mm

(17 × 3

/8 × 15 in.) (width/height/

depth) incl. projecti ng parts Mass (approx.)

5.6 kg (11.16 lb)

Operating temperature

5 ºC to 35 ºC (41 ºF to 95 ºF) Operating humidity

25 % to 80 %

, PR:

US Model

Canadian Model

Supplied accessories

Audio/video cord (1) Power cord (1) Antenna cable (1) Remote commander (remote) (1) Size AA(R6) batteries (2)

Specifications and design are subject to change without notice.

, PR)

DVD RECORDER

Page 2

SAFETY CHECK-OUT

After correcting the original service problem, perform the following

safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.

1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes and bridges.

2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are "pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors.

3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly transistors, that were installed during a previous repair . Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.

4. Look for parts which, though functioning, show obvious signs of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.

5. Check the line cord for cracks and abrasion. Recommend the replacement of any such line cord to the customer.

6. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.

7. Check the antenna terminals, metal trim, "metallized" knobs, screws, and all other exposed metal parts for AC leakage. Check leakage as described below.

To Exposed Metal

Parts on Set

0.15 µF

Fig. A. Using an AC voltmeter to check AC leakage.

WHEN SERVICING, DO NOT APPROACH THE LASER EXIT WITH THE EYE TOO CLOSELY. IN CASE IT IS NECESSARY TO CONFIRM LASER BEAM EMISSION, BE SURE TO OBSERVE FROM A DISTANCE OF MORE THAN 25 cm FROM THE SURFACE OF THE OBJECTIVE LENS ON THE OPTICAL PICK-UP BLOCK.

1.5 kΩ

Earth Ground

WARNING!!

Voltmeter (0.75 V)

CAUTION:

The use of optical instrument with this product will increase eye hazard.

LEAKAGE TEST

The AC leakage from any exposed metal part to earth ground and from all exposed metal parts to any exposed metal part having a return to chassis, must not exceed 0.5mA (500 microampers). Leakage current can be measured by any one of three methods.

1. A commercial leakage tester, such as the Simpson 229 or RCA TW-540A. Follo w the manufacturers' instructions to use these instruments.

2. A battery-operated A C milliammeter. The Data Precision 245 digital multimeter is suitable for this job.

3. Measuring the voltage drop across a resistor by means of a VOM or battery-operated AC v oltmeter. The "limit" indication is 0.75V, so analog meters must hav e an accurate lo w v oltage scale. The Simpson 250 and Sanwa SH-63Trd are examples of a passive VOM that is suitable. Nearly all battery operated digital multimeters that have a 2V A C range are suitable. (See Fig. A)

Unleaded solder

Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the leadfree mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead. (Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with the lead free mark due to their particular size.)

: LEAD FREE MARK

Unleaded solder has the following characteristics.

• Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40°C higher than

ordinary solder. Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time. Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to about 350°C. Caution: The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away if the heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful!

• Strong viscosity

Unleaded solder is more viscous (sticky, less prone to flow) than ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur such as on IC pins, etc.

• Usable with ordinary solder

It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may also be added to ordinary solder.

CAUTION

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!!

COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUBLISHED BY SONY.

ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT

À LA SÉCURITÉ! LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.

— 2 —

Page 3

SERVICE NOTE

1. DISK REMOVAL PROCEDURE IF THE TRAY CANNOT BE EJECTED (FORCED EJECTION) ············ 5

1. GENERAL

Features··················································································1-1 About This Manual ································································1-1 DVD Recorder Basics····························································1-1 Guide to Parts and Controls ···················································1-2

Basic Hookups and Settings ······················································1-3

Quick Overview·····································································1-3 Step 1: Unpacking ································································· 1-3 Step 2: Connecting the Antenna Cable ··································1-3 Step 3: Connecting the Video Cords ······································1-4 Step 4: Connecting the Audio Cords ·····································1-4 Step 5: Connecting the Power Cord·······································1-5 Step 6: Preparing the Remote ················································1-5 Step 7: Easy Setup ·································································1-5 Setting Up the VCR Plus ® System ······································1-5 Setting Up the Remote···························································1-6 Connecting a VCR or Similar Recording Device to the LINE Jacks·······················································································1-6 Connecting to a Satellite Receiver or a Cable Box················1-7

Operating the Recorder······························································1-7

Guide to Displays ··································································1-7 How to Use the Displays ·······················································1-7 How to Enter Characters························································1-8

Recording/Timer Recording ······················································1-8

Before Recording···································································1-8 Recording TV programs ························································1-9 Timer Recording ····································································1-9 Adjusting the Recording Picture Quality and Size ··············1-11 Recording from External Equipment with a Timer (Synchro Rec) ······································································1-11

Playback ··················································································1-11

Before Playing ·····································································1-11 Playing Discs ·······································································1-12 Selecting a Recorded Title on a Disc··································· 1-12 Searching for a Title/Chapter/Track ····································1-13 Checking the Play Information and Playing Time···············1-13 Selecting the Sound ·····························································1-13 TV Virtual Surround Settings (TVS) ···································1-14 Changing the Angles····························································1-14 Displaying the Subtitles ·······················································1-14 Adjusting the Playback Picture and Sound·························· 1-14

Editing a DVD ·········································································1-15

Before Editing······································································ 1-15 Basic Editing········································································ 1-15 Advanced Editing (Playlist Edit) ·········································1-16 Labeling, Protecting, or Finalizing the Disc ························1-17

Connecting a Digital Video Camera or Other Equipment ·······1-18

Before Recording/Editing ····················································1-18 Available DV Dubbing Functions········································1-18 Recording an Entire DV/Digital8 Format Tape (ONE TOUCH DUB) ··························································1-19 Program Edit ········································································1-19 Advanced Program Edit······················································· 1-19 Re-editing the “program” in the DV/D8 Edit List··············· 1-20 Creating a Copy of the Edited Contents (Copy Dubbing) ···1-21 Recording From Equipment Connected to the LINE IN Jacks····················································································· 1-21

Settings and Adjustments ························································1-22

About the Setup Display Structure ······································1-22 Using the Setup Displays·····················································1-22 Settings (Basic Settings) ······················································1-22 Video Settings······································································ 1-23 Audio Settings ·····································································1-23

Features Settings ··································································1-23 Options Settings···································································1-24 Easy Setup (Resetting the Recorder) ···································1-24

Additional Information ····························································1-24

Troubleshooting ···································································1-24 Self-diagnosis Function (When letters/numbers appear in the display) ················································································1-25 About i.LINK······································································· 1-26 Glossary ···············································································1-26 Language Code List ·····························································1-26

2. DISASSEMBLY

2-1. TOP CASE ······································································2-1 2-2. POWER BLOCK·····························································2-1 2-3. D. C. FAN········································································2-3 2-4. REAR PANEL ·································································2-3 2-5. TRAY COVER ASSEMBLY ··········································2-4 2-6. FRONT PANEL SECTION ·············································2-4 2-7. ALUMINUM DOOR, DOOR BASE······························2-5 2-8. SHAFT (R) ······································································2-5 2-9. RD-045 BOARD ·····························································2-6 2-10. FL-130 BOARD ······························································2-7 2-11. FR-195 BOARD······························································2-7 2-12. DVD DRIVE ···································································2-8 2-13. AV-071 BOARD ······························································2-9 2-14. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION ································· 2-10

3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) ···························3-1 3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) ···························3-3

4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM································ 4-1 4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ············································4-3 WAVEFORMS ································································4-4

• AV-071 (VHF/UHF TUNER)(1/9) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························4-5

• AV-071 (VIDEO IN PROCESS)(2/9) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························4-7

• AV-071 (RD I/F)(3/9) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························4-9

• AV-071 (A/V IN/OUT TERMINAL)(4/9) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-11

• AV-071 (AUDIO IN)(5/9) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-13

• AV-071 (AUDIO OUT)(6/9) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-15

• AV-071 (UV IC)(7/9) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-17

• AV-071 (SYSTEM CONTROL)(8/9) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-19

• AV-071 (POWER)(9/9) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-21

• AV-071 (TUNER, VIDEO IN PROCESS, RD I/F, AV IN/

OUT, UV IC, SYSTEM CONTROL, PDC, POWER)

PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-23

• FL-130 (FL DRIVER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-27

• FL-130 (FL DRIVER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-29

• FR-195 (SWITCH, LED) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-31

• FR-195 (SWITCH, LED) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-33

— 3 —

Page 4

• CN-177 (CONNECTOR) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-35

• CN-177 (CONNECTOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-36

5. IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

5-1. IT CONTROL IC (IC605: µPD703033BYGF-M29-3BA-A

(AV-071 BOARD)) ·························································· 5-1

6. SERVICE MODE

6-1. Device relation diagram.

Display data (for your reference to check the signal path) ··

6-2. Block diagram

(for your reference to check the devices)·······················6-2 6-3. Screen Transition in the Service Mode···························· 6-2 6-4. Service Mode. Menu Items and Description ···················6-3 6-5. Device Check Menu (1/2) ···············································6-3 6-6. Device Check Menu (2/2) ···············································6-3 6-7. Path Check Menu (1/2)····················································6-4 6-8. Path Check Menu (2/2)····················································6-4 6-9. Device All Check. Screen Transition······························· 6-5 6-10. Device Individual Check. Screen Transition ··················· 6-5 6-11. Path Individual Check (Pasted Screen Check).

Screen Transition·····························································6-6 6-12. Path Individual Check (Data Check Confirmation).

Screen Transition·····························································6-6

6-1

7. ADJUSTMENT

7-1. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT·································7-1

1. Video Level Adjustment (RD-045 Board)·······················7-1

2. Component Video Output Level Adjustment

(RD-045 board) ·······························································7-1

3. S-Video Output S-Y Level Check ···································7-1

4. S-Video Output S-C Check ·············································7-1

5. Component Video Output Y Check ································· 7-2

6. Component Video Output B-Y Check ····························· 7-2

7. Component Video Output R-Y Check ····························· 7-2

8. REPAIR PARTS LIST

8-1. EXPLODED VIEWS 8-1-1.OVERALL ······································································8-1 8-1-2.FRONT PANEL SECTION ·············································8-2 8-1-3.CHASSIS SECTION·······················································8-3 8-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ··········································8-4

— 4 —

Page 5

SERVICE NOTE

1. DISK REMOVAL PROCEDURE IF THE TRAY CANNOT BE EJECTED (FORCED EJECTION)

1. Pull out the power cord.

2. Remove the top case.

3. Prepare a hexagonal wrench or L-shaped stiff wire. (See Fig.1.1)

4. Insert a hexagonal wrench (or hard wire) into a hole on the side of the DVD drive in the right angle. (See Fig. 1-1. and 1-2.) Note: If a hexagonal wrench (or hard wire) is not inserted in at the right angle, belt may be damaged.

5. Press the rack to open the tray a little.

6. Pull out the tray slowly and gently.

Right way of pushing the wrench

Tr ay

Wrong way of pushing the wrench

Fig. 1-1 Fig. 1-2

NOTES DURING THE FORCED EJECTION

1. If the forced ejection is executed while a blank disc media (DVD±RW, ±R) exists on the tray

• Insert a DVD-ROM (DVD test disc, DVD software available on the market, or the like) in the tray and then close the tray.

Note1: If you close the tray while it is empty, ejection of the tray becomes impossible. Note2: If you close the tray with a CD disc inserted in it, the CD can be ejected. However, if you close the tray while it is empty, there can be a case that

ejection of the tray becomes impossible.

Note3: Even if you replace the DVD drive unit while the tray remains under the state as described above, the situation cannot be improved.

2. If the tray cannot be ejected while the disc is not inserted

• Execute the forced ejection.

• Insert a DVD-ROM (DVD test disc, DVD software available on the market, or the like) on the tray and try to close the tray.

(There are cases that it recovers the trouble.)

3. Contents of forcedly ejected blank disc media (DVD±R W, ±R) can be damaged. (There can be a case that initialization is also impossible.)

— 5 —

Page 6

MEMO

— 6 —

Page 7

SECTION 1

About This Manual

DV Edit

Only one i.LINK cable is required to transfer co ntents from a digital video camera to the DVD recorder. Since the recorder controls the digital video camera, dubbing and editing are easy to perform.

One Touch Dubbing function

(page 78)

One press on the ONE TOUCH DUB button is enough to complete the procedure. The recorder controls the digital video camera from start to finish — from playing the DV/Digital8 format tape to stop and rewind. The entire tape contents are dubbed to a DVD in the process.

Program Edit

(page 79)

This function allows you to select scenes on a DV/Digital8 format tape and save them on recordable DVDs, including nonrewritable DVD-Rs. The recorder controls the digital video camera to record the contents of a DV/Digital8 format tape to the disc as programmed. The recorder will remember which scenes you selected and saves this information as a program. You can call up a program at any time and make add itio na l copies of the program to DVDs.

Advanced Program Edit

(page 81)

This function takes advantage of a DVD’s random access capabilities to enable fast and flexible editing. The recorder copies the entire contents of a DV/Digital8 format tape to a DVD-RW in VR mode, whereupon the contents are automatically divided into chapters. The c hapters are displayed as scenes in a scene list where you can instantly delete or rearrange the scenes at will. The recorder remembers which scenes you selected, and saves this informati on as a program. You can call up a program at any time and make additional copies of the program to a DVD.

Auto Scene Chaptering (DVD-RW in VR mode only)

(page 78, 79, 81)

While copying a DV/Digital8 format tape to a DVD-RW, the recorder automatically inserts chapter marks at each point where you started recording on your digita l video camera. This enables you to quickly find the scenes you want during playback and editing.

About This Manual

Instructions in this manual describe the controls on the remote. You can also use the controls on the recorder if they have the same or similar names as those on the remote. The meanings of the icons used in this manual are described below:

Notes

• The on-screen displa y illustrations used in this manual may not match the graphics displayed on your TV sc reen.

• The explanations reg ard ing discs in this manual refer to discs created on this recorder. The explanations do not ap ply to discs that are created on other recorders and played back on this recorder.

Control

Dubbing

Icon Meaning

Functions available for DVD VIDEOs or DVD+Rs

Functions available for DVD-RWs formatted in VR mode on this recorder

Functions available for DVD-RWs formatted in Video mode on this recorder

Functions available for DVD+RWs Functions available for DVD-Rs Functions available for music CDs or CD-

Rs/CD-RWs in music CD format

DVD Recorder Basics

Step 3: Digital Recording

Record a program. When using the timer, you’ll find familiar, convenient features as found on conventional VCRs, such as VCR Plus+. You can also dub and edit the contents of connected video equipment such as a digital video camera.

Step 4: Playing the recorded contents

You can select the title you want to play from a displayed menu, and immediately start playback. Recorded contents are more accessible on a disc than on a tape, the procedure is simple, and unlike conventional VCRs, no rewinding is necessary!

What are titles and chapters?

DVD contents consist of sections, called titles, and smaller sub-sections called chapters. On this recorder, a title is created between the points where you start and stop a recording. Chapters are created automatically at specified intervals, or can be created manually (DVD-RWs in VR mode only).

A recorded disc contains title(s), and each title contains chapter(s)

Title 1

Chapters

Go to the next page.

Title 2

Start Rec. Stop/Start

Chapters

Chapter marksChapter marks

Stop Rec.

continued

GENERAL

RDR-GX7

This section is extracted from instruction manual. (RDR-GX7 : 3-081-195-71)

Features

This recorder can play DVDs or CDs, record on DVD-Rs, DVDRWs or DVD+RWs, and by using a variety of editing functions, you can enjoy editing recorded programs and othe r ima ge s.

Recording

Dual RW compatible

The recorder is compatible with rewritable disc types, DVD-RW and DVD+RW, and the write-once type, DVD-R. These available disc types accommodate a wide range of uses, such as recording programs and creating personal video libraries. These discs can be played back on a wide variety of other DVD equipment.

Various recording/timer recording functions

(page 35)

In addition to the usual recording functions, such as Timer Recording and VCR Plus+, Synchro Rec allows sync hronized recording with a set top box or similar device.

Automatic searching for recording space

(page 37)

The recorder automatically searches for available blank space on the disc after you press the Rec button. No searching is required on your part – a feature possible only with a DVD recorder.

Adjustments for both recording and playback picture

The recorder allows you to adjust the picture quality of input sources, such as a VCR, which can then be recorded on a DVD. For instance, if you want to create an archive of your VHS tapes, you can adjust the recording picture quality to compensate for the quality of the tapes. Various picture quality adjustments are also available for DVD-Video software playback.

DVD- RW DVD+ RW

(page 46, 60)

(page 35)

DVD- R

Playback

Easy playback with the Title List menu

(page 53)

The recorder will display all of the titles you recorded on a disc in a list display, called the “Title List.” By selecting a title from the Title List menu, you can easily start playing or editing the disc. Moreover, you can have the recorder show the title’s contents using thumbnail images. The recorder also automatically takes program label information from the XDS (Extended Data Service)* and displays it as the title name.

* n o t available in some areas

TV Virtual Surround Settings, “TVS”

Using only your TV’s stereo speakers, the recorder is capable of reproducing dynamic surround sound from DVD-Video software’s multi-channel audio signals. There are four surround modes to choose from.

Title List

-RW.VR

Sort

Date

Number

Title

TITLE LIST

ORIGINAL

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

Mon 9/15 1:00PM( 1H00M) SP

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

Wed 9/17 8:00PM( 1H00M) SLP

3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM

Thu 9/25 9:00AM( 0H30M)

4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

Thu 9/25 8:00PM( 0H30M) SLP

My Movies

(page 58)

1.5/4.7GB

2ch

5ch

12ch

3ch

Editing a disc

Playlist edit (DVD-RW in VR mode only)

(page 67)

You can edit not only the recorded original title, but also perform advanced edit functions by creating a Playlist on the same disc. Since a Playlist does not require much disc space, you can create numerous Playlist titles. A Playlist edit can be redone as many times as you like, as the original title remains unchanged.

Chapter Marking function

On DVD-RWs in VR mode, you can manually insert chapter marks to divide a title into chapters which will enable you to quickly find specific scenes for playback or editing. For other disc types and recording formats, the recorder automatically creates chapter marks at specified intervals while recording.

Quick Search function

The remote has a Jog Stick for the recorder’s main operations. You can search forward or backwards, or play a t various speeds by using just your thumb. The feature helps you find sce nes easily, which is especially useful for both p layback and editing.

Jog Stick

(page 67)

(page 52)

Slow motion

Features

DVD Recorder Basics

Step 1: Select the disc type

Unlike a video tape which is sold by length, such as 60 min. or 120 min., recordable DVDs are sold by type. Select the disc type by following the chart on the back cover, as each type has different features. This recorder can record on the following type of discs.

When you want to record repeatedly on the same disc, or when you want to edit the disc after recording, select either the rewritable DVD-RW or DVD+RW type disc.

When you want to save recordings without any alteration, a non-rewritable DVD-R can be your choice.

Step 2: Format the disc to start recording

Insert the disc in the recorder. Unlike a VCR, the recorder automatically starts formatting when an unused disc is inserted. This is necessary to prepare the disc for recording.

When using a DVD-RW

This type of disc can be formatted in either DVD Video format (Video mode) or DVD Video Recording format (VR mode). Video mode discs can be played back on a variety of other DVD equipment.VR mode discs allow for more varied editing.

When using a DVD+RW

These discs will be formatted in DVD+RW Video format. This type of disc can be played back on a variety of other DVD equipment.

“What can I expect from DVD recording?” is a natural question for anyone new to the experience. This section explains the basic steps involved with DVD recording.

Note

There are other differences besides just being rewritable/non-rewritable.

See “Quick Guide to DVD Disc Types” on the back cover to select a disc most suitable for your needs.

When using a DVD-R

These discs will be formatted in DVD-Video format. This type of disc can be played back on a variety of other DVD equipment.

Notes

• You cannot mix two formats in one DVD-RW.

• You can change a DVD-RW’s format to the other format. However, the disc’s contents will be lost when reformatting.

• Not all discs can be played on other DVD equipment.

When formatting is complete, you are ready to record on the disc.

DVD Recorder Basics

1-1

Page 8

Step 5: Editing the recorded disc

You will find editing discs a lot easier than a conventional tape, and the recorder offers numerous edit functions, possible only with DVDs.

Quick and easy edits on the displayed menu

Editing is performed by simply selecting titles and scenes from the displayed menus.

Protection of individual titles

With conventional VCRs, you had to protect an entire tape to save the recordings from erasure or alteration. This recorder allows you to individually protect recorded titles (except for Playlist titles).

Edit and save on a single disc – Playlist edit (DVD-RWs in VR mode only)

To edit a conventional tape without affecting the original recording, you had to connect another VCR, copy the master tape using the two VCRs and one more tape, and start editing the copied tape.

Playing on other DVD equipment

For your DVD to play on other equipment, finalizing may be necessary in some cases. If so, finish up all your editing and recording first, and then finalize the disc.

When using a DVD-RW in VR mode

Although finalizing is generally unnecessary when playing the disc on VR mode compatible equipment, playback on some equipment requires a finalized disc. You can still edit and record on the disc even after finalizing.

When using a DVD+RW

The recorder automatically finalizes a disc before ejecting it. Finalizing in this case still allows you to further edit or record on the disc.

DVD Recorder Basics

With this recorder, you can create a Playlist (playback information) on the same disc, and edit the Playlist without changing the original recording(s). A Playlist does not take up much disc space, and all you need is one recorder and one disc.

Example: You have recorded a few football games on a DVD-RW in VR mode. You want to save the original recording, but you also want to create a digest by putting the goal scenes together. In this case, you can create a Playlist by selecting just the goal scenes, leaving the original recording as it is.

Original

Playlist

You’ve got your own DVD!

When using a DVD-RW in Video mode

The disc needs to be finalized first to enable playback on anything other than this recorder. No more editing or recording can be made on the disc once it has been finalized. To enable recording on the disc again, you will need to format it again. (Reformatting will erase all previous contents.)

When using a DVD-R

You will need to finalize the disc to play it on equipment other than this recorder. You cannot edit or record on the disc once it has been finalized.

Guide to Parts and Controls

For more information, see the pages in parentheses.

Front panel

Buttons on the recorder have the same function as the buttons on the remote if they have the same or similar names.

Open the panel.

(14, 57)

(22)

(38)

(50)

(38)

L x REC ST OP button

Stops recording.

M SYNCHRO REC indicator

Lights up when the Synchro Rec function is set to on.

TIMER REC indicator

Lights up when a timer recording is set.

FINALIZED indicator

Lights up if an inserted disc has been finalized.

PROGRESSIVE indicator

Lights up when outputting progressive signals.

N ZOOM +/– buttons

Switches the information displayed in the Title List menu.

O CURSOR MODE button

Switches the cursor/page mode in the Title List, etc.

P TOOLS button

Displays the TOOLS menu.

Q </M/m/,/ENTER button

(33)

Selects items or settings.

R RETURN button

Returns to the previously selected display, etc.

A @/1 (o n/standby) button/

indicator

(22, 38)

Turns the recorder on and off. Lights up in green when the power is on.

B Front panel display

Displays the playing status, title/chapter/time, etc.

C Disc tray

(38)

Opens to accept a disc.

D (remote sensor)

Accepts the remote control signal.

E Disc type indicators

Lights up to indicate the disc/ format type of the current disc.

F A (open/close) button

Opens or closes the disc tray.

G H (play) button/indicator

Plays a disc.

H X (pause) button/indicator

(52)

Pauses playing a disc.

I x (stop) button

J z REC button/indicator

K X REC PAUSE button/indicator

Stops playing a disc.

Starts recording.

(39)

Pauses recording.

(51)

(39)

S SYSTEM ME NU button

Displays the System Menu on the TV screen.

(47)

T ONE TOUCH DUB button

Records the contents of a DV/

(51)

(32)

Digital8 format tape with a single touch of the button.

U REC MODE button

Selects the recording mode.

V ./> (previous/next)

buttons

Goes to the next title/chapter/ track, or goes back to the previous title/chapter/track.

W CHANNEL +/– buttons

Selects the channel or input line.

X PROGRESSIVE button

Switches the output signal, progressive or interlace.

Y INPUT SELECT button

(38, 75, 88)

Selects equipment connected to the line inputs.

Z LINE 2 IN (S VIDEO/VIDEO/

AUDIO L/R) jacks

Connects external equipment.

wj DV IN jack

Connects digital equipment with a DV jack.

Guide to Parts and Controls

(40)

(73)

(32)

(33)

(31)

(78)

(38)

(52)

(38)

(51)

(88)

(76)

continued

Remote

Buttons on the remote have the same function as the buttons on the recorder if they have the same or similar names. Buttons with an orange dot next to them can be used with your TV when th e TV/DVD switch is set to TV.

Slide the cover.

A TV/DVD switch

B Z OPEN/CLOSE button

C Number buttons

D CLEAR button

E SUBTITLE button

F AUDIO button

G [TIMER] button

H TOP MENU button

I DISPLAY button

J TIME/TEXT button

K SYSTEM MEN U button

L TITLE LIST button

M CURSOR MODE button

N RETURN button

O . PREV (previous) button

P m / M (search) Jog Stick

Q H PLAY button

R X PAUSE b utton

(26)

Switches the remote control to TV or DVD.

Opens or closes the disc tray. Note that it may take a few seconds for the disc tray to open after you have recorded or edited a disc.

Select a number such as a channel or a title number. The number 5 button has a tactile dot.*

Cancels an entered number when used with this recorder.

Changes the subtitles while playing a disc.

Changes the sound while playing a disc. The button has a tactile dot.*

Displays the Timer progr amming menu on the TV screen.

Displays the disc’s menu on the TV screen.

Displays disc information or playing/recording status on the TV screen.

Displays the time information of the disc.

Displays the System Menu on the TV screen.

Displays the Title List menu on the TV screen.

Switches the cursor/page mode in the Title List, etc.

Returns to the previously selected display, etc.

Goes back to the previous title/chapter/track.

Searches fast-forward or reverses a scene (while playing a disc), or plays a disc in slow motion or frame by frame (in the pause mode).

Plays a disc. The button has a tactile dot.*

Pauses playing a disc.

(38)

(38, 44)

(44)

(60)

(57)

(40, 44)

(51)

(40, 56)

(56)

(31)

(32, 53, 64)

(32)

(33)

(52)

(50)

(52)

S z REC button

T REC MODE button

U INPUT SELECT button

V SYNCHRO REC button

X CH (channel) +/– buttons

Y VOL ( volume) +/– buttons

Z SET button

wj TV/VIDEO button

wk ANGLE button

wl WIDE MODE button

e; MENU button

es INSTANT REPLAY b utton

ed TOOLS button

ef ZOOM +/– buttons

eg </M/m/,/(ENTER) button

eh > NEXT button

ej x STOP button

ek x REC STOP button

el X REC PAUS E button

(38)

Starts recording.

(38)

Selects the recording mode.

Selects equipment connected to the line inputs.

Synchronizes the recorder and the timer recording set on the connected external equipment.

[/1

(on/standby) button

Turns the recorder on and off.

Selects the channel or input line.

Adjusts the volume of your TV or AV amplifier (receiver).

Use to enter the number selected with the number buttons 3.

Switches your TV’s input source.

Changes the angles when playing a DVD VIDEO.

Changes the wide mode settings of your TV.

Displays the disc’s menu on the TV screen.

Briefly fast forwards the current scene.

Replays the current scene.

Displays the TOOLS menu.

Switches the information displayed in the Title List menu.

Selects items or settings.

Goes to the next title/chapter/track.

Stops playing a disc.

Stops recording.

Pauses recording.

(38, 75, 88)

(47)

(38)

(34)

(26)

(59)

(26)

(51)

INSTANT SEARCH button

(32)

(52)

(51)

(39)

(38)

(26)

(52)

(33)

r; CHAPTE R MARK/ERASE buttons

Inserts/erases a chapter mark in the recorded title.

ra SUR (surround) button

Selects the surround mode.

rs COMMAND MODE switch (DVD 1,2,3)

Switches the command mode for this recorder. Match the switch to the same command mode set in the Options Setup (page 99).

*Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating the recorder.

(67)

(58)

(28)

Guide to Parts and Controls

1-2

Guide to Parts and Controls

continued

Page 9

Front panel display

Quick Overview

Basic Hookups and Settings

Quick Overview

A quick overview presented in this guide will give you enough information to start using the recorder.

Notes

• You cannot connect thi s rec orde r to a TV that does not have a video input jack.

• Be sure to disconnect the pow e r cor d of each component before connecting.

Step 1: Unpacking

Step 2: Connecting the Antenna Cable

Step 3: Connecting the Video Cords

Step 4: Connecting the Audio Cords

Step 5: Connecting the Power Cord

Step 6: Preparing the Remote

Step 7: Easy Setup

•

Quick Overview

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 15

•

Step 1: Unpacking

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 16

•

Step 2: Connecting the Antenna Cable

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 16

•

Step 3: Connecting the Video Cords

. . .

page 18

•

Step 4: Connecting the Audio Cords

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 19

•

Step 5: Connecting the Power Cord

. . .

page 22

•

Step 6: Preparing the Remote

. . . . . . .

page 22

•

Step 7: Easy Setup

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 22

•

Setting up the VCR Plus

System

. . . .

page 25

•

Setting Up the Remote

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 26

•

Connecting a VCR or Similar Recording Device to

the LINE Jacks

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 29

•

Connecting to a Satellite Receiver or a Cable Box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 30

Step 2: Connecting the Antenna Cable

Basic Hookups and Settings

Hookup 2: Connecting a cable box with many scrambled channels

Use this hookup if your cable system scrambles all or most channels. With this hookup: –You can record any un scrambled channel by selecting the

channel on the cable box. Be sure that the cable box is turned on.

–You canno t record one channel while watching another

channel.

Hint

If the cable box has the audio/video output jacks, connect them to the LINE IN 1 or 3 jacks of this recorder. You can record unscram ble d channels by setting the recorder’s input to “L1” or “L3.”

Note

When connecting the cable box with the antenna ho oku p only, set the recorder to the channel where the signal from the cabl e bo x appears on the TV screen.

Hookup 3: Connecting a cable box with only a few scrambled channels

Use this hookup if your cable system scrambles only a few channels. With this hookup: –You can record any n on-scrambled channel by selecting the

channel on the recorder.

–You cannot rec ord scrambled channels that require a cabl e box.

OUT

AC IN

S VIDEO

VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEOR-AUDIO-L

131

VHF/UHF

OUT

DIGITAL OUT

PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

CONTROL S IN

VHF/UHF

OUT

LINE IN LINE OUT

to VHF/UHF IN

Wall

DVD recorder

to VHF/UHF OUT

Cable box

to antenna input

Antenna cable (supplied)

: Signal flow

OUT

AC IN

S VIDEO

VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

LINE IN LINE OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEOR-AUDIO-L

131

VHF/UHF

OUT

DIGITAL OUT

PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

CONTROL S IN

VHF/UHF

OUT

to VHF/UHF IN

Wall

DVD recorder

to VHF/UHF OUT

Cable box

to antenna input

Antenna cable (supplied)

: Signal flow

A Command mode indicator

99)

Indicates the selected remote command mode.

B ANGLE indicator

C PLAYLIST indicator

D STEREO indicators

Hint

You can turn off the front panel display by setting “Dimmer” to “Display Off” in Options Setu p (page 99).

(59)

Lights up when you can change the angle.

Lights up when the Playlist is selected.

Lights up when receiving a stereo program.

(28,

(32)

(39)

E SAP (Second Audio Program)

(39)

indicator

Lights up when receiving a SAP signal.

F CATV indicator

Lights up when receiving a Cable TV programs.

Rear panel

VHF/UHF

DIGITAL OUT

PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

LINE IN LINE OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEOR-AUDIO-L

COAXIAL

OUT

CONTROL S IN

OPTICAL

S VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

G Displays the following

• Playing time/remaining time

• Current title/chapter/track/ index number

• Recording time

• Clock

• Channel

H Audio signal indicators

Lights up when playing Dolby Digital or DTS sound tracks.

AC IN

(57)

(58)

A VHF/UHF IN/OUT jacks

B COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y,

C AC IN terminal

D LINE OUT (S VIDEO/VIDEO/

Guide to Parts and Controls

Step 1: Unpacking

Check that you have the following items:

• Audio/video cord (pinplug u 3 y pinplug u 3) (1)

• Power cord (1)

• Antenna cable (1)

• Remote commander (remote) (1)

• Size AA (R6) batteries (2)

Step 2: Connecting the Antenna Cable

Select one of the following antenna hookups that best suits you below. Do not connect the power cord until you reach “Step 5:

Connecting the Power Cord” (page 22).

If you have Use

Antenna only (no cable TV), or cable without cable box

Cable box with many scrambled channels Hookup 2

Cable box with a few scrambled channels Hookup 3

Note to CATV system installer (in USA)

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820- 40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies t hat the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

Notes

• If your antenna is a flat cable (300-ohm twin lead cable), use an external antenna connector (not sup plied) to connec t the antenn a to the recorder.

• If you have separate cabl es for VHF and UHF antennas, use a UHF/ VHF band mixer (not supplied) to connect the antenna to the recorder.

Step 1: Unpacking

E LINE IN (S VIDEO/VIDEO/AUDIO

Connects antenna cables.

, PR) jacks

Connects equipment having component video input jacks.

Connects the power cord.

AUDIO L/R) 1/2 jacks

Connects the input of external equipment using an audio/ video or S VIDEO cord.

(16)

(18)

(22)

(18, 20)

L/R) 1/3 jacks

Connects the output of external equipment using an audio/ video or S VIDEO cord.

F DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL/

OPTICAL) jacks

Connects an amplifier (receiver) having a digital input jack.

G CONTROL S IN jack

Connects equipment having a CONTROL S jack.

Hookup 1

(page 16)

(page 17)

(29)

(20)

(18)

Hookup 1: Antenna only (no cable TV), or cable without cable box

Use this hookup if you are using a VHF/UHF ant enna or separate VHF and UHF antennas. Also use this hookup if you watch ca ble channels without cable box. With this hookup , you can record any non-scrambled channel by selecting the channel on the recorder.

to VHF/UHF IN

VHF/UHF

DIGITAL OUT

PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

LINE IN LINE OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEOR-AUDIO-L

COAXIAL

131

OUT

CONTROL S IN

OPTICAL

VHF/UHF

OUT

to VHF/UHF OUT

to antenna input

Antenna cable (supplied)

: Signal flow

DVD recorder

AC IN

S VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

1-3

Page 10

Step 3: Connecting the Video Cords

Connect this recorder to your TV monitor, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver) using a video cord. Select one of the following patterns A through C, according to the input jack on your TV monitor, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver). This will enable you to view pictures. Audio connections are e xplained in “Step 4: Connecting the Audio Cords” (page19).

If you are connecting to a VCR

Connect your VCR to the LINE IN (VIDEO) jack on the recorder (page 29).

A Connecting to a video input jack

Connect the yellow plug of the audio/video co rd (supplied) to the yellow (video) jacks. You will enjoy standard quality images. Use the red and white plugs to connect to the audio input jacks (page 20).

VHF/UHF

DIGITAL OUT

PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

LINE IN LINE OUT

VIDEOR-AUDIO-L

COAXIAL

131

OUT

CONTROL S IN

OPTICAL

LINE OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

(yellow)

Audio/video cord (supplied)

: Signal flow

B Connecting to an S VIDEO input jack

Connect using an S VIDEO cord (not supplied). You will enjoy high quality images.

VHF/UHF

DIGITAL OUT

PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

LINE IN LINE OUT

VIDEOR-AUDIO-L

COAXIAL

131

OUT

CONTROL S IN

OPTICAL

LINE OUT

S VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

S VIDEO cord (not supplied)

: Signal flow

Step 3: Connecting the Video Cords

DVD recorder

S VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

to LINE OUT (VIDEO) 1 or 2

(yellow)

DVD recorder

S VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

to LINE OUT (S VIDEO) 1 or 2

AC IN

INPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

TV, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver)

AC IN

INPUT

S VIDEO

TV, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver)

C Connecting to component video input jacks (Y, P

Connect the component via the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks using a component video cord (not supplied) or thr ee video cords (not supplied) of the same kind an d le ngth . Yo u wil l en jo y acc ur at e color reproduction and high quality images. If your TV accepts progressive (480p) format signals, yo u must use this connection and then press PROGRESSIVE on the front panel t o accept progressive video signals. See “Using the PROGRESSIVE button” (page 51) for more information.

VHF/UHF

OUT

CONTROL S IN

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

DIGITAL OUT

LINE IN LINE OUT

131

(green)

(blue)

(red)

VIDEOR-AUDIO-L

, PR)

S VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

to COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Component video cord (not supplied)

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

DVD recorder

(green)

(blue)

(red)

TV, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver)

AC IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

: Signal flow

When connecting to a standard 4:3 screen TV

Depending on the disc, the image may not fit yo ur TV screen. To change the aspect ration, see page 94.

If your TV has a CONTROL S jack

You can control the recorder by operating the remote toward the TV. This feature is convenient when you placed the rec order and the TV away from each other. After connecting the recorder to other equipment in pattern A, B, or C above, connect the CONTROL S IN jack to your TV’s CONTROL S (OUT) jack using a control S cord (not supplied). Refer to the instructions supplied with the TV to be connected.

LINE IN LINE OUT

S VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEOR-AUDIO-L

to CONTROL S IN

DVD recorder

AC IN

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

VHF/UHF

OUT

CONTROL S IN

DIGITAL OUT

PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

COAXIAL

131

CONTROL S IN

OPTICAL

CONTROL S

Control S cord (not supplied)

: Signal flow

Note

Consumers should note that not all high definition television sets are fully compatible with this pr o d uct and may cause artifacts to b e displayed in the picture. In the case of 480 progressive scan picture problems, it is recommended that the user switch the connection to the ‘standard definition’ output. If there are quest ions regarding our TV set compatibility with this model 480p DVD recorder, please contact our customer service center.

Step 4: Connecting the Audio Cords

Select the connection that best suits your system. Be sure to read the instructions for the components you wish to connect.

Connection Your setup

• Surround effects: Dynamic, Wide

Stereo amplifier (receiver) two speakers

• Surround effects: Standard

MD deck/DAT deck

• Surround effects: N one

AV amplifier (receiver) having a Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) decoder*1 and 3 to 6 speakers

• Surround effects: Dolby Surround (Pro Logic)

AV amplifier (receiver) with a digital input jack having a Dolby Digital or DTS*2 decoder and 6 speakers

• Surround effects: Dolby Digital (5.1ch), DTS (5.1ch)

Manufactured under license from Dolby laborato ries. “Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks of Digit al Theater Systems, Inc.

and

Step 4: Connecting the Audio Cords

Basic Hookups and Settings

continued

Connecting to your TV

This connection will use your TV’s speakers for sound.

VHF/UHF

DIGITAL OUT

PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

LINE IN LINE OUT

VIDEOR-AUDIO-L

COAXIAL

131

OUT

CONTROL S IN

OPTICAL

LINE OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

(yellow)*

(white)

(red)

Audio/video cord (supplied)

: Signal flow

* Th e yellow pl ug i s used for video signals (page18).

Hint

When connecting to a monaural TV, use a stereo-mon o conversion cord (not supplied). Connect the LINE OUT (R-AUDIO-L) 1/2 j acks to the TV’s audio input jack.

Note

Do not connect the LINE IN (AUDIO L/R) jacks to your TV’s audio output jacks at the same time.

DVD recorder

S VIDEO

VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

to LINE OUT (R-AUDIO-L) 1 or 2

(yellow)

(white)

(red)

AC IN

INPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

Connecting to a stereo amplifier (receiver) and 2 speakers/Connecting to an MD deck or DAT deck

If your stereo amplifier (receiver) only has audio input jacks L

B-1

and R, use . If your amplifier (receiver) has a digital input jack, or when connecting to an MD deck or DAT deck, use . In this case, you can also connect the recorder directly t o the MD deck or DAT deck without using your stereo amplifie r (receiver).

VHF/UHF

DIGITAL OUT

PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

LINE IN LINE OUT

VIDEOR-AUDIO-L

COAXIAL

131

OUT

CONTROL S IN

OPTICAL

Coaxial digital cord

B-2 B-1

(not supplied)

DIGITAL OUT

PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

to DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)

Optical digital cord (not supplied)

to coaxial or optical digital input

[Speakers]

Front (L)

S VIDEO

VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

Stereo amplifier (receiver)

MD deck/DAT deck

DVD recorder

R-AUDIO-L

LINE OUT

VIDEO

to LINE OUT (R-AUDIO-L) 1 or 2

(white)(red)

Stereo audio cord (not supplied)

(white)(red)

to audio input

AC IN

S VIDEO

Front (R)

: Signal flow

Hint

B-1

For connection , you can use the supplied audio/video cord instead of using a separate stereo audio cord.

Connecting to an AV amplifier (receiver) having a Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) decoder and 3 to 6 speakers

If your AV amplifier (receiver) only has L and R audio in put

C-1

jacks, use . If your amplifier (receiver) has a digital input

B-2

jack, use .

C-2

You can enjoy Dolby Surround effects only wh en playing Dolby Surround audio or multi-channel audio (Dolby Di gital) discs.

VHF/UHF

DIGITAL OUT

PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

LINE IN LINE OUT

VIDEOR-AUDIO-L

COAXIAL

131

OUT

CONTROL S IN

OPTICAL

Coaxial digital cord

C-2 C-1

(not supplied)

DIGITAL OUT

PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

to DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)

Optical digital cord

(not supplied)

DVD recorder

AC IN

S VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

LINE OUT

VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

to LINE OUT (R-AUDIO-L) 1 or 2

(white)

(red)

Stereo audio cord (not supplied)

(white)(red)

to coaxial or optical

digital input

[Speakers] [Speakers]

Amplifier (receiver) with Dolby Surround decoder

Rear (L) Rear (R)

Subwoofer

Center

to audio input

Front (R)

Front (L)

Rear (mono)

: Signal flow

Hint

For correct speaker location, see the operating instructions of the connected components.

Note

When connecting 6 speakers, replace the monaural rear speaker with a center speaker, 2 rear speakers, and a su bwoofer.

Connecting to an AV amplifier (receiver) with a digital input jack and 6 speakers

If your AV amplifier (receiver) has a Dolby Digital or DTS decoder and a digital input jack, use this connection. Note that the surround sound effects of this recorder cannot be used with this connection.

VHF/UHF

DIGITAL OUT

PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

LINE IN LINE OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEOR-AUDIO-L

COAXIAL

131

OUT

CONTROL S IN

OPTICAL

to DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)

DIGITAL OUT

S VIDEO

PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

Optical digital cord

(not supplied)

[Speakers] [Speakers]

AV amplifier (receiver) having a decoder

Rear (L)

Rear (R)

Subwoofer Front (L)

: Signal flow

Hint

For correct speaker location, see the operating instructions of the connected components.

Note

After you have completed the connection, be sure to set “Dolby Digital” to “Dolby Digital” and “DTS” to “On” under “Audio” in Easy Setup (page 24). Otherwise, no sound or a loud noise will com e from your speakers.

DVD recorder

S VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Basic Hookups and Settings

AC IN

Coaxial digital cord (not supplied)

to coaxial digital inputto optical digital input

Center

Front (R)

Step 4: Connecting the Audio Cords

1-4

Step 4: Connecting the Audio Cords

Page 11

Step 5: Connecting the

Step 7: Easy Setup

Basic Hookups and Settings

Press ENTER.

The Setup Display for selecting the language used in the on-screen display appears.

Press M/m to select a language, then press ENTER.

The Setup Display for clock setting appears.

Press M/m to select the item that matches the antenna connection you selected on page 16 (Hookup 1, 2, or 3).

◆ Hookup 1 and 3

Select “Auto,” then press ENTER. The recorder automatically sets the clock by searching for a channel that carries a time signal and sets your time zone and Daylight Saving Time (if applicable).

To activate the Auto Clock function, turn off the recorder after finishing Easy Setup. If your clock is set to the wrong time zone or Daylight Saving Time, you can adjust these settings (page 93). If your clock cannot be set automatically, set the clock manually (page 93).

◆ Hookup 2

Select “Manual,” then press ENTER. Set the clock manually using </M/m/,, and press ENTER.

Once the clock is set, the Tuner Preset display appears.

Press M/m to select the item that matches the antenna connection you selected on page 16 (Hookup 1, 2, or 3).

◆ Hookup 1 and 2

• Antenna

◆ Hookup 3

• Cable

Press ENTER.

The Tuner Preset function automatically starts searching for all of the receivable channels and presets them.

To set the channels manually, see page 92.

After the Tuner Preset is finished, the Setup Display for selecting the aspect ratio of the connected TV appears.

Press M/m to select the setting that matches your TV type.

◆ If you have a 4:3 standard TV

• 4:3 Letter Box Displays a wide picture with bands on the upper and lower sections of the screen.

• 4:3 Pan Scan Automatically displays a wide picture on the en tire screen and cuts off the sections that do not fit.

◆ If you have a wide-screen TV or a 4:3 standard TV with a wide-screen mode

• 16:9

For details, see “TV type” on page 94.

Language 1/5

Select the screen Language.

English

Français

EASY SETUP

Clock 2/5

Select a method for setting the clock. If you select "Auto", this recorder will look for a time signal when you turn it off.

Auto

Manual

EASY SETUP

Clock 2/5

Set the time and date manually.

9Sun / /14 9 00 AM:2003

Tuner Preset 3/5

Select the way in which you will receive channels.

Antenna

Cable

EASY SETUP

Tuner Preset 3/5

Searching for receivable channels. Please wait.

Ch45

EASY SETUP

TV Type 4/5

Select your TV screen type.

16 : 9

4 : 3 Letter Box

4 : 3 Pan Scan

continued

Setting Up the VCR Plus® System

Basic Hookups and Settings

Setting Up the VCR Plus® System

Setting up your recorder involves coordina ting the TV channel number (the number you turn to on your TV or recorder to watch a program) with the guide channel (the number that’s assigned to that channel in your TV program guide). To find the guide channel numbers, look at the “Channel Lineup Chart” in the program gu i d e f o r your area that features VCR PlusCode numbers. Use the Channel Line-up Chart to check that the guide channel numbers match the TV channel your recorder receives. If not, you need to coordinate these numbers using the following procedure. If the guide and TV channel numbers are the same, you can skip this procedure.

Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is stopped.

The System Menu appears.

Press M/m to select “SETUP,” then press ENTER.

The Setup Display appears.

Press M/m to select “Settings,” then press ENTER.

Press M/m to select “Set VCR Plus+ Channels,” then press ENTER.

The display for setting VCR Plus+ channels appears.

Press M/m to select “Guide CH – TV CH,” then press ENTER.

Enter the guide channel number assigned in the program guide using the number buttons, then press SET.

Enter the TV channel number.

◆ For Hookup 1 or 3

(page 16)

Enter the actual number on your TV (and recorder) using the number buttons, then press SET.

◆ For Hookup 2

(page 17)

Enter the cable box output channel (usually 2, 3, or

4) using the number buttons, then press SET.

Repeat steps 5 to 7 for each channel number that does not match.

Press SYSTEM MENU repeatedly to exit the menu.

To return to the previous step

Press RETURN.

</M/m/,, ENTER

RETURN

SYSTEM MENU

Number buttons, SET

TITLE LIST

TIMER

TIMER LIST

DV/D8 EDIT

SETUP

Plays/erases/edits recorded titles.

SYSTEM MENU

DVD Recorder

Dual RW

Compatible

SETUP

Settings

Video

Audio

Features

Options

Easy Setup

Tuner Preset

Set VCR Plus+ Channels

Clock

Language

Settings - Set VCR Plus+ Channels

----

Channel list

Guide CH TV CH

- -

Settings - Set VCR Plus+ Channels

Guide CH TV CH

- - ----

- -

Settings - Set VCR Plus+ Channels

Guide CH TV CH

- - ----

- -

Settings - Set VCR Plus+ Channels

Guide CH TV CH

- - ----

- -

continued

Power Cord

Connect the supplied power cord to the AC IN terminal of the recorder. Then plug the recorder and TV power cords into an AC outlet. After you connect the power cord, you must wait for a short while before operating the recorder. You can operate the recorder once the front panel display lights up and the recorder enters standby mode. If you connect additional equipment to this recorde r (pages 29 to

30), be sure to connect the power cord after all connections are complete.

AC IN

to AC IN

to AC outlet

Step 6: Preparing the Remote

You can control the recorder using the supplied remote. Insert two Size AA (R6) batteries by matching the 3 and # ends on the batteries to the markings inside the battery compartment. When using the remote, point it at the remote sensor on the recorder.

Notes

• If the supplied remote interferes your other Sony DVD recorder or player, change the command mode number for this recorder. For details, see page 28.

• Do not leave the remo te in an extremely hot or humid place.

• Do not drop any foreign objec t into the remote casing, particularly when replacing the batteries.

• Do not expose the remote sensor to direct sunlig ht or a light in g apparatus. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

• If you do not use the remote for an extended period of time, remove the batteries to avoid possible damag e from bat ter y leakag e and co rrosi on.

Step 7: Easy Setup

Follow the steps below to make the minimum number of basic adjustments for using the recorder. If you do not complete Easy Setup, it will appear each time you turn on your recorder. Make the settings below in the following order.

OSD Language Setup

Clock Setup

Tuner and Channel Setup

TV Type Setup

Audio Connection Setup

"/1

RETURN

Turn on the TV.

Press [/1.

The recorder turns on and the power indicator on the front panel lights up in green.

Switch the input selector on your TV so that the signal from the recorder appears on your TV screen.

“Initial settings necessary to operate the DVD recorder will be made. You can change them later using Setup.” appears. If this message does not appear, select “Easy Setup” from “SETUP” in the System Menu to run Easy Setup. For details, see

“Settings and Adjustments” on page90.

</M/m/,, ENTER

Step 5: Connecting the Power Cord

Step 7: Easy Setup

Press ENTER.

The Setup Display for selecting the type of jack used to connect to your amplifier (receiver) appears.

EASY SETUP

Audio Connection 5/5

Is this recorder connected to an amplifier (receiver)? Select the type of jack you are using.

Yes :

LINE OUT(R-AUDIO-L)

Yes :

DIGITAL OUT

Press M/m to select the type of jack (if any) you are using to connect to an amplifier (receiver), then press ENTER.

Choose the item that matches the audio connection you selected on pages 20 to 21 ( through ).

• If you connect just a TV and nothing else, select “No,” then go to step 15.

B-1 C-1

• Select “Yes: LINE OUT (R-AUDIO-L),” then go to step 15.

B-2 C-2

• Select “Yes: DIGITAL OUT.” The Setup Display for “Dolby Digital” appears.

Press M/m to select the type of Dolby Digital signal you wish to send to your amplifier (receiver).

Choose the signal that matches the audio connection you selected on pages 20 to 21 ( through ).

EASY SETUP

Dolby Digital

D-PCM

Dolby Digital

B-2 C-2

• D-PCM

• Dolby Digital (only if the amplifier (receiv er) has a Dolby Digital decoder)

Press ENTER.

The Setup Display for selecting the type of DTS signal appears.

EASY SETUP

DTS

Off

A D

Audio Connection 5/5

Press M/m to select whether or not you wish to send a DTS signal to your amplifier (receiver) and press ENTER.

Choose the item that matches the audio connection you selected on pages 20 to 21 ( through ).

B-2 C-2

• Off

• On (only if the amplifier (receiver) ha s a DTS decoder)

Press ENTER when “Finish” appears.

Easy Setup is finished. All connections and setup operations are complete.

EASY SETUP

Easy Setup is finished

Finish

To return to the previous step

Press RETURN.

Hint

If you want to run Easy Setup again, select “Easy Setup” in the Setup Display (page 100).

Notes

• If there are only a few channels in your area that carry time signals , setting the clock automatically may take up to about 20 minutes after

the recorder turns off. If nothing happens even after you wait about 20 minutes, set the clock manually in “Clock” of “Settings” (page9 3).

• If you use the antenn a connection Hookup 2 (page 17), make sure you leave the cable box on.

• To record TV programs using the time r, you m ust set the clock accurately.

1-5

Page 12

To check the channel settings

When displaying the “Set VCR Plus+ Channels” menu, press M/m to select “Channel List,” then press ENTER. The display lists the channels whose guide channel number is not as same as the TV channel number.

Settings - VCR Plus+ Channel List

Guide CH TV CH

121

To go to the next page, press m. To return to the previous page, press M.

Guide CH TV CH

Page2

- -

Setting Up the Remote

You can control your TV with the supplied remote by adjusting the remote control’s signal. If you connected the recorder to an AV amplifier (receiver), you can also control the volume with the supplied remote.

Notes

• Depending on the connec ted unit, you may not be able to control your TV or AV amplifier (receiver) with some or all of the bu tt on s below.

• If you enter a new cod e number, the code number previously entered will be erased.

• When you replace the batteries of the remote, the code numb er may be reset to the default setting. Set the appropriate code num ber again.

Controlling TVs with the remote

TV/DVD switch

"/1

Number buttons, SET

a Slide the TV/DVD switch to TV.

b Hold down [/1.

c Enter your TV’s manufacturer code (see

“Code numbers of controllable TVs” below) using the number buttons.

d Release [/1.

When the TV/DVD switch is set to TV, the remote performs the following:

[/1 Turns your TV on or off VOL +/– Adjusts the volume of your TV CH +/– Selects the channel on your TV WIDE MODE Switches to or from the wide mode of a

TV/VIDEO Switches your TV’s input source Number buttons and

SET

Sony wide-screen TV

Selects the channel on your TV

CH +/–

VOL +/–

TV/VIDEO

WIDE MODE

Code numbers of controllable TVs

If more than one code number is listed, try entering them one at a time until you find the one that works with your TV.

Manufacturer Code number

Sony 01 (default) Akai 04 AOC 04 Centurion 12 Coronado 03 Curtis-Mathes 12 Daytron 12 Emerson 03, 04, 14 Fisher 11 General Electric 06, 10 Gold Star 03, 04, 17 Hitachi 02, 03 J.C.Penney 04, 12 JVC 09 KMC 03 Magnavox 03, 08, 12 Marantz 04, 13 MGA/Mitsubishi 04, 12, 13, 17 NEC 04, 12 Panasonic 06, 19 Philco 03, 04 Philips 08, 21 Pioneer 16 Portland 03 Proscan 10 Quasar 06, 18 Radio Shack 05, 14 RCA 04, 10 Sampo 12 Samsung 03, 12, 20 Sanyo 11, 14 Scott 12 Sears 07, 10, 11 Sharp 03, 05, 18 Sylvania 08, 12 Teknika 03, 08, 14 Toshiba 07 Wards 03, 04, 12 Yorx 12 Zenith 15

Controlling the volume of your AV amplifier (receiver) with the remote

TV/DVD switch

"/1

Number buttons, SET

VOL +/–

a Slide the TV/DVD switch to DVD.

b Hold down [/1, and enter the manufacturer

code (see the table below) for your AV amplifier (receiver) using the number buttons.

c Release [/1.

The VOL +/– buttons control the AV amplifier’s volume.

◆ If you want to control the TV’s volume

Slide the TV/DVD switch to TV.

Hint

If you want to control the TV’s volume even when the TV/DVD switch is set to DVD, repeat the steps above and enter the code number 90 (default).

Code numbers of controllable AV amplifiers (receivers)

If more than one code number is listed, try entering th e m on e at a time until you find the one that works with your AV amplifier (receiver).

Manufacturer Code number

Sony 80, 88, 89, 91 Denon 84, 85, 86 Kenwood 92, 93 Onkyo 81, 82, 83 Pioneer 99 Sansui 87 Technics 97, 98 Yamaha 94, 95, 96

Basic Hookups and Settings

Setting Up the Remote

If you have a Sony DVD player or more than one Sony DVD recorder

If the supplied remote interferes with your other Sony DVD recorder or player, set the command mode number for this recorder and the supplied remote to one that differs from the other Sony DVD recorder or player. The default command mode setting for this recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3.

SYSTEM MENU

RETURN

a Press SYSTEM MENU.

The System Menu appears.

b Press M/m to select “SETUP,” then press

ENTER.

SETUP

Settings

Tuner Preset

Video

Set VCR Plus+ Channels

Audio

Clock

Features

Language

Options

Easy Setup

c Press M/m to select “Options,” then press

ENTER.

SETUP

Settings

Selectable

Format Disc :

Video

Bright

Dimmer :

Audio

Auto Display :

Features

DVD3

Command Mode :

Options

Factory Setup

Easy Setup

M/m, ENTER

COMMAND MODE

d Press M/m to select “Command Mode,” then

press ENTER.

SETUP

Settings

Selectable

Format Disc :

Video

Bright

Dimmer :

Audio

Auto Display :

Features

DVD3

Command Mode :

Factory Setup

DVD1

DVD2

DVD3

Options

Easy Setup

e Press M/m to select the Command mode

(DVD1, DVD2, or DVD3), then press ENTER.

f Slide the COMMAND MODE switch on the

remote so it matches the mode you selected above.

To return to the previous step

Press RETURN.

Connecting a VCR or Similar Recording Device to the LINE Jacks

You can use this recorder as the source player or as the recording deck. After disconnecting the recorder’s power cord from an AC outlet, connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE jacks of this recorder. Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the equipment has a DV output jack (i.LINK jack) (page 75). See also the instruction manual supplied with the connected equipment.

How to connect to record on this recorder

Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE IN jacks of this recorder. See “Recording from connected equipment” on

page 88.

VCR, etc.

OUTPUT

AUDIO

VIDEO

131

LINE IN

LINE IN LINE OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEOR-AUDIO-L

Audio/video cord (not supplied)

S VIDEO

VIDEOR-AUDIO-L

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

S Video

S VIDEO cord (not supplied)

DVD recorder

AC IN

S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

to LINE IN 1 or 3

VHF/UHF

DIGITAL OUT

PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OUT

CONTROL S IN

OPTICAL

: Signal flow

Hint

You can also use the LINE 2 IN jacks on the front panel of the recorder (page 88).

Notes

• Do not connect the yellow LINE IN (VIDE O) ja c k whe n usin g an S VIDEO cord (not supplied).

• Pictures conta ining copy protection signals that prohibit any copying cannot be recorded.

Setting Up the Remote

How to connect to record on other equipment

Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE OUT jacks of this recorder.

VCR, etc.

INPUT

AUDIO

VIDEO

LINE IN LINE OUT

131

LINE OUT

VIDEOR-AUDIO-L

S VIDEO

Audio/video cord (not supplied)

S VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

S Video

S VIDEO cord (not supplied)

DVD recorder

AC IN

to LINE OUT 1 or 2

VHF/UHF

OUT

CONTROL S IN

DIGITAL OUT

PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

: Signal flow

Notes

• If you pass the recorder sign als via the VCR, you may not receive a clear image on the TV screen.

VCRDVD recorder TV

• Do not connect the ye ll ow LINE IN (VIDEO) jack when using an S VIDEO cord (not supplied).

continued

Basic Hookups and Settings

Setting Up the Remote

1-6

Connecting a VCR or Similar Recording Device to the LINE Jacks

Page 13

Connecting to a Satellite

Guide to Displays

Operating the Recorder

The recorder’s overall operati on is simple. Generally, most operations can be performed by pressing only </M/m/,, and ENTER. Once you know the common procedure, you will find the recorder easy to operate.

Guide to Displays

The recorder uses the following four types of displays for most operations: System Menu, Title List, TOOLS, and Sub-menu. It also has a Disc Information displa y f o r ch ec k i ng the s t at us of the inserted disc, and an on-screen keyboard that enables yo u to label a title or disc.

System Menu

The System Menu appears when you press SYSTEM MENU, and provides entries to all of the recorder’s main functions.

1 TITLE LIST (page 53, 64):

Turns on the Title List menu, which shows recorded titles on the disc.

2 TIMER (page 40):

Allows you to set a new timer recording setting.

3 TIMER LIST (page 42):

Turns on the Timer List menu, which allows you to check, change, or cancel timer settings.

4 DV/D8 EDIT (page 79):

Activates the DV Edit function, which allows you to record and edit the contents of a DV/Digital8 format tape.

5 SETUP (page 91):

Turns on the Setup Display, which allows you to set up the recorder to suit your preferences.

Number buttons, SET

TITLE LIST

TOOLS

ZOOM +/–

</M/m/,, ENTER

SYSTEM MENU

CURSOR MODE

RETURN

TITLE LIST

TIMER

TIMER LIST

DV/D8 EDIT

SETUP

Plays/erases/edits recorded titles.

SYSTEM MENU

DVD Recorder

Dual RW

Compatible

•

Guide to Displays

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 31

•

How to Use the Displays

. . . . . . . . . . .

page 33

•

How to Enter Characters

. . . . . . . . . . .

page 34

continued

How to Use the Displays

Operating the Recorder

Sub-menu

The sub-menu appears when you select an item from the displayed list menu and press ENTER. The sub-menu displays options applicable only to the selected item.

Example: The Title List menu

How to Use the Displays

Use the displays in the following way. The procedure is common to many of the operations.

Press SYSTEM MENU.

The System Menu appears with entries to the main functions.

Press M/m to select a function, then press ENTER.

The display for the selected function appears.

Example: When “TITLE LIST” is selected.

◆ Using the TOOLS menu

Use the TOOLS menu to display options for the entire disc.

A Press TOOLS.

The TOOLS menu appears.

B Press M/m to select the option, then press

ENTER.

◆ Using the sub-menu

The sub-menu displays options for a specific title.

A Press M/m to select the title on the list, then

press ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

B Press M/m to select the option, then press

ENTER.

Press RETURN repeatedly to turn off the list display.

To return to the previous display

Press RETURN.

Sort

Date

Number

Title

My Movies

TITLE LIST

ORIGINAL

-RW.VR

1.5/4.7GB

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM

4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

6 L2 9:00PM - 9:30PM

7 8ch 9:00PM - 9:30PM

8 125ch 10:00AM - 10:30AM

9/15

9/17

9/25

10/15

10/19

10/26

10/28

Play

Play From Start

Erase

Protect Title

Title Name

Set Thumbnail

A-B Erase

Options for the selected item

Sort

Date

Number

Title

My Movies

TITLE LIST

ORIGINAL

-RW.VR

1.5/4.7GB

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM

4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

6 L2 9:00PM - 9:30PM

7 8ch 9:00PM - 9:30PM

8 125ch 10:00AM - 10:30AM

9/15

9/17

9/25

10/15

10/19

10/26

10/28

Receiver or a Cable Box

Connect a satellite receiver, digital cable box, or a cable box to this recorder using the LINE IN 1/3 jacks. Disconnect the recorder’s AC power cord from an AC outlet when connecting the box. To record on this recorder, see page 88. To use the Synchro Rec function, see below.

Satellite receiver, etc.

OUTPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

Audio/video cord (not supplied)

LINE IN

S VIDEO

VIDEOR-AUDIO-L

to LINE IN 1 or 3 DVD recorder

VHF/UHF

DIGITAL OUT

PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

LINE IN LINE OUT

S VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

VIDEOR-AUDIO-L

COAXIAL

131

OUT

CONTROL S IN

OPTICAL

: Signal flow

If you want to use the Synchro Rec function

Connect a satellite receiver to LINE IN 1 jacks of this recorder.

See “Recording from External Equipme nt with a Timer (Synchro Rec)” on page 47.

Refer to your satellite receiver’s instructions for more information.

Notes

• Synchro-Recording doe s not work with some boxes. For details, refer to the box’s operating instructions.

• When connecting the LINE IN jacks to the cable box, be sure to also connect the recorder’s antenna to the cable box.

AC IN

S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Connecting to a Satellite Receiver or a Cable Box

Title List

The recorder uses list displays for some operations. The most frequently used is the Title List menu. The Title List menu appears when you press TITLE LIST or when you select “TITLE LIST” from the System Menu, and displays all of the titles on the disc. To show the list in greater details (zoom), press ZOOM+. To return to the previous display, press ZOOM–.

Standard Title List

“Zoomed” Title List

Notes

• The letters that c ann ot be displayed are replaced with “*”.

• The Title List does not appear when you play DVD VIDEOs, CDs, CD-Rs, or CD-RWs.

• The Title List may not appear for discs created on other DVD recorders.

• On this model, 1 GB is eq ui val e nt to 1 billion bytes.

Guide to Displays

-RW.VR

Sort

Date

Number

Title

-RW.VR

Sort

Date

Number

Title

1 Sort buttons (page 54):

Sorts the title order.

2 Zooming indicator (page54):

Shows the current zoom status.

3 Disc name (page 72) 4 Disc space (remainder/total) 5 Title information (page 54):

Displays the title number, title name, and recording date.

6 Scroll bar:

Appears when all the titles do not fit on the list. To view the hidden titles, press M/m.

7 Title’s thumbnail picture (page 54)

My Movies

TITLE LIST

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM

4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

6 L2 9:00PM - 9:30PM

7 8ch 9:00PM - 9:30PM

8 125ch 10:00AM - 10:30AM

TITLE LIST

1.5/4.7GB

ORIGINAL

9/15

9/17

9/25

10/15

10/19

10/26

10/28

My Movies

1.5/4.7GB

ORIGINAL

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

2ch

Mon 9/15 1:00PM( 1H00M) SP

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

5ch

Wed 9/17 8:00PM( 1H00M) SLP

3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM

12ch

Thu 9/25 9:00AM( 0H30M)

4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

3ch

Thu 9/25 8:00PM( 0H30M) SLP

About the types of Title List menus

The appearance of the Title List menu differs according to the disc type and recording format.

◆For DVD+RWs, DVD-Rs, DVD-RWs (Video mode):

The Title List menu appears and displays the titles on the disc.

◆For DVD-RWs (VR mode):

The Title List (Original) or Title List (Playlist) menu appears and displays the Original or Playlist titles on the disc. The “PLAYLIST” indicator lights up on the front p anel display wh en the Title List (Playlist) menu is selected.

To switch the Title List menu for a DVD-RW (VR mode)

The recorder displays either the Original or Playlist Title List. Follow the steps below.

Press TITLE LIST.

The Title List menu appears.

Press TOOLS.

The TOOLS menu appears.

Press M/m to select either “Original” or “Playlist,” whichever is not displayed, then press

ENTER.

The display switches to the selected Title List menu.

To scroll the list display by page (Page mode)

Press CURSOR MODE while the list display is turned on. The display enters Page mode. Each time you press M/ m, the entire Title List changes to the next/previous page of titles. To return to the Cursor mode, press CURSOR MODE again.

Notes

• When you turn off the list displ ay, th e Page mode is canceled.

• When all the ti tles on the disc fit on a single page, you cannot sele ct the Page mode.

TOOLS

The TOOLS menu appears when you press TOOLS, and displays options applicable to the entire disc or recorder.

Example 1: When you press TOOLS while the Title List menu is turned on.

Options for the disc or menu

-RW.VR

Sort

Date

Playlist

Number

Erase Titles

Title

Create Playlist

Disc Info.

TOOLS

Example 2: When you press TOOLS while a DVD is playing.

Stop

Title Search

Chapter Search

Time Search

TOOLS

Options for the disc or picture

TITLE LIST

ORIGINAL

1 2ch 1:00PM- 2:00PM

2 5ch 8:00PM- 9:00PM

3 12ch 9:00AM- 9:30AM

4 3ch 8:00PM- 8:30PM

5 25ch 8:00PM- 8:30PM

6 L2 9:00PM- 9:30PM

7 8ch 9:00PM- 9:30PM

8 125ch 10:00AM-10:30AM

My Movies

1.5/4.7GB

9/15

9/17

9/25

10/15

10/19

10/26

10/28

1-7

Page 14

How to Enter Characters

You can label a title, disc, or program by ente r ing characters. You can enter up to 64 characters for a title/disc/program name, but the actual number of characters displayed in the menus such as the Title List will vary. When the display for entering characters appears, follow the steps below.

Press </M/m/, to move the cursor to the right of the screen and select “A” (uppercase), “a” (lower-case), or “Symbol,” then press ENTER.

The characters of the selected type are displayed.

Example: Input Title Name

Input Title Name

25ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

,. - 1

BA C 2

ED F 3

HG I 4

KJ L5

Press </M/m/, to select a character you want to enter, then press ENTER.

The selected character appears at the top of the display.

Input Title Name

,. - 1

BA C 2

ED F 3

HG I 4

KJ L5

To enter a letter with an accent mark, select an accent followed by the letter. Example: Select “ ` ” and then “a” to enter “à.”

To insert a space between the characters, select “Space.”

Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter all the characters for the name.

Input Title Name

Kids

,. - 1

BA C 2

ED F 3

HG I 4

KJ L5

How to Enter Characters

"A"

NM O 6

"a"

Back

QP R S

Symbol

Clear All

UT V 8

XW Y Z79

Space

Cancel

Finish

"A"

NM O 6

"a"

Back

QP R S

Symbol

Clear All

UT V 8

XW Y Z79

Space

Cancel

Finish

"A"

NM O 6

"a"

Back

QP R S

Symbol

Clear All

UT V 8

XW Y Z79

Space

Cancel

Finish

◆ To erase a character

A Press </M/m/, to move the cursor to the

input row.

B Press </, to move the cursor to the right of

the character you want to erase.

C Press </M/m/, to select “Back,” then press

ENTER.

◆ To insert a character

A Press </M/m/, to move the cursor to the

input row.

B Press </, to move the cursor to the right of

the point where you want to insert a character.

C Press </M/m/, to select the character you

want to insert, then press ENTER.

◆ To erase all the characters

Press </M/m/, to select “Clear All,” then press ENTER.

Press </M/m/, to select “Finish,” then press ENTER.

To cancel the setting, select “Cancel.”

To use the number buttons

You can also use the number buttons to enter characters.

In step 2 above, press the number buttons repeatedly to select the character you want to enter.

Example: Press the number 3 button once to enter “D.” Press the number 3 button three times to enter “F.”

Select the next character, or press SET.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter all of the characters for the name.

Press </M/m/, to select “Finish,” then press ENTER.

Recording/ Timer Recording

This section covers the basics of DVD recording, and the available methods for setting the timer.

•

Before Recording

•

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Recording TV programs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Timer Recording

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adjusting the Recording Picture Quality and Size

. . .

Recording from External Equipment with a Timer

(Synchro Rec)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 35

page 38

page 40

page 46

page 47

Before Recording

This recorder can record on various discs. Before you record, read the following and select the disc type according to your needs.

Recordable discs

This recorder can record on the following discs.

◆Disc type

DVD-RW*

Ver. 1.1 Ver. 1.1 with CPRM*

DVD+RW*

DVD-R*

Ver. 2.0

*1“DVD-RW,” “DVD+RW,” and “DVD-R” are trademarks.

CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media) is a coding technology that protects copyrights fo r im ag es .

DVD-RWs and DVD+RWs are rewritable. DVD-Rs are nonrewritable. The recorder cannot record on the following discs:

• 8 cm discs

• DVD+R

• DVD-RW (Ver 1.0)

• DVD-RAM

• CD-R/CD-RW

Notes

• The following type of high-speed discs can be used for recording: up to 2×-speed DVD-RWs (Revision 1.0), up to 4×-speed DVD-Rs (Revision 1.0), or up to 4×-speed DVD+RWs. Note that high-speed discs will not record at higher speed. You cannot re cord on the disc if it is not 1×-speed compatible.

• Use a disc with CPRM to record Copy-Once TV programs (page 36).

• It is recommen ded that you use discs with “For Video” printed on their packing.

• You cannot add new recordings to DVD-Rs and DVD-RWs (Video mode) that contain recordings made on other DVD recorders.

• In some cases, you may not be able to add ne w recordi ng s to DVD+RWs that contain recordings made on other DVD recorders. If you do add a new recording, note that this recorder wil l re w ri te the DVD menu. If the disc contains PC data unrecognizable by this recorder, the data will be erased.

Before Recording

Recording/Timer Recording

continued

About recording formats

When you insert an unused disc, the recorder automatically starts formatting. Since available functions differ depending on the disc type, select the disc that best suits your needs using the chart below. You can preset the format for unused DVD-RWs in Options Setup. When “Format Disc” is set to either “VR” or “Video” (page 99), the recorder starts formatting in the selected mode without asking for confirmation. Select “Selectable” if yo u want to select the mode each time you insert an unused DVD-RW.

Differences between the disc types

See pages in parentheses for details.

Disc type Characteristics

– Automatically creates chapters at specified

intervals (page 97)

– Simple editing (erasing titles/changing

title name) (page 64)

– Creates chapters manually or

automatically (page 67 )

– Various editing options using a create d

Playlist (page 67)

– Records Copy-Once programs provided

that the disc has CPRM

Notes

• To play a recorded disc on other DVD equipment, you need to finalize the disc. For details on finalizing, see page 73.

• You cannot mix the two formats on one DVD-RW. To change the disc’s format, reformat the disc (page 74). Note that the disc’s contents will be erased after reformatting.

Recording mode

While the recorder is stopped, you can select one of six recording modes by pressing REC MODE repeatedly for the desired recording time and picture quality. The picture quality generally improves as the recording time decreases.

Recording mode Recording time (minute)

HQ 60 HSP 90 SP (Standard mode) 120 LP 180 EP 240 SLP 360

Notes

• The recording times are an estimate and actual times may differ.

• Situations below ma y cause slight inaccuracies with the recording time.

– Recording a program with poor reception, or a program or video source

of low picture quality

– Recording on a disc that has already been edited – Recording only a still picture or just sound

Before Recording

Unrecordable pictures

Pictures with copy protection cannot be recorded on this recorder. When the recorder receives a copy guard signal while recording, the recorder stops recording and a message appears on your TV screen.

About pictures with Copy Control Signals

Broadcasts that contain Copy Control Signals m ay h ave one of the following three signal types, Copy-Free, Copy-Once, and Copy-Never. This recorder limits the recording according to copy protection signal as shown below. If you want to record a Copy-Once program, use a DVD-RW with CPRM in VR mode.

◆Available recording options

Copy-

CopyOnce

a*——

CopyNever

—

DVD-RW (Ver.1.1) a —— DVD-RW (Ver.1.1

with CPRM

DVD+RW a —— DVD-R (Ver.2.0) a ——

*The recorded disc can be played only on CPRM compatible

equipment.

Free

VR mode Video modeaa

Checking the available disc space (Disc Info.)

When recording on a used disc, make sure that there is enough disc space for recording. With DVD-RWs or DVD+RWs, you can free up disc space by erasing titles.

a Press TOOLS while the disc is in the

recorder.

The TOOLS menu appears.

b Press M/m to select “Disc Info.,” then press

ENTER.

The Disc Information display appears. Items in the display differ depending on the disc type or recording format. Note that the remaining disc space indicator is an estimate and actual available space may differ.

Example: DVD-RW (VR mode)

Disc Information

DiscName Movie

Media DVD-RW Format VR

Title no. Original 3 / Playlist 2

Protected Not Protected

Date 9/15/2003 ~ 10/28/2003

HQ : 0H30M LP : 1H30M

Remainder

1 Disc Name 2 Media:

Disc type

3 Format:

Recording format type (DVD-RW only)

4 Title no.:

Total number of titles

5 Protected:

Indicates whether protection is set (DVD-RW in VR mode only)

6 Date:

Dates when the oldest and the most recent titles are recorded

7 Continuous Rem. Time/Remainder:

• The longest continuous recording time in each of the recording modes (approximate)

• D isc space bar (approximate)

• Re maining disc space/total disc space (approximate)

8 Disc setting buttons

• Disc Name: Labels the disc (page 72)

• Prote ct Disc: Protects the disc (DVD-RW in VR mode only) (page72)

• Fina lize: Finalizes the disc/Creates a DVD menu

(page 73)

• Unfinalize: Unfinalizes the disc if it has already been finalized (DVD-RW in VR mode only) (page 73)

• Eras e All: Erases all titles on the disc (page 73)

• Format: Reformats the disc (page 74)

HSP : 0H45M EP : 2H00M

SP : 1H00M

SLP : 3H00M

2. 3 / 4. 7GB

Disc Name

Protect Disc

Finalize

Erase All

Format

◆How programs are recorded on a DVD-R

A new program is recorded on the last space [a] only. Check that the remaining disc space is large enough for the recording.

Erasing “B” does not free up any space

A CB

You cannot free up disc space on a DVD-R. Erasing a title will only hide the title name in the Title List menu. The erased titles will still take up space on the disc.

◆How programs are recorded on a DVD-RW (VR mode)

A program is recorded on the free disc space [a]. Check that the total remaining disc space is large enough for recording.

Erasing “B” frees up more space

A CB

A C

New recording New recording

◆To free up disc space

You can free up disc space by erasing titles. The original title used for a Playlist cannot be erased. To erase a title, see page 65. To erase multiple titles, see page 65.

◆How programs are recorded on a DVD-RW (Video mode) or DVD+RW

The recorder searches for the largest block of space [a] and records there. Check that there is a continuous free block large enough for the recording. If not, the recording will stop.

Erasing “B” and “C” creates a block of free space

A D

B C

New recording

◆To check or free up disc space

For DVD-RWs (Video mode) and DVD+RWs only, you can check free disc space and title location, and also erase titles using the Disc Map display (see below).

Hint

You can erase all of the disc’s titles (other than protected titles) at once (page 73).

Notes

• When you er ase titles, the title order may change d epending on the disc type or format.

• After finalizing, you cannot record further on a DVD-RW (Vid eo mode) or DVD-R.

New recording

(continued)

Before Recording

Recording/Timer Recording

continued

1-8

Page 15

To free up disc space using the Disc Map

Recording TV programs

Recording/Timer Recording

Press Z OPEN/CLOSE, and place a recordable disc on the disc tray.

Press Z OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc tray.

Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front panel display. If you use an unused DVD, formatting starts automatically. When using an unused DVD-RW, select the recording format, VR or Video.

Press CH +/– to select the channel or input source you want to record.

Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the recording mode.

Each time you press the button, the display changes on the TV screen as follows:

For more details of the recording mode, see page 36.

Press z REC.

Recording starts. Recording continues until you stop the recording or the disc is full.

To stop recording

Press x REC STOP. Note that it may take a few seconds for recording to stop.

To pause recording

Press X REC PAUSE. To restart recording, press the button again.

To watch another TV program while recording

Set the TV to TV input using the TV/VIDEO button.

Hints

• You can also start and stop reco rding using the TOOLS menu. Press TOOLS and select “Record” or “Rec Stop,” then press ENTER.

• You can stop re cording from the Title List menu as well. Select the title you are currently recording and pr ess EN TER. Th en se lect “Rec Stop” from the sub-menu.

• If you do not want to w at c h TV w hi l e recording, you can turn off the TV. When using a cable box, make sure to leave it on.

• To select a chann el, you can also use the number buttons and SET button in step 5 above.

• If you record fro m e quipment connected to the recorder’s input jack , you can also use the INPUT SELECT button to select “L1,” “L2,” “L3,” or “DV” in step 5. For details, see “Recording from connected equipment” (page 88).

• You can also sele c t the rec ord ing mode using the TOOLS menu (page 46).

Notes

• After pressing z REC, it may take a short while to start recording.

• While recording or during re cording pause, you cannot change the recording mode.

• If there is a power fail ur e, the program you are recording may be erased.

• When you use Hookup 2 (page 17), you cannot watch a cable TV program while recording another cable TV program .

Using the Quick Timer function

You can set the recorder to record in 30 minute increments by pressing just the z REC button.

Press z REC repeatedly to set the duration time.

Each press advances the time in 30 minute increments. Th e maximum duration is six hours.

The time counter decreases minute by minute to 0:00, then the recorder stops recording (power does not turn off). Even if you turn off the recorder during recording, the recorder continues to record until the time counter runs out.

To cancel the Quick Timer

Press z REC repeatedly until the counter appears in the front panel display. The recorder returns to normal recording mode.

Recording a stereo program and SAP

The recorder automatically receives and records a stereo program and SAP.

◆Stereo programs

When a stereo program is received, the “STEREO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. If there is noise in the stereo program, set “Auto Stereo” in Audio Setup to “Off” (p age 95). The sound will be recorded in monaural but with less noise.

◆SAP (Second Audio Program)

When a SAP (Second Audio Program) is received, the “SAP” indicator lights up on the front pan el display. To record only SAP sound, set “Tuner Audio” in Audio Setup to “SAP” (page 95).

With the recording side facing down

HQ SP LP EPHSP SLP

0:30 1:00

5:30

6:00

(normal recording)

continued

Timer Recording

Recording/Timer Recording

d Press Z OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc tray.

Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front panel display. If you use an unused DVD, formatting starts automatically. When using an unused DVD-RW, select the recording format, VR or Video.

e Press [TIMER].

The Timer programming (Standard) menu appears.

If the Timer programming (VCR Plus+) menu appears, press < to switch the display.

f Set the following items using

</M/m/,

A Press M/m to set the date, then press ,.

Each time you press M/m, the item changes as follows.

Today y Tomorrow y …… y Tue 10/28 (1 month later) y Sun (every S unday) y …… y Sat (every Saturday) y Mon-Fri (Monday to Friday) y Mon-Sat (Monday to Saturday) y Sun-Sat (Sunday to Saturday) y Today

B Press M/m to set the start time, then press ,. C Press M/m to set the stop time, then press ,. D Press M/m to set the channel, then press ,.

When you set the timer for recording from connected equipment, select “Line1,” “Line2,” or “Line3.”

E Press M/m to select the recording mode (HQ,

HSP, SP, LP, EP, or SLP), then press ,.

◆ If you make a mistake

Press </, to select the item you want to change.

◆ To exit without saving the current setting

Press </M/m/, to select “Cancel,” then press ENTER.

g Press </M/m/, to select “OK,” then press

ENTER.

The Timer List menu appears. The TIMER REC indicator lights up on the front panel and the recorder is ready to start recording.

h Press RETURN to turn off the Timer List, or

press [TIMER] and repeat from step 5 to enter additional timer settings.

Unlike a VCR, there is no need to turn off the recorder before the timer recording starts.

To stop recording during timer recording

Press x REC STOP.

If the timer settings overlap

Overlapped timer settings are shown as follows.

To store the setting, press </, to select “OK,” then press ENTER. The programs are recorded in order of priority (page 43). To cancel or chan ge t he setting, select “Cancel.”

To confirm, change, or cancel timer recording

See “Checking/changing/canceling timer settings (Timer List) ” (page 42).

Hints

• For recording over the next day, leave the starting date setting as it is, and enter the ending time in the se tting. The date will automatica lly change to the next day.

• You can also displa y the timer programming menu by: – selecting “TIMER” from the System Menu. – selecting “Set Timer” from the TOOLS menu while the Timer List

menu is displayed.

• You can also use th e re corder even when the recorder stands by for recording. To remind you of the timer setting, a message appears on your TV screen five minutes before the timer recording starts.

Notes

• If “The disc is full or nearly full” appears on the screen, change the disc, or make available space for the recording (DVD-RW/DVD+RW only).

• Check that the cloc k is correctly set before setting the timer recording. If not, the timer recording cannot be made. To record a satellite program , turn on the satellite receiv er a nd select the satellite program you want to record. Leave the satellite receiver turned on until the recorder finishes recording. If yo u co nnect equipment with a timer function, you can use the Synchro Rec function (page47).

Rec Mode Adjust

If there is not enough available disc space for the recording, the recorder automatically selects the recording mode to enable the program to be recorded. This function is normally set to on.

◆To cancel the function

A Press TOOLS while the Timer List is displayed. B Press M/m to select “Rec Mode Adjust,” then press

ENTER.

C Press </, to select “Off,” then press ENTER.

Note

This function only works with a timer recording. It does not function with Quick Timer or Synchro Rec.

Timer - Standard

Set the timer manually.

Date

VCR Plus+

Today

Start CH

ModeStop

Cancel

Timer - Standard

VCR Plus+

Cancel

Set the timer manually.

Date

Tomorrow PM PM

Start CH Mode

Stop

800 830

107 SP

Timer

These timer settings overlap. Do you want to save this setting?

Cancel

Mon-Sat 10:00AM - 10:30AM 25ch SP

Wed 10/29 9:00AM - 10:15AM 3ch SLP

continued

display (DVD-RWs in Video mode, DVD+RWs only)

The Disc Map display in the TOOLS menu allows you to check the disc status and erase titles on the disc.

Press TITLE LIST while the disc is in the recorder.

Press TOOLS.

Press M/m to select “Disc Map” from the TOOLS menu, then press ENTER.

The Disc Map display appears.

◆ To check free disc space

Press </, to select an open space. The remaining space and the longest recording time in each of the recording modes appears.

Disc Map

Empty

HQ[ 0H30M]

HSP[ 0H45M]

SP[ 1H00M]

EP[ 2H00M]

2.3GB

SLP[ 3H00M]

Cancel

Selected open space

◆ To free up disc space by erasing a title using the Disc Map

A Press </, to select the title you want to

Selected title

B Press m to select “Erase,” then press ENTER.

C Press </, to select “OK.”

D Press RETURN repeatedly to turn off the Title

Note

You cannot erase a title during playback or reco rdi ng.

LP [ 1H30M]

Erase

erase, then press ENTER.

The title is selected.

Disc Map

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

Wed 9/17 8:00PM( 1H00M) SP 0.6GB

To cancel the selection, press ENTER again. Repeat step 1 to erase multiple titles.

Erase Cancel

The display asks for confirmation.

All of the selected titles are erased, freeing up disc space. If you want to change your selection, select “Change.”

List menu.

Recording TV programs

Before you start…

• Check that the disc has enough available spa ce for the recording (page 37).

• Adjust the recording picture quality and picture size if necessary (page 46).

}/1Z OPEN/CLOSE

Number buttons, SET

DISPLAY

z REC

REC MODE

INPUT SELECT

Press }/1.

The recorder turns on and the power indicator on the front panel lights up in green.

Turn on the TV, and switch the input selector on your TV so that the signal from the recorder appears on the TV screen.

◆ When using an amplifier (receiver)

Turn on the amplifier (receiver) and select the appropriate channel so that you can hear sound from the recorder.

CH +/–

TV/VIDEO

TIME/TEXT

TOOLS

</M/m/,, ENTER

X REC PAUSE

x REC STOP

Recording TV programs

Checking the disc status while recording

You can check the recording information such as recordi ng time or disc type.

a Press DISPLAY twice during recording.

b Press DISPLAY to turn off the display.

Creating chapters in a title

The recorder can automatically divide a recording (a title) into chapters by inserting chapter marks at 6 or 15 mi nute intervals during recording. Select the interval, “6Min” (default) or “15Min” in “Auto Chapter” of Features Setup (page 97) .

You can make chapters manually when playing DV D-RWs (VR mode). For details, see page 67.

Notes

• If “Auto Chap te r” is set to “Off” in Features Setup, no chapters are automatically created.

• When no more chapter mar ks can be added, you may not be able to make additional recordings or edit the disc.

Timer Recording

The recording information appears.

DVD-RW VIDEO

1 Disc type/format 2 Recording status 3 Recording mode 4 Recording time

Hint

1:23:45SP

Timer Recording

You can set the timer for a total of 30 programs up to one month in advance. There are two setting methods: the manual setting and VCR Plus+ setting.

• Standard: Set the date, time, and channel of the program manually.

• VCR Plus+: Enter the PlusCode number designated for each TV program (page 44).

Before you start…

• Check that the disc has enough available spa ce for the recording (page 37).

• Adjust the recording picture quality and picture size if necessary (page 46).

Setting the timer manually (Standard)

[TIMER]

SYSTEM MENU

RETURN

a Press }/1.

b Turn on the TV, and switch the input selector

on your TV so that the signal from the recorder appears on the TV screen.

◆ When using an amplifier (receiver)

Turn on the amplifier (receiver) and select the appropriate channel so that you can hear sound from the recorder.

c Press Z OPEN/CLOSE, and place a

recordable disc on the disc tray.

"/1Z OPEN/CLOSE

TOOLS

</M/m/,, ENTER

x REC STOP

1-9

Page 16

To extend the recording duration time

You can extend the recording duration while recording.

Press TOOLS during recording.

Press M/m to select “Extend Rec. Time,” then press ENTER.

The following display appears.

Extend Rec. Time

Set the timer extend function.

Sun 9/28 10:00AM - 11:30AM 3ch SP

Extend Time

Off

Press M/m to select the duration time, then press ENTER.

You can set the duration in increments of 10 minutes, up to 60 minutes.

Press </M/m/, to select “OK,” then press ENTER.

Hint

You can also extend the recording duration tim e using “Extend Rec” in the sub-menu of the Timer List.

Timer Recording

Cancel

Checking/changing/canceling timer settings (Timer List)

You can check, change, or cancel timer settings using the Timer List menu.

a Press SYSTEM MENU.

The System Menu appears.

b Press M/m to select “TIMER LIST,” then

press ENTER.

The Timer List menu appears.

Start CH ModeStop

10 00 10 15

Sports

-RW VR

SLP

Cancel

25 SP

TIMER LIST

Sat 10/25 8:30PM - 9:30PM 4ch

Mon-Sat 10:00AM - 10:30AM 25ch

Wed 10/29 9:00AM - 10:15AM 3ch

Thu 10/30 4:00PM - 5:00PM 125ch

1 Disc name

To enter a disc name, see “Labeling a disc (Disc Name)” (page 72).

2 Timer information:

Displays the recording date, time, recording mode, etc.

•❐ indicates the overlapped setting. (red) indicates the setting currently being

•

recorded.

(grey) indicates that the setting cannot be recorded

•

in the selected recording mode.

c Press M/m to select the setting you want to

check/change/cancel, then press ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

d Press M/m to select one of the following ite ms.

• Modify

• Erase

• Check Overlap

◆ To modify the setting

A Select “Modify,” then press ENTER.

The display for modifying appears.

Modify

Modify the timer setting.

Date

Mon-Sat PM PM

B Press </M/m/, to select the item and

change the setting.

To undo the change, press </M/m/, to select “Cancel,” then press ENTER or RETURN. To change another setting, repeat step 2.

C Press </M/m/, to select “OK,” then press

ENTER.

◆ To erase the setting

A Select “Erase,” then press ENTER.

The display asks for confirmation.

Erase

Are you sure you want to erase this timer setting?

Mon-Sat 10:00AM - 10:30AM 25ch SP

OK Cancel

If you do not want to erase the setting, select “Cancel,” then press ENTER or RETURN.

B Press </, to select “OK,” then press

ENTER.

◆ To check for overlapped settings

A Select “Check Overlap,” then press ENTER.

The display for confirming overlapped settings appears. The timer setting set most recently is listed at the top and has priority. You may not be able to record the program that has low priority.

Check Overlap

These timer settings overlap.

Mon-Sat 10:00AM - 10:30AM 25ch SP

Wed 10/29 9:00AM - 10:15AM 3ch SLP

Change priority Close

To change a priority, press </, to select “Change priority.” For details, see “Changing the priority of overlapped settings” below.

B Press </, to select “Close.”

To change or cancel the setting, press RETURN to return to the Timer List menu, and repeat steps

3 and d above.

e Press RETURN to turn off the Timer List.

Hint

While recording, you cannot modify the timer setting for the current recording, but you can extend the recording duration of the rec ording time (page 42).

Note

Even if the timer is set for the same program daily or weekly, the timer recording cannot be made if it overlaps with the program that has priority. A mark will appear ne xt to th e overlapped setting in the Timer List. Check the priority order of the settings.

Changing the priority of overlapped settings

The recorder records the programs according to priority if the timer settings overlap. The timer setting set last has priority. If the timer settings overlap, the program that has priority will be recorded. A timer recording of lower priority will be canceled, start from the middle, or stop on the way. Check the overlapped timer settings and change the priority if necessary.

When the timer settings overlap

If the timer is set using the manual or VCR Plus+ setting, the program set last has priority.

Example: you set the timer in order of A, B, and C (setting C has first priority)

7:00

Actual recording

7:00 9:00 10:30

If you give priority to setting B over setting C, program B will be entirely recorded and program C is recorded only after program B has finished.

7:00 9:00 11:00

Hint

You can change the priority of a timer setting during recording.

Note

If the end time of one recording an d the start time of another are th e same, the beginning or end of a program of lower priority may be c ut. Example: you made the timer setting A after B

7:00 9:00 10:00

a Press SYSTEM MENU.

The System Menu appears.

b Press M/m to select “TIMER LIST,” then

press ENTER.

The Timer List menu appears.

TIMER LIST

Sat 10/25 8:30PM - 9:30PM 4ch

Mon-Sat 10:00AM - 10:30AM 25ch

Wed 10/29 9:00AM - 10:15AM 3ch

Thu 10/30 4:00PM - 5:00PM 125ch

will be cut off

9:00 11:00

10:30

ABC

Sports

-RW VR

SLP

Timer Recording

Recording/Timer Recording

continued

c Press M/m to select the setting for which you

want to change a priority order, then press ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

d Press M/m to select “Check Overlap,” then

press ENTER.

The display for confirming overlapped settings appears.

Check Overlap

These timer settings overlap.

Mon-Sat 10:00AM - 10:30AM 25ch SP

Wed 10/29 9:00AM - 10:15AM 3ch SLP

Change priority Close

e Press </, to select “Change priority,”

then press ENTER.

The display for changing priority appears.

Change priority

3ch Wed 10/29 9:00AM

Where do you want to move this timer setting?

25ch Mon-Sat 10:00AM

f Press M/m to move the timer setting where

you want, then press ENTER.

The program moves to its new location in the list. A program higher up in the list has higher priority. To return to the Timer List, select “Cancel.”

Cancel

g Press RETURN to turn off the Timer List.

Recording TV programs using the VCR Plus+ system

The VCR Plus+ system is a feature that simplifies setting timer recordings. Just enter the PlusCode number listed in the TV program guide. The date, time, and channel of that program are set automatically. Check that the TV and guide channels are correctly set in “Set VCR Plus+ Channels” in “Settings” (page 93).

"/1Z OPEN/CLOSE

Number buttons

CLEAR

[TIMER]

RETURN

SET

</M/m/,, ENTER

x REC STOP

a Press }/1.

b Turn on the TV, and switch the input selector

on your TV so that the signal from the recorder appears on the TV screen.

◆ When using an amplifier (receiver)

Turn on the amplifier (receiver) and select the appropriate channel so that you can hear sound from the recorder.

c Press Z OPEN/CLOSE, and place a

recordable disc on the disc tray.

d Press Z OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc tray.

Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front panel display. If you use an unused DVD, formatting starts automatically. When using an unused DVD-RW, select the recording format, VR or Video.

e Press [TIMER].

The Timer programming (VCR Plus+) menu appears.

Timer - VCR Plus+

Set the timer by entering the PlusCode.

PlusCode

Standard

If the Timer programming (Standard) menu appears, press < to switch the display.

f Press the number buttons to enter the

PlusCode number, then press SET.

◆ If you make a mistake

Press CLEAR and re-enter the correct number.

◆ To cancel the setting

Press </M/m/, to select “Cancel,” then press ENTER.

g Press </M/m/, to select “OK,” then press

ENTER.

The date, start and stop times, channel, and recording mode appears.

Timer - VCR Plus+

Is the follwing timer setting correct? To modify, adjust each item or re-enter the PlusCode.

Date

Start CH ModeStop

Mon 6/28 AM AM

10 00 11 30

◆ If you want to change the setting

A Press </, to select the item you want to

change.

B Press M/m to change the setting.

To cancel the setting, select “Cancel.” To re-enter the PlusCode number, select “Change.”

h Press </M/m/, to select “OK,” then press

ENTER.

The TIMER REC indicator lights up on the front panel, and the recorder is ready to start recording.

i Press RETURN to turn off the display.

To record from a decoder or other source, leave the connected equipment turned on.

To stop recording during timer recording

Press x REC STOP.

If the timer settings overlap

See page 41.

To confirm, change, or cancel timer recording

See “Checking/changing/canceling timer settings (Timer List)” (page 42).

107 HQ

Cancel

Change

Hints

• The Rec Mode Adjust function also works with this timer setting method (page 41).

• You can extend the recording duration time during recording (page42).

• You can also displa y the timer programming menu by: – selecting “TIMER” from the System Menu. – selecting “Set Timer” from the TOOLS menu while the Timer List

menu is displayed.

Notes

• Check the clock set before setting the timer recording. If not, the timer recording cannot be made.

Recording/Timer Recording

Timer Recording

1-10

Timer Recording

Page 17

Adjusting the Recording

Recording from External Eq uipment with a Timer (Synchro Rec)

Recording/Timer Recording

Recording from External Equipment with a Timer (Synchro Rec)

You can set the recorder to automatically record programs from connected equipment that has a timer function (such as a satellite receiver). Connect the equipment to the LINE IN 1 jacks of the recorder (page 30). When the connected equipment turns on, the recorder starts recording a programme from the LINE IN 1 jacks.

Press }/1.

Turn on the TV, and switch the input selector on your TV so that the signal from the recorder appears on the TV screen.

◆ When using an amplifier (receiver)

Turn on the amplifier (receiver) and select the appropriate channel so that you can hear the sound from the recorder.

Press Z OPEN/CLOSE, and place a recordable disc on the disc tray.

Press Z OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc tray.

Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front panel display. If you use an unused DVD, formatting starts automatically. When using an unused DVD-RW, select the recording format, VR or Video.

Select the line input audio when recording a program having two types of sound.

A Press INPUT SELECT to select “L1.” B Press TOOLS. C Press M/m to select “Line Audio Input,” then

press ENTER.

D Press M/m to select “Main/Sub*,” then press

ENTER.

* W he n re cording a program having two types of sound, select

“Main/Sub.” Both sounds can be recorded. You can select e ither sound when playing a disc. Select “Main/Sub” only when using a DVD-RW (VR mode). For other discs, select “Stereo.” Only stereo sound is recorded.

Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the recording mode, HQ, HSP, SP, LP, EP, or SLP.

Set the timer on the connected equipment to the time of the program you want to record, and turn it off.

Press SYNCHRO REC.

The SYNCHRO REC indicator lights up on the front panel. The recorder automatically turns off and stands by for Synchro-Recording. The recorder automatically starts recording when it receives an input signal from the connected equipment. The recorder stops recording when the connected equipment turns off.

To stop recording

Press x REC STOP.

To cancel Synchro Rec

Press SYNCHRO REC or turn on the recorder before the Synchro-Recording Starts. The SYNCHRO REC indicator turns off.

If the timer settings of a Synchro-Recording and another timer recording overlap

Regardless of whether or not the program is a Synchro Rec program, the program that starts first has priority and the seco nd program starts recording only after the first program has finished.

Before you start…

• Check that the disc has enough availabl e space for the recording (page 37).

• Adjust the recording pictu re quality and picture size if necessary (page 46).

REC MODE

</M/m/,, ENTER

"/1

Z OPEN/CLOSE

x REC STOP

SYNCHRO REC

TOOLS

INPUT SELECT

7:00 8:00 9:00 10:00

First program

Second program

will be cut off

continued

Before Playing

Playback

This section explains the basics of playback, such as playable disc types, and describes the settings necessary for playback in general.

Before Playing

Read the following information before playing a disc.

Playable discs

This recorder can play the following discs in both the 12 cm and 8 cm sizes.

◆Disc types

* “DVD VIDEO,” “DVD-RW,” “DVD+R,” “DVD+RW,” and “DVD-

R” are trademarks.

Region code (DVD VIDEO only)

Your recorder has a region code printed on the rear of the unit and will only play DVD VIDEOs (playback only) labeled with identical region codes. This system is used to protect copy rights.

DVD VIDEOs labeled will also play on this recorder.

If you try to play any other DVD VIDEO, the message “Playback prohibited by region code.” will appear on the TV screen. Depending on the DVD VIDEO, no region code indication may be labeled even though playing the DVD VIDEO is prohibited by area restrictions.

DVD VIDEO*

DVD-RW*

Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.1 Ver. 1.1 with CPRM

DVD+RW*

DVD-R*

DVD+R*

Music CD

CD-R/CD-RW

(Music CD format only)

ALL

RDR–XXXX

00V 00Hz

00W

NO.

0-000-000-00

Region code

•

Before Playing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 49

•

Playing Discs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 50

•

Selecting a Recorded Title on a Disc

. . . . . . . . .

page 53

•

Searching for a Title/Chapter/Track

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 55

•

Checking the Play Information and Playing Time

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 56

•

Selecting the Sound

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 57

•

TV Virtual Surround Settings (TVS)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 58

•

Changing the Angles

. . . . . . . .

page 59

•

Displaying the Subtitles

. . . . . .

page 60

•

Adjusting the Playback Picture and Sound

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 60

continued

Picture Quality and Size

You can adjust the recording picture quality and picture size.

TOOLS

RETURN

Press TOOLS before recording starts.

The TOOLS menu appears.

Press M/m to select “Rec Settings,” then press ENTER.

The following display appears.

Rec. Settings

Select the item you want to change.

Rec Mode :

Rec Screen Size :

Rec NR :

Rec Video Equalizer

Press M/m to select the item you want to adjust, then press ENTER.

The adjustment display appears.

Example: Rec NR

Rec NR

Off 1 2 3

</M/m/,, ENTER

4 : 3

◆ Rec Mode

Selects the recording mode for the desired recording time and picture quality. For more information, see “Recording mode” (page 36).

• HQ

• HSP

• SP (default)

• LP

• EP

• SLP

◆ Rec Screen Size

Sets the picture size of the program to be recorded

• 4:3 (default): Sets the picture size to 4:3.

• 16:9: Sets the picture size to 16:9 (wide mode).

This function works with DVD-Rs and DVD-RWs (Video mode) when the recording mode is set to HQ, HSP, or SP. For all other recording modes, the screen size is fixed at “4:3.” For DVD-RWs (VR mode), the actual picture size is recorded regardless of the setting. For instance, if a 16:9 size picture is received, the disc records the picture as 16:9 even if “Rec Screen Size” is set to “4:3.” For DVD+RWs, the screen size is fixed at “4:3.”

◆ Rec NR (noise reduction)

Reduces noise contained in the video signal.

◆ Rec Video Equalizer

Adjusts the picture in greater detail. Press M/m to select the item you want to adjust, then press ENTER.

• Contrast: Changes the contrast .

• Brightness: Changes the overall brightness.

• Color: Makes the colors deep er or lighter.

• Hue: Changes the color balance.

Adjust the setting using < /M/m/,, then press ENTER.

The larger the number, the greater the effect. The default setting is underlined.

Items Settings

Rec NR Off Rec Video Equalizer

Contrast –3 ~ 0 Brightness –3 ~ 0 Color –3 ~ 0 Hue –3 ~ 0

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust any other items.

Press RETURN to turn off the display.

Note

The adjustments made here are for the recorder and ca nnot be saved for individual titles.

1 ~ 3

~ 3 ~ 3 ~ 3 ~ 3

Adjusting the Recording Picture Quality and Size

Notes

• The recorder starts record ing only after detecting the video signal from the connected equipment. The beginning of the pro gram may not be recorded.

• You cannot set Synchro-Recording only by pre ssin g the SYNCH RO REC button when the recorder is turned off. Be sure to turn on the recorder first to set Synchro-Recording.

• While Synchro-Re cording, other operations such as normal recording cannot be done.

• Do not turn on the recorder wh ile it stands by for Synchro-Recording. Synchro-Recording will be canceled.

• Any program that contains a Copy-Never copy guard signal cannot be recorded. When you record a program that contains a Copy-Once signal, use a DVD-RW (Ver. 1.1 with CPRM) in VR mode for recording. For details, see “Unrecordable pictures” (pag e 36).

• When using the Synchro Rec function, do not use the VCR control function on connected equipment.

• To use the connected equipment while the recorder is standing by for Synchro-Recording, cancel Synchro-Recording by pressing SYNCHRO REC. Before timer recording starts, be sure to turn off the connected equipment, then turn on the recorder and press SYNCHRO REC to reset Synchro-Recording.

• The Synchro Rec function does not work with some satellite receivers. For details, refer to the satellit e receiver’s operating inst ructions.

Recording from External Equipment with a Timer (Synchro Rec)

1-11

Page 18

Discs that cannot be played on this recorder

The recorder cannot play the following discs:

• All CD-ROMs (including PHOTO CDs)

• CD-Rs/CD-RWs, other than those recorded in the music CD format

• Data part of CD-Extras

• VIDEO CDs

• Super VCDs

• DVD-ROMs

• DVD Audio discs

• DVD-RAMs

• HD layer on Super Audio CDs

• DVD VIDEOs with a different region code (page 49)

• A disc recorded in a color system other than NTSC, such as PAL or SECAM

Notes on playing DTS sound tracks on a CD

• When playing DTS-encoded CDs, excessive noise will be heard from the analog stereo jacks. To av oid possible damage to the audio system, the consumer should take proper precautions when the analog stereo jacks of the recorder are connected to an amplification system. To enjoy DTS Digital Surround™ playback, an external 5.1-channel decode r system must be connected to the digital jack of the recorder.

• Set the sound to “Stereo” using the AUDIO button when you play DTS sound tracks on a CD (page 57).

• Do not play DTS sound tracks without fi rst connecting the recorder to an audio component having a built-in DT S decoder. The recorder outputs the DTS signal via the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL or OPTICAL) jack even if “DTS” is set to “Off” in the Audio Setup (page 96), and m ay affect your ears or cause your speakers to be damaged.

Notes on playing DVDs with a DTS sound track

• DTS audio signals are out put only through the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL or OPTICAL) jack.

• When you play a DVD with DTS sound tracks, set “DTS” to “On” in the Audio Setup (page 96).

• If you connect the recorder to audio equipment without a builtin DTS decoder, do not set “DTS” to “On” in the Audi o Setup (page 96). A loud noise may come out from the speakers, affecting your ears or causing th e speakers to be damaged.

Notes

• The following type of high -speed discs can be played back on this recorder: up to 2u-speed DVD-RWs (Revision 1.0), up to 4u-speed DVD-Rs (Revision 1.0), or up to 4u-speed DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs.

• DVD-RW/-Rs, DVD+RWs/+Rs, or CD-RW/-Rs recorded on another recording device cannot be played on this recorder i f they have not been correctly finalized. Some discs cannot be p layed due to the recording quality or physical condition of the disc, or th e characteristics of the recording device and authoring software.

Playing Discs

Depending on the disc, some operations may differ, or certain restrictions may apply. Refer to the operating i nstructions supplied with your disc.

"/1Z OPEN/CLOSE

Number buttons, SET

TOP MENU

H PLAY

Press }/1.

The recorder turns on and the power indicator lights up in green.

Turn on the TV, and switch the input selector on your TV so that the signal from the recorder appears on the TV screen.

◆ When using an amplifier

Turn on the amplifier (receiver) and select the appropriate channel so that you can hear sound from the recorder.

Press Z OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray.

Place a disc on the disc tray.

With the playing side facing down

Press Z OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc tray.

Wait until “LOAD” disappears in the front panel display.

</M/m/,, ENTER

x STOP

◆ When playing a DVD-RW/DVD+RW/DVD-R

You can select the title from the Title List menu. See “Selecting a Recorded Title on a Disc” (page 53).

◆ If a menu appears on the TV screen

See “Using the DVD’s Menu” below.

Press H PLAY.

The recorder starts playback.

To adjust the volume

Adjust the volume of your TV or amplifier (receiver).

To stop playback

Press x STOP.

To turn off the recorder

Press @/1.

Hint

You can also start or stop playback using the TOOLS menu.

To play a DVD VIDEO for which Parental Control is set

When the message “Do you want temporarily change parental control to *?” appears on the TV screen, follow the steps below.

Press </, to select “OK,” then press ENTER.

The display for entering your password appears.

Parental Control

Enter your password.

Password

Enter your four digit password using the number buttons.

The cursor moves to “OK.”

Press ENTER to select “OK.”

The recorder starts playback.

To register or change the password, see “Parental Control (DVD VIDEO only)” (page 97).

Cancel

Using the DVD’s Menu

When you play a DVD VIDEO which contains several titles, you can select the title you want using the TOP MENU or MENU button. When you play DVD VIDEOs that allow you to select items such as the language for the subtitles and the language for the sound, select these items using the MENU button.

a Press TOP MENU or MENU.

The disc’s menu appears on the TV screen. The contents of the menu vary from disc to disc.

b Press </M/m/, or the number buttons to

select the item you want t o play or change.

c Press ENTER.

Hint

If you are playing a finalized DVD-R, DVD+RW, or DVD-RW (Video mode), you can display the menu with the TOP MENU or MENU button. See “Finalizing a disc (Finalize)” (page 73) for more informat ion about finalizing and DVD menus.

Using the PROGRESSIVE button

You can fine-tune the Progressive 480p video signal ou t put when you press PROGRESSIVE on the front panel (the PROGRESSIVE indicator lights up) and connect the recorder using the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to a TV that is able to accept the video signal in progressive format. Press PROGRESSIVE repeatedly to toggle the displays as follows:

INTERLACE (the PROGRESSIVE indicator turns off)

PROGRESSIVE (the PROGRESSIVE indicator lights up)

• INTERLACE Select this when you are connected to a standard (Interlace format) TV.

• PROGRESSIVE Select this when you are connected to a TV compatible with progressive signals. The recorder outputs video sig nals in progressive format.

◆Conve rsion modes

DVD software can be divided into two types: film based software and video based software. Video based software is derived from the TV, such as dramas and sit- coms, and displays images at 30 frames/60 fields per second. Film based software is derived from film and displays images at 24 frames per second. Some DVD software contains both Video and Film. In order for these images to appear natural on your screen w hen output in PROGRESSIVE mode (60 frames per second), the progressive video signal needs to be converted to match the type of DVD software that you are watching. The title recorded on this recorder is Video based software. If you want to set the conversion mode for Video based software regardless of the software type, set “Progressive Mode” in Video Setup to “Video” (page 95).

Notes

• When you play video ba sed software with progressive signals, sections of some types of images may appear unnatural due to the conve rsio n process when output through the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks. Images from the LINE OUT (S VIDEO) 1/2 and LINE OUT (VIDEO) 1/2 jacks are unaffected as they are output in the normal (interlace) format.

• If you have set th e recorder to progressive format even though your TV is not compatible with progressive format (480p) signals, you cannot view pictures. Some video signals recorded on the disc may not be converted in progressive format. In either of thes e ca ses, set the recorder to interlace format.

Playing Discs

Playback

continued

Basic operations/Changing the playback speed

Z OPEN/CLOSE

INSTANT REPLAY

INSTANT SEARCH

m / M (Search)

Jog Stick

To: Operations Discs

Pause Press X PAUSE. To resume playback, press X PAUSE or H PLAY. All discs Locate the beginning of

the title/chapter/track

Stop play and remove the disc

Replay the previous scene

Briefly fast forward the current scene

Fast forward/fast reverse (search)

Frame by frame (Slowmotion play)

Watch one frame at a time (Freeze Frame)

Playing Discs

During playback, press > NEXT or . PREV.

• > NEXT : Goes to the next title/chapter/track.

• . PREV : Goes back to the beginning of the previous title/c ha p ter / track.

For DVD-RWs (VR mode), you can manually add chapter marks

(page 67).

Press Z OPEN/CLOSE. All discs

INSTANT REPLAY.

Press This function is useful when you want to review a scene or dialogue you missed.

Press INSTANT SEARCH. This function is useful for skipping a scene you do not want to watch.

During playback, briefly push the Jog Stick to the left or right. Ea ch time you push the Jog Stick, the search speed changes as follows:

fast reverse m fast forward M

FR1 T t FF1

FR2 T T t t FF2

FR3* T T T t t t FF3*

To resume to the normal speed, press H PLAY. When you push and hold the Jog Stick down to the lef t or right, fast forward/fast reverse continues at the selected speed until yo u release the Jog Stick. Actual speeds may differ with some discs or reco rding modes.

* Music CDs cannot be played at FR3/FF3.

Push m / M Jog Stick for more than one second when the recorder is in pause mode. To return to the normal speed, press H PLAY.

Push m / M Jog Stick briefly when the recorder is in pause mode. To return to the normal speed, press H PLAY.

TOOLS

</M/m/,, ENTER

./> PREV/NEXT

x STOP X PAUSE

H PLAY

All discs

To resume playback from the point where you stopped the disc (Resume Play)

When you stop the disc, the recorder remembers the point where you pressed x STOP.

• For DVDs: Resume Play works as long as you do not open the disc tray (you may turn off the recorder).

• For CDs: Resume Play works as long as you do not turn off the recorder or open the disc tray.

While playing a disc, press x STOP to stop playback.

“RESUME” appears on the front panel display. If “RESUME” does not appear, Resume Play is not available.

Press H PLAY.

The recorder starts playback from the point where you stopped the disc in step 1.

◆To play from the beginning o f the disc

Reset the resume point using the TOOLS menu. Press TOOLS and press M/m to select “Reset Resume,” then press ENTER.

◆To play from the beginning o f the title

You can locate the beginning of the title/trac k using the TOOLS menu. Press TOOLS and press M/m to select “Play From Start,” then press ENTER. Playback automatically starts from the beginning of the title.

Notes

• Depending on the disc, the recorder may not resume playback from where you stopped the disc.

• Depending on w he r e yo u stopped the disc, the recorder may not resume playback from exactly the same point.

• The point where you stopped playing is cleared when: – you open the disc tray. – you play another title. – you switch the Title List menu (Original or Playlist). – you edit the disc, such as erasing a title. – you change the settings on the recorder. – you turn off the recorder (CD only). – you make a recording (except for DVD-RWs in VR mode).

Selecting a Recorded Title on a Disc

The Title List menu displays all the titles recorded on the disc and you can select the one you want to pl ay. For details, see also page 32.

My Movies

1.5/4.7GB

10/15

10/19

10/26

10/28

9/15

9/17

9/25

TITLE LIST </M/m/,,

ENTER ZOOM +/–

m/M

X PAUSE

SYSTEM MENU

CURSOR MODE

RETURN

H PLAY

Insert a disc and press TITLE LIST.

The Title List menu appears. For a DVD-RW (VR mode), select “Original” or “Playlist” using the TOOLS menu (page 32).

TITLE LIST

ORIGINAL

-RW.VR

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

Sort

Date

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

Number

3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM

Title

4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

6 L2 9:00PM - 9:30PM

7 8ch 9:00PM - 9:30PM

8 125ch 10:00AM - 10:30AM

Press M/m to select the title, then press ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

Press M/m to select “Play,” then press ENTER.

Playback starts from the selected title on the disc.

Hints

• You can also display the Title List menu using th e System Menu. Press SYSTEM MENU and select “TITLE LIST,” then press ENTER (page32).

• You can select Page m ode by pressing CURSOR MODE (page 32). In Page mode, you can change the page of the Title List using M/m.

• You can also use the H PLAY button to start playback.

• To change th e title name, see “Labeling a title (Title Name)”

(page64).

Selecting a Recorded Title on a Disc

Playback

continued

1-12

Page 19

To change the title order (Sort)

Searching for a Title/Chapter/Track

Playback

Searching for a Title/ Chapter/Track

You can search a DVD by title or chapter, and a CD by track. Since titles and tracks are assigned unique numbers on the disc, you can select the desired title/chapter/track by entering its number. Or, you can search for a scene using the time code.

Press TOOLS during playback.

The TOOLS menu appears.

Press M/m to select the search method, then press ENTER.

• Title Search (for DVDs)

• Chapter Search (for DVDs)

• Track Search (for CDs)

• Time Search (for DVDs): Searches for a starting point by entering the time code.

The display for entering the number appears. Example: Title Search

The number in parentheses indicates the total number of titles, tracks, etc.

Press the number buttons to select the number of the title, chapter, track, time code, etc., you want.

For example: Time Search To find a scene at 2 hours, 10 minutes, and 20 seconds, enter “21020.”

◆ If you make a mistake

Press CLEAR to cancel the number, then select another number.

Press SET.

The recorder starts playback from the selected title/ chapter/track/scene.

To cancel searching

Press RETURN.

Notes

• You cannot search for a still picture on a DVD-RW (VR mode) using Time Search.

• If you enter a number that does not exist, the current selection does not change.

TOOLS

M/m, ENTER

Number buttons, SET

CLEAR

RETURN

Title : -- (21)

Selecting the Sound

Playback

Checking the playing time on the front panel display

You can view the playing or time information and text displayed on the TV screen also on the front panel display. Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly. Each press of the button changes the information as follows:

◆When playing a DVD

◆When playing a CD

Hint

Long text that does not fit in a single line will scroll across the front panel display.

Notes

• Depending on th e type of disc being played, the disc’s text may not be displayed.

• The recorder ca n only display the first level of a CD’s text, such as the disc name.

• The letters or symb ols that cannot be displayed are replaced with “*.”

Selecting the Sound

When playing a DVD VIDEO recorded in multiple audio formats (PCM, Dolby Digital, or DTS), you can select the audio format. If a DVD VIDEO is recorded with multilingual tracks, you can also change the language. With CDs, you can select the sound from the right or left channel and listen to the sound of the selected channel through both the right and left speakers. For example, when playing a disc containing a song with the vocals on the right channel and the instruments on the left channel, you can listen to the instruments only from both speakers, by selecting the lef t channel.

Press AUDIO repeatedly during playback to select one of the audio options.

The following display appears.

Example: DVD VIDEO

◆When playing a DVD VIDEO

Depending on the DVD VIDEO, the choice of language varies. When four numbers are displayed, they indic ate a language code. To see which language the code represents, see “Language Code List” (page 108). When the same language is displayed two or more times, the DVD VIDEO is recorded in multiple audio formats.

◆When playing a DVD-RW in VR mode

The types of sound tracks recorded on a disc are displayed. The default setting is underlined. For a disc recorded on this recorder, the sound can be selected only if recorded from equipment connected to the LINE IN jacks. Example:

• 1: Main

(main sound)

• 1: Sub (sub sound)

• 1: Main/Sub (main and sub sound)

Title playing time and the current title/chapter number

Remaining time of the current title

Playing time and number of the current chapter

Remaining time of the current chapter

Disc name

Track playing time and the current track/index number

Remaining time of the current track

Remaining time of the disc

Disc name

Playing time of the disc

DISPLAY

AUDIO

1 : English DolbyDigital 2/0

continued

You can sort the titles according to date, number, or title.

Press < while the Title List menu is turned on.

The Sort buttons are selected.

My Movies

TITLE LIST

-RW.VR

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

Sort

Date

Sort buttons

Press M/m to select date, number, or title, then press ENTER.

The titles are sorted in selected order.

Order Sorted

Date in order of date (when the titles were

Number in order of recorded title number. Title in alphabetical order.

To show the list in greater detail (Zoom)

Press ZOOM+ while the Title List menu is turned on to view detailed information about the title. To return to the normal Title List menu, press ZOOM–.

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

Number

3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM

Title

4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

6 L2 9:00PM - 9:30PM

7 8ch 9:00PM - 9:30PM

8 125ch 10:00AM - 10:30AM

recorded). The title that is recorded most recently is listed at the top.

1.5/4.7GB

ORIGINAL

9/15

9/17

9/25

10/15

10/19

10/26

10/28

Example: DVD-RW (VR mode)

My Movies

ORIGINAL

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

Mon 9/15 1:00PM( 1H00M) SP

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

Wed 9/17 8:00PM( 1H00M) SLP

3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM

Thu 9/25 9:00AM( 0H30M)

4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

Thu 9/25 8:00PM( 0H30M) SLP

1.5/4.7GB

2ch

5ch

12ch

3ch

TITLE LIST

-RW.VR

Sort

Date

Number

Title

1 Title’s thumbnail picture 2 Title information:

Displays the title number, title name, date/time of recording, channel, and recording mode*.

• indicates that the title is protected.

• a (red) indicates that the title is being recorded.

* Th e di spla ye d re co rding mode refers to the mode selected when the

program was recorded on this recorder.

To change a title thumbnail picture (Thumbnail) (DVD-RW in VR mode only)

You can select a favourite scene for a thumbnail picture in a zoomed Title List menu.

Press TITLE LIST while a disc is in the recorder.

The Title List menu appears.

Press M/m to select a title whose thumbnail picture you want to change, then press ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

Press M/m to select “Set Thumbnail,” then press ENTER.

The display for setting a thumbnail picture appears. The selected title starts to play in the background.

Set Thumbnail 1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

0:00:45

While watching the playback picture, press H PLAY, X PAUSE, or m/M to select the scene you want to set for a thumbnail picture, then press ENTER.

Playback pauses at the selected scene, and the display asks for confirmation.

Set Thumbnail

Do you want to set this point as a Thumbnail?

OK Change

Cancel

To change the selection, select “Change.”

Press </, to select “OK,” then press ENTER.

The scene is set for the title’s thumbnail picture.

Press RETURN to turn off the display.

Hint

After recording, the first scene of the recording (the tit le) is automatically set for th e thumbnail picture.

Notes

• Title thu m bnail pictures are displayed on ly on this recorder.

• It may take a few seconds for the thumbnail pictures to be displayed.

Selecting a Recorded Title on a Disc

Checking the Play Information and Playing Time

You can check the playing time and remaining time of the current title, chapter, or track. Also, you can check the disc name recorded on the disc.

Press DISPLAY repeatedly.

Each time you press the button, the display ch anges as follows: Title/track information (Display 1)

Play mode/time information (Display 2)

(Display off) The displays differ depending on the d isc type or playing status.

◆Displa y 1

Example: When playing a DVD VIDEO

Checking the Play Information and Playing Time

DISPLAY

Title 1

1 Title/track number/name 2 Available disc functions (angle/audio/subtitle,

etc.)

3 The current selected function or audio setting

(appears only temporarily)

1 : English DolbyDigital 2/0

TIME/TEXT

◆Display 2

Example: When playing a DVD-RW (VR mode)

Original

DVD-RW

1 Disc type/format (page 35) 2 Title type (Original or Playlist) (page 32) 3 Play mode 4 Recording mode* (page 36) 5 Playing status bar 6 Title number (page 53) 7 Playing time

*The displayed recording mode refers to the mode selected when the

program was recorded on this recorder.

To check the remaining time

Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly while the Display 2 is displayed above. Each time you press the button, the display changes in the following order.

◆When playing a DVD

• Playing time of the current title (hours: minutes: seconds)

• Remaining time of the current title

• Playing time of the cu rrent chapter

• Remaining time of the current chapter

• Disc name (DVD-RW/DVD+RW/DVD-R only)

◆When playing a CD

• Playing time of the cur rent track (minutes: seconds)

• Remaining time of the curre nt track

• Playing time of the cu rrent disc

• Remaining time of the curre nt disc

• Disc name

To check the disc name (except DVD VIDEO)

Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly while the Display 2 is displayed. The text appears only when text is recorded on a CD, or if you input the disc’s name. To label a DVD-RW/DVD+RW/DVD-R, see “Labeling a disc (Disc Name)” (page 72).

DVD-RW

Hint

When “Auto Display” is set to “On” (default) in Options Setup (page99), playback information automatically appears for several seconds after starting playback.

0:00:45

T1SP

Movies

Text, Disc

0:00:45T2

name

1-13

Page 20

◆When playing a CD

The default setting is underlined.

The standard stereo sound

• Stereo:

• 1/L: The sound of the left channel (monaural)

• 2/R: The sound of the right channel (monaural)

Notes

• Depending on th e disc, you may not be able to change the audio format.

• When playing a DVD-RW in VR mode: If you connected to an AV amplifier (receiver) using the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL or OPTICAL) jack and want to switch between the sound tracks, set “Dolby Digital” in Audio Set up to “D-PCM.”

Checking the audio signal format

When playing a DVD, you can check the format of the current audio signal (Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM, etc.).

Press DISPLAY.

The following display appears.

Example: Dolby Digital 5.1 ch

Front (L/R) + Center

◆About audio signals

Audio signals recorded in a disc contain the sound elements (channels) shown below. Each channel is output from a separate speaker.

• Front (L)

• Front (R)

• Center

• Rear (L)

• Rear (R)

• Rear (Monaural): This signal can be either Dolby Surround Sound processed signals or Dolby Digital sound’s monaural rear audio signals.

• LFE (Low Frequency Effect) signal

Note

If “DTS” is set to “Off” in Audio Setup, the DTS tra ck selection option will not appear on the screen even if the disc contains DTS trac ks (page 96).

Rear (L/R)

1 : English DolbyDigital 3/2.1

LFE (Low Frequency Effect)

TV Virtual Surround Settings (TVS)

When you connect a stereo TV or two front speakers, TVS (TV Virtual Surround) lets you enjoy surroun d sound effects by using sound imaging to create virtual rear speakers from the sound of the front speakers (L: left, R: right) without using actual rear speakers. If the recorder is set up to output the signal from the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack, the surround effect will only be heard when “Dolby Digital” in Audio Setup is set to “DPCM” (page 96). TVS was developed by Sony to produce surround sound for home use using just a stereo T V.

SUR

Press SUR repeatedly during playback to select one of the TVS sounds.

Refer to the following explanations given for each item.

• Off

• Dynamic

• Wide

• Night

• Standard

TV Virtual Surround modes

◆Dynamic

Creates one set of virtual rear speakers from the sound of the actual front speakers (L, R) as shown below. This mode is effective when the distance between the front L and R speakers is short, such as with built-in speakers on a stereo TV.

◆Wide

Creates five sets of virtual rear speakers from the sound of the actual front speakers (L, R) as shown below. This mode is effective when the distance between the front L and R speakers is short, such as with built-in speakers on a stereo TV.

◆Night

Large sounds, such as explosions, are suppressed, but quieter sounds are unaffected. This feature is useful when you want to hear the dialogue and enjoy the surround sound effects of “Wide” at low volume.

◆Standard

Creates three sets of virtual rear speakers from the sound of the actual front speakers (L, R) as shown below. This mode is effective when you use two separate front speakers.

L R

L: Front speaker (left) R: Front speaker (right)

: Virtual speaker

To cancel the setting

Select “Off”.

Hint

You can select the TVS mode from the TOOLS menu (page 61).

Notes

• When the playing signal does not contain a signal fo r the re ar spea kers, the surround effects will be difficult to hear.

• When you selec t on e of t he surround modes, turn off the surround setting of the connected TV or amplifier (receive r).

• Make sure that your liste ni ng po sition is between and at an equal distance from your speakers, and that the speakers are loca ted in similar surroundings.

• Not all discs will respond to the “Night” function in the same way.

• The TVS functio n cannot be used with discs recorded on this recorder.

Changing the Angles

If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene are recorded on a DVD VIDEO, “ANGLE” appears in the front panel display, indicating that you can change the viewing angle.

ANGLE

Press ANGLE repeatedly during playback to select an angle.

The scene changes to the selected angle.

Angle 1(3)

Notes

• Depending on the DVD VIDEO, you may not be able to change the angles even if multi-angles are recorded on the disc.

• You cannot change th e angles when playing a disc recorded on this recorder.

Playback

TV Virtual Surround Settings (TVS)

Displaying the Subtitles

If subtitles are recorded on a disc you can change the subtitle language or turn the subtitles on and off whenever you want during playback.

SUBTITLE

Press SUBTITLE repeatedly during playback to select a setting.

1 : English

To turn off the subtitles

Select “Off”.

Notes

• Depending on the DVD VIDEO, you may not be able to change the subtitle language even if multilingual subt itles are recorded on it. You also may not be able to turn them off.

• You cannot change the subtitles when playing a disc rec orde d on this recorder.

Adjusting the Playback Picture and Sound

You can adjust the video/audio signal from the recorder to obtain the picture or sound quality you want.

TOOLS

RETURN

Adjusting the picture quality

a Press TOOLS during playback.

The TOOLS menu appears.

b Press M/m to select “Video Settings,” then

press ENTER.

The following display appears.

Video Settings

Select the item you want to change.

Y NR :

C NR :

BNR :

DVE :

PB Video Equalizer

c Press M/m to select the item you want to

adjust, then press ENTER.

The adjustment display appears.

Example: Y NR

Y NR

Off 1 2 3

◆ Y NR (luminance noise reduction)

Reduces noise contained in the luminance element of the video signal.

</M/m/,, ENTER

Off

◆ C NR (chroma noise reduction)

Reduces noise contained in the color element of the video signal.

◆ BNR (block noise reduction)

Reduces “block noise” or mosaic like patterns in the picture.

◆ DVE (digital video enhancer)

Sharpens the outlines of the images.

◆ PB Video Equalizer (Playback video equalizer)

Adjusts the picture in greater detail. Press M/m to select the item you want to adjust, then press ENTER.

• Contrast: changes the cont rast.

• Brightness: changes the overall brightness.

• Color: makes the colors deeper or lighter.

• Hue: changes the color balance.

d Press </, to adjust the setting, then press

ENTER.

The larger the number, the greater the effect. The default settings are underlined.

Items Settings

Y NR Off 1 2 C NR Off 1 2 BNR Off 1 2 DVE Off PB Video Equalizer

Contrast –3 ~ 0 Brightness –3 ~ 0 Color –3 ~ 0 Hue –3 ~ 0

e Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust any other

items.

1 2 3

~ 3 ~ 3 ~ 3 ~ 3

3 3 3

f Press RETURN to turn off the display.

Notes

• If the outlines of the images on your screen become blurred, set “BNR” to “Off.”

• Depending on the disc or the scene being played, the BNR effect may be hard to discern. The BNR function may no t work with some screen sizes.

• When playing a disc recorded in SLP recording mode, the BNR setting may have little effect.

Changing the Angles

Adjusting the sound quality

a Press TOOLS.

The TOOLS menu appears.

b Press M/m to select “Audio Settings,” then

press ENTER.

The following display appears.

Audio Settings

Select the item you want to change.

Surround :

Off

Audio Filter :

Sharp

c Press M/m to select the item, then pr ess

ENTER.

Example: Surround (TVS)

)

Surround (TVS

Select a surround effect.

Off

Dynamic

Wide

Night

Standard

◆ Surround (DVD VIDEO only)

Selects one of the surround modes. For more information, see “TV Virtual Surround Settings (TVS)” (page 58).

• Off (default)

• Dynamic

• Wide

• Night

• Standard

◆ Audio Filter (all discs)

Selects the digital filter to reduce noise above 22.05 kHz (Fs* is 44.1 kHz), 24 kHz (Fs is 48 kHz), or 48 kHz (Fs is above 96 kHz).

• Sharp (default): Prov ides a wide frequency range and spatial feeling.

• Slow: Provides smooth and warm soun d.

*Sampling frequency of audio source

This function affects output signals from the LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R) 1/2 jacks.

d Press </M/m/, to select the option, then

press ENTER.

e Press RETURN to turn off the display.

Note

There may be little effect by changing the Audio Filt er depending on the disc or playback environment.

Playback

Displaying the Subtitles

1-14

Adjusting the Playback Pic ture and Sound

Page 21

Before Editing

Editing a DVD

Edit options for DVD-RWs (VR mode)

You have two options for a DVD-RW (VR mode): editing either the original recording (called the “Original”), or the playback information created from the Original (called a “Playlist”). Since each is different in nature and offers different merits, read the following and select the one that better suits your needs.

Editing the “Original”

Basic edit functions available with Originals: –Labeling a title (page 64). –Setting protection against erasure (page 64). –Erasing a title (page 65) . –Erasing multiple titles (page 65). –Erasing a section of a title (A-B Erase) (page 66). All edits made to the original title are final. If you plan to retain an unaltered original recording, create and edit a Playlist (see below).

Note

Original titles provide a source for the created Playlist. If you use an original title for a Playlist, you will be unable to erase the original title.

Editing the “Playlist”

A Playlist is a group of Playlist titles created from the original title for editing purposes. When you create a Playlist, only the control information necessary for playback, such as the pl ayback order, is stored on the disc.

Example: You have recorded the final few matches of a football tournament on a DVD-RW (VR mode). You want to create a digest with the goal scenes and other highlights, but yo u also want to keep the original recording. In this case, you can collect the scenes of the highlights, and create playback information (a Playlist title). You can even rearrange the scene order within the Playlist title.

The above is only an example. Try using the Playl ist’s various edit functions, or use them in conjunction with an Original ed it. Devise your own ways of editing with Playlists and Originals.

Advanced edit functions available with the Playlist: –Labeling a title (page 64). –Erasing a title (page 65). –Erasing multiple titles (page 6 5). –Erasing a section of a title (A-B Erase) (pag e 66). –Creating a Playlist title from selected titles and scenes

(page 67). –Rearranging the title order (page 70). –Dividing a title into multiple titles (page 70). –Combining multiple titles into one title (page 71).

Sort

Date

Number

Title

My Movies

TITLE LIST

ORIGINAL

-RW.VR

1.5/4.7GB

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM

4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

6 L2 9:00PM - 9:30PM

7 8ch 9:00PM - 9:30PM

8 125ch 10:00AM - 10:30AM

9/15

9/17

9/25

10/15

10/19

10/26

10/28

The Title List (Original) menu displays all the original titles on the disc.

Disc type/ Recording format

Title type

Sort

Date

Number

Title

My Movies

TITLE LIST

PLAYLIST

-RW.VR

1.5/4.7GB

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

9/15

9/17

The Title List (Playlist) menu displays the Playlist titles on the disc.

Disc type/ Recording format

Title type

Basic Editing

Editing a DVD

To cancel the protection

Select the protected title in step 2.

Press M/m to select “Protect Title,” then press ENTER.

Press </, to select “Off,” then press ENTER.

To protect the entire disc

See page 72.

Note

You cannot protect Playlist titles.

Erasing a title (Erase)

You can erase titles individually using the sub-menu.

◆For DVD-Rs:

Note that erasing titles on a DVD-R does not increase available disc space.

◆For DVD-RWs (VR mode):

Note that you are unable to erase the original title if there is a Playlist title derived from the original title.

a Press TITLE LIST.

The Title List menu appears. If you are using a DVDRW (VR mode), press TOOLS and select either “Original” or “Playlist” from the TOOLS menu to change the Title List, if necessary.

b Press M/m to select the title you want to erase,

then press ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

c Press M/m to select “Erase,” then press

ENTER.

The display asks for confirmation .

d Press </, to select “OK,” then press

ENTER.

The title is erased.

◆ When the selected title is protected

• To continue the procedure, press , to select “Change.” The protection display appears. Select “Off” by pressing </,, then press ENTER.

• To cancel the procedure, select “Close” by pressing </,, then press ENTER.

◆ When the selected title is referred to by a Playlist

Select “Close” as you are unable to delete an original title that is referred to by a Playlist. If you want to delete the original title, first delete the Playlist title. Then, delete the original title.

Hint

If you are using a DVD-RW (Video mode) or DVD+RW, you can erase a title using the Disc Map (page 38).

Erasing multiple titles (Erase Titles)

You can erase more than two titles at one time using the TOOLS menu.

◆For DVD-Rs:

Note that erasing titles on a DVD-R does not increase available disc space.

◆For DVD-RWs (VR mode):

Note that you are unable to erase the original title if there is a Playlist title derived from the original title.

a Press TITLE LIST.

The Title List menu appears. If you are using a DVDRW (VR mode), press TOOLS and select either “Original” or “Playlist” from the TOOLS menu to change the Title List, if necessary.

b Press TOOLS.

The TOOLS menu appears.

c Press M/m to select “Erase Titles,” then press

ENTER.

The display for selecting titles to be erased appears.

d Press M/m to select the title, then press

ENTER.

A check mark appears in the check box next to the selected title. To clear the check mark, press ENTER again.

Sort

Date

Number

Title

My Movies

TITLE LIST

ORIGINAL

-RW.VR

1.5/4.7GB

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM

4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

6 L2 9:00PM - 9:30PM

7 8ch 9:00PM - 9:30PM

8 125ch 10:00AM - 10:30AM

9/15

9/17

9/25

10/15

10/19

10/26

10/28

Sort

Date

Number

Title

My Movies

TITLE LIST

ORIGINAL

-RW.VR

1.5/4.7GB

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM

4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

6 L2 9:00PM - 9:30PM

7 8ch 9:00PM - 9:30PM

8 125ch 10:00AM - 10:30AM

9/15

9/17

9/25

10/15

10/19

10/26

10/28

Erase Titles

Select the titles to erase.

Cancel

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM

4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

9/15

9/17

9/25

10/15

Erase Titles

Select the titles to erase.

Cancel

List

Reset All

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM

4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

9/15

9/17

9/25

10/15

continued

Editing a DVD

This section introduces the basics of DVD editing, and explains both edit functions for the recording on a disc and the edit functions for the entire disc .

•

Before Editing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

•

Basic Editing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

•

Advanced Editing (Playlist Edit)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

•

Labeling, Protecting, or Finalizing the Disc

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Before Editing

page 62

page 64

page 67

page 72

This recorder offers various edit options. Before you edit, read the following to see what is available for your disc. Note that you may lose the edited contents if you remove the disc or a timer recording starts while editing.

Checking the disc type, recording format, and title type

Press TITLE LIST, and check the disc type and recording format indicated at the top of the Title List menu. If the disc is a VR mode disc, check also the title type, Original or Playlist. If you edit an original title instead of a Playlist title by mistake, it is irreversible. You will be unable to recover the erased title, or revert the edited title to the previous status.

Edit options for DVD-RWs (Video mode)/DVD+RWs/DVD-Rs

You can perform simple edits. Since Video mode titles are actual recordings on the disc, you cannot undo the edits you have done.

Title List menu for DVD-RWs (Video mode)/DVD+RWs/DVD-Rs

-RW.VIDEO

Disc type/ Recording

Sort

format

Date

Number

Title

Basic edit functions available with Video mode titles: –Setting protection against erasure (page 64). –Labeling a title (page 64). –Erasing a title (page 65). –Erasing multiple titles (page 65).

Notes

• Once the disc is finalized, you cannot edit or record on t he disc (except for DVD-RWs in VR mode and DVD+RWs).

• You cannot create a Playlist (see below) on a DVD-RWs (Video mode), DVD+RW, or DVD-Rs.

TITLE LIST

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM

4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

6 L2 9:00PM - 9:30PM

7 8ch 9:00PM - 9:30PM

8 125ch 10:00AM - 10:30AM

My Movies

1.5/4.7GB

10/15

10/19

10/26

10/28

9/15

9/17

9/25

Basic Editing

This section explains the basic edit functions. Note that these edits are irreversible to the original status. If you want to edit a DVD-RW (VR mode) without changing the original recordings, create a Playlist (page67).

Notes

• If “No new data can be a dded to this disc” appears on the screen, erase any unwanted titles before editing.

• For DVD-Rs/DVD-RWs (Video mode): Finish all the editing before finalizing the disc. You cannot edit a finalized disc.

• For original titles in DVD-RWs (VR mode): Original titles provide a source for derived Playlist. W he n you use an original title for a Playlist, yo u will be unable to erase or edit the original title.

CHAPTER MARK

Labeling a title (Title Name)

You can enter up to 64 characters for a name. The title name will be displayed in the Title Li st menu.

a Press TITLE LIST.

Basic Editing

My Movies

TITLE LIST

TOOLS

</M/m/,, ENTER

m/M

X PAUSE

CHAPTER ERASE

1.5/4.7GB

9/15

9/17

9/25

10/15

10/19

10/26

10/28

./> PREV/NEXT

H PLAY

The Title List menu appears. If you are using a DVDRW (VR mode), press TOOLS and select either “Original” or “Playlist” from the TOOLS menu to change the Title List, if necessary.

TITLE LIST

ORIGINAL

-RW.VR

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

Sort

Date

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

Number

3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM

Title

4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

6 L2 9:00PM - 9:30PM

7 8ch 9:00PM - 9:30PM

8 125ch 10:00AM - 10:30AM

b Press M/m to select the title, then press

ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

c Press M/m to select “Title Name,” then press

ENTER.

The display for entering a title name appears. To enter character, see page 34.

Input Title Name

25ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

,. - 1

BA C 2

ED F 3

HG I 4

KJ L5

d When you finish entering the title name,

press </M/m/, to select “Finish.”

A new Title List menu appears with the title of the entered name.

"A"

NM O 6

"a"

Back

QP R S

Symbol

Clear All

UT V 8

XW Y Z79

Space

Cancel

Finish

Protecting a title (Protect Title)

You can set protection for a title so that the title cannot be erased.

a Press TITLE LIST.

The Title List menu appears. If you are using a DVDRW (VR mode), press TOOLS and select “Original” from the TOOLS menu.

My Movies

TITLE LIST

-RW.VR

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

Sort

Date

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

Number

3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM

Title

4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

6 L2 9:00PM - 9:30PM

7 8ch 9:00PM - 9:30PM

8 125ch 10:00AM - 10:30AM

b Press M/m to select the title, then press

ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

c Press M/m to select “Protect Title,” then

press ENTER.

The following display appears.

Protect

Select the protection status for this title.

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM Mon 9/15

On Off

d Press </, to select “On,” then press

ENTER.

The protection is set.

1.5/4.7GB

ORIGINAL

9/15

9/17

9/25

10/15

10/19

10/26

10/28

1-15

Page 22

To list all of the titles to be erased, select “List.” To clear all the check marks, select “Reset All.”

e Repeat step 4 to select all the titles you want

to erase.

◆ When the selected title is protected

The display asks for confirmation.

• To continue the procedure, press , to select “Change.” The protection display appears. Select “Off” by pressing </,, then press ENTER.

• To cancel the procedure, se le ct “Close” by pressing </,, then press ENTER.

◆ When the selected title is referred to by a Playlist

f Press </, to select “OK,” then press

ENTER.

The display asks for confirmation. To return to the display for selecting titles, select “View All.”

g Press </, to select “OK,” then press

ENTER.

Hint

If you are using a DVD-RW (Video mode) or DVD+RW, you can erase a title using the Disc Map (page 38).

Erasing a section of a title (A-B Erase)

You can erase a section of a title using the sub-menu.

◆For original titles in a DVD-RW (VR mode):

Note that you are unable to erase the original title if there is a Playlist title derived from the original title.

a Press TITLE LIST.

The Title List menu appears. If you are using a DVDRW (VR mode), press TOOLS and select either “Original” or “Playlist” from the TOOLS menu to change the Title List, if necessary.

My Movies

TITLE LIST

-RW.VR

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

Sort

Date

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

Number

3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM

Title

4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

6 L2 9:00PM - 9:30PM

7 8ch 9:00PM - 9:30PM

8 125ch 10:00AM - 10:30AM

b Press M/m to select the title, then press

ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

Basic Editing

1.5/4.7GB

ORIGINAL

9/15

9/17

9/25

10/15

10/19

10/26

10/28

c Press M/m to select “A-B Erase,” then press

ENTER.

The display for setting point A appears. The selected title plays in the background. The slider indicates the current playback point.

A-B Erase (Set point A)

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

A 0:12:34

–– –– –

B : :

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

A 0:12:34 B 0:23:45

Playback point

◆ When the selected title is protected

The display asks for confirmation.

• To continue the proc edure, press </, to select “Change.” The protection display appears. Select “Off” by pressing </,, then press ENTER.

• To cancel the procedure, select “Close” by pressing </,, then press ENTER.

◆ When the selected title is referred to by a Playlist

Select “Close” as you are unable to delete an original title that is referred to by a Playlist. If you want to delete a section of the original title, first delete the Playlist title. Then, delete the section.

d While watching the playback picture, set

point A using H PLAY, X PAUSE, and m/M, then press ENTER.

The display for setting point B appears, and the title continues to play in the background.

A-B Erase (Set point B)

e While watching the playback picture, set

point B using H PLAY, X PAUSE, and m/M, then press ENTER.

The display asks for confirmation.

A-B Erase

Erase the scene between A 0:12:34 and B 0:23:45?

OK Cancel

Preview Change A Change B

To preview, select “Preview.” To reset either point A or B, select “Change A” or “Change B.”

f Press </M/m/, to select “OK,” then press

ENTER.

The scene is erased, and the display asks whether to erase another scene.

g To exit, press </, to select “No,” then

press ENTER.

The display returns to the Title List menu. To continue, select “Yes” and repeat the steps above.

Notes

• Images or sound may be momentarily interrupted at the point where you erase a section of a title.

• Sections shorter than five seco nds m ay not be era sed .

Creating chapters manually

You can manually insert a chapter mark at any point you like.

Press CHAPTER MARK during playback at the point where you want to divide the title into chapters.

Each time you press the button, “Marking…” appears on the screen and the scene to the left and right of the mark becomes a chapter.

Marking...

To erase chapter marks

You can combine two chapters by erasing a chapter mark during playback.

Press . PREV or > NEXT to search for a chapter number.

Press CHAPTER ERASE while displaying the chapter you want to erase.

The current playing chapter combines with the previous chapter.

Notes

• Playback may momentarily stop when inserting a chapter mark.

• A message wil l ap pear when no more chapter marks can be added. In this case, you may not be able to record or edit the disc.

Advanced Editing (Playlist Edit)

This section explains how to create a Playlist, and then covers available edit functions for the created Playlist. Playlist titles can be created from scenes that are selected original titles or other Playlist titles. Since edits to the Playlist does not affect the original title, you can redo editing as many times as you like. To create a Playlist title, you will do the following.

1.Select a title or titles for editing

2.“Capture” multiple scenes from the selected title(s)

3.Confirm the scenes on the Scene List

4.If necessary, edit the scenes on the S cene List

5.Connect scenes to create a “Play list” title

TITLE LIST

TOOLS

</M/m/,, ENTER

m/M

H PLAY

Creating a Playlist title from other titles

Collect your favourite scenes from original t itles or other Playlist titles to create a new Playlist title. You can rearrange the order of the scenes, delete scenes, or edit the scenes as well.

a Press TITLE LIST.

The Title List (Original) menu or the Title List (Playlist) menu appears. Example: The Title List (Original) menu.

X PAUSE

Advanced Editing (Playlist Edit)

Editing a DVD

continued

My Movies

TITLE LIST

-RW.VR

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

Sort

Date

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

Number

3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM

Title

4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

6 L2 9:00PM - 9:30PM

7 8ch 9:00PM - 9:30PM

8 125ch 10:00AM - 10:30AM

b Press TOOLS.

The TOOLS menu appears.

c Press M/m to select “Create Playlist,” then

press ENTER.

The display for selecting titles appears.

Create Playlist

Select the titles you want to capture.

Original

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM

4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

6 L2 9:00PM - 9:30PM

d Press M/m to select the title you want to

include in the Playlist title, then press ENTER.

A check mark appears in the check box next to the selected title. To clear the check mark, press ENTER again.

Create Playlist

Select the titles you want to capture.

Original

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM

4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

6 L2 9:00PM - 9:30PM

1.5/4.7GB

ORIGINAL

10/15

10/19

10/26

10/28

9/15

9/17

9/25

10/15

10/19

9/15

9/17

9/25

10/15

10/19

To select all of the titles, select “Select All.”

e Repeat step 4 when adding more titles.

To go to the next page, press m. To clear all the check marks, select “Reset All.”

f Press </, to select “OK,” then press

ENTER.

The list of selected titles appears.

Create Playlist - Selected Titles

Select a title to start capturing.

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

9/15

9/17

To add another title, select “Add Title.”

Advanced Editing (Playlist Edit)

9/15

9/17

9/25

Select All

Reset All

Add Title

g Press M/m to select one of the titles, then press

ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

◆ To add the entire title as one scene to the Playlist title

Select “Capture All” and go to step 14.

h Press M/m to select “Capture,” then press

ENTER.

The display for setting the start point (IN) appears. The selected title starts to play in the background.

Capture (Set IN point)

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

Cancel

i While watching the playback picture, select

the start of the scene using H PLAY, X PAUSE, and m/M, then press ENTER.

The display for setting the end point (OUT) appears, and the title continues to play in the background.

Capture (Set OUT point)

Cancel

j While watching the playback picture, select

the end point of the scene using H PLAY, X PAUSE, and m/M, then press ENTER.

The display asks for confirmation.

Capture

Do you want to capture the scene between IN 0:10:26 and OUT 0:23:45?

OK Cancel

Preview Change IN Change OUT

To view the selected scene, select “Preview.” To reset either the IN or OUT point, select “Change IN” or “Change OUT.”

k Press </, to select “OK,” then press

ENTER.

The selected portion is captured as a scene, and the display asks whether to continue scene capture.

Capture

Do you want to select another scene?

More No More New Title

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

0:10:26

OUT

- : - - : - -

0:10:26

OUT

0:23:45

l Press </, to select an option on the screen,

then press ENTER.

To capture a scene from the same title, select “More,” and repeat the steps above. To capture a scene from another title, select “New Title,” and repeat the steps above.

m To end scene capture, press </, to select

“No More” and press ENTER.

The display returns to the list of selected titles.

◆ To check the captured scenes in a single title

A Press M/m to select a title from the list of

selected titles, then press ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

B Press M/m to select “Check Scenes,” then press

ENTER.

The thumbnail pictures of the captured scenes within the title appear.

Check Scenes

1 2

n Press </M/m/, to select “Scene List,” then

press ENTER.

The Scene List menu appears with all of the selected scenes.

Total duration of the selected scene

Scene List

◆ To change the scene order (Move)

A Press M/m to select the scene you want to

move, then press ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

B Press M/m to select “Move,” then press

ENTER.

The display for selecting the insertion point appears.

Move

Where do you want to move this scene to?

C Press M/m to select the insertion point, then

press ENTER.

The scene moves to its new position, and the display returns to the Scene List menu.

Total 0:33:28 Scenes 2

5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM -1

0:10:26 - 0:23:45

5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM -2

0:25:00 - 0:45:08

5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM -1

0:10:26 - 0:23:45

5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM -2

0:25:00 - 0:45:08

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

Total number of scenes

Quit

Add

Preview

Cancel

◆ To erase the scene (Erase)

A Press M/m to select the scene you want to

erase, then press ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

B Press M/m to select “Erase,” then press

ENTER.

C When the display asks for confirmation, press

</, to select “OK,” then press ENTER.

◆ To change the scene contents (Change IN/ Change OUT)

A Press M/m to select the scene you want to

change, then press ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

B Press M/m to select “Change IN,” then press

ENTER.

The display for setting the IN point appears.

Capture (Set IN point)

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

0:10:26

OUT

0:23:45

C Repeat steps 9 to 14.

To reset the OUT point, select “Change OUT,” then repeat steps 10 to 14. The display returns to the Scene List menu.

◆ To add another scene

Press </M/m/, to select “Add,” then press ENTER. Repeat steps above.

◆ To preview the entire Playlist title

Press </M/m/, to select “Preview,” then press ENTER. The captured scenes start to play in the listed order. When the playback is finished, the display returns to the Scene List menu.

o Press </, to select “OK,” then press

ENTER.

The scenes are connected to create a new Playlist title, and the display for entering the title name appears.

◆ To enter a new name

Select “Enter” and follow the explanations on page 34.

◆ To use the default name

Press </, to select “OK,” then press ENTER. A new Title List menu appears with the title of the entered name.

Hint

When a Playlist title is created, the “IN” point and “OUT” point will become chapter marks, and each scene will become a chapter.

Notes

• You can capture, m ove , or change the IN and OUT points for a maximum of 50 scenes per title.

• The picture may pa us e when the edited scene is played.

Advanced Editing (Playlist Edit)

Editing a DVD

continued

1-16

Page 23

Moving a Playlist title (Move Title)

Advanced Editing (Playlist Edit)

Editing a DVD

Combining multiple Playlist titles (Combine Titles)

You can add new contents to an existing Playlist title by combining the title with other Playlist titles.

a Press TITLE LIST.

The Title List menu appears. If the Title List (Original) menu appears, press TOOLS, and select “Playlist” from the TOOLS menu.

b Press TOOLS.

The TOOLS menu appears.

c Press M/m to select “Combine Titles,” then

press ENTER.

The display for selecting titles appears.

d Press M/m to select the title, then press

ENTER.

A number appears next to the selected title, indicating the order in which you selected the title.

To cancel the selection, move the cursor to the selected title by pressing M/m, then press ENTER again.

e Repeat step 4 to select all the titles you want

to combine.

To list the titles to be combined, select “List.” To cancel all of the selections, select “Reset All.”

f Press , to select “OK,” then press ENTER.

The display asks for confirmation.

To change the selection, select “Change.”

g Press

</,

to select “OK,” then press

ENTER.

The display for selecting a title name from among the selected titles appears. To enter a new name, select “Enter Text,” and follow the explanations on page34.

h Press M/m to select a name, then press

ENTER.

The titles are combined, and the display returns to the Title List menu.

Additional Playlist edit functions

You can also do the following edits for Playlists. –Label a Playlist title (page 64). –Erase a Playlist title (page 65). –Erase multiple Playlist titles (page 65). –Erase a section of a Playlist title (A-B Erase) (page 66). –Create chapters in a title (page 67).

To perform these edits, press TITLE LIST * and then follow the same steps for these functions explained in “Basic Editing” (page 64).

*If the Title List (Original) menu appears, press TOOLS and select

“Playlist” from the TOOLS menu.

Note

Erasing Playlist titles will not free up disc space.

Sort

Date

Number

Title

1.5 / 4.7GB

My Movies

TITLE LIST

PLAYLIST

-RW.VR

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

3 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

4 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

9/15

9/17

9/28

10/ 5

Combine

Select the titles to combine.

Cancel

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

3 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

4 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

9/15

9/17

9/28

10/ 5

Combine

Select the titles to combine.

Cancel

Reset All

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

3 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

4 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

9/15

9/17

9/28

10/ 5

Combine

Combine the titles in the following order.

OK Change

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

2 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

3 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

9/15

9/28

10/ 5

Labeling, Protecting, or Finalizing the Disc

Editing a DVD

c Press M/m to select “Protect Disc,” then press

ENTER.

The display for setting disc protection appears.

d Press </, to select “Protect,” then press

ENTER.

The display returns to the Disc Information display.

e Press RETURN to turn off the display.

To cancel the disc protection

Repeat steps 1 to 3 above.

The display for setting disc protection appears.

Press </, to select “Don’t Protect.”

The display returns to the Disc Information display.

Press RETURN to turn off the display.

Finalizing a disc (Finalize)

Finalizing is necessary when you play discs recorded with this recorder on other DVD equipment. Before finalizing, check the differences between the disc types on the table below. When you finalize a DVD-RW (Video mode), DVD+RW, or DVD-R, a DVD menu will be automatically created, which can be displayed on other DVD equipment. When a finalized disc is in the recorder, the FINALIZED indicator lights up on the front panel.

Differences between the disc types

a Press TOOLS while the disc is in the

recorder.

The TOOLS menu appears.

b Press M/m to select “Disc Info.,” then press

ENTER.

The Disc Information display appears.

c Press M/m to select “Finalize,” then press

ENTER.

The display shows the approximate time required for finalizing and asks for confirmation.

d Press </, to select “OK,” then press

ENTER.

The recorder starts finalizing the disc.

To unfinalize a disc

If you cannot record or edit on the DVD-RW (VR mode) that has been finalized with other DVD equipment (a message appears), unfinalize the disc. Select “Unfinalize” in step 3 above.

Hint

You do not need to finalize a disc again once t he disc has been finalized with this recorder.

Notes

• Depending on the cond ition of the disc, recording, or the DVD equipment, discs may not play even when the discs are finalized.

• The recorder may not be able to finalize the disc if it was recorded on another recorder.

Erasing all the titles on the disc (Erase All)

You can erase all the titles on the disc except the titles you have set protection. The disc name and recording format remain the same.

a Press TOOLS while the disc is in the

recorder.

The TOOLS menu appears.

Finalizing is unnecessary when playing a disc on VR format compatible equipment. You may need to finalize the disc depending on the DVD equipment, or if the recording time is short. You can edit or record on the disc even after finalizing.

Finalizing is unnecessary, since DVD+RWs are automatically finalized when removed from the recorder. However, you may need to finalize the disc by following the steps below for certain DVD equipment, or if the recording time is short. You can edit or record on the disc even after finalizing.

Finalizing is necessary when playing on equipment other than this recorder. After finalizing, you cannot edit or record on the disc. If you want to record on it again, reformat the disc (page 74). However, all contents recor de d on the disc will be erased.

Finalizing is necessary when playing on equipment other than this recorder. After finalizing, you cannot edit or record on the disc.

Protect Disc

Select the protection status for this disc.

Protect Don't Protect

Disc Information

DiscName Movie

Media DVD-RW Format VR

Title no. Original 3 / Playlist 2

Protected Not Protected

Date 9/15/2003 ~ 10/28/2003

HQ : 0H30M LP : 1H30M

HSP : 0H45M

EP : 2H00M

SP : 1H00M

2. 3 / 4. 7GB

SLP : 3H00M

Remainder

Disc Name

Format

Erase All

Finalize

Protect Disc

Finalize

About xx min is needed for finalizing this disc. Cannot cancel finalizing during transaction. Do you want to finalize?

OK Cancel

continued

You can change the Playlist title order within the Title List (Playlist).

a Press TITLE LIST.

The Title List menu appears. If the Title List (Original) menu appears, press TOOLS, and select “Playlist” from the TOOLS menu.

My Movies

-RW.VR

Sort

Date

Number

Title

TITLE LIST

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

1.5/4.7GB

PLAYLIST

9/15

9/17

b Press < to select the sort buttons.

c Press M/m to select “Number,” then press

ENTER.

d Press M/m to select the title you want to move,

then press ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

e Press M/m to select “Move Title,” then press

ENTER.

The display for moving titles appears.

f Press M/m to select the new location, then

press ENTER.

The title moves to its new location, and the display returns to the new Title List (Playlist) menu.

Dividing a Playlist title (Divide Title)

You can divide a Playlist title into two Playlist titles. For example, if a Playlist title contains two football matches, you can divide the title where the first match ends.

a Press TITLE LIST.

The Title List menu appears. If the Title List (Original) menu appears, press TOOLS, and select “Playlist” from the TOOLS menu.

My Movies

PLAYLIST

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

1.5/4.7GB

9/15

9/17

0:12:34

TITLE LIST

-RW.VR

1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

Sort

Date

2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM

Number

Title

b Press M/m to select the title, then press

ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

c Press M/m to select “Divide Title” then press

ENTER.

The display setting the dividing point appears. The selected title starts to play in the background.

Divide

d While watching the picture on the screen,

move the playback point using H PLAY, X PAUSE, and m/M.

e Press ENTER at the point where you want to

divide the title.

The display asks for confirmation.

Divide

Do you want to divide this title at this point?

OK Change Cancel

To change the dividing point, select “Change.”

f Press </, to select “OK,” then press

ENTER.

The display asks if you want to enter a new name.

◆ To enter a new name

Select “Yes” and follow the explanations on page34.

◆ To use the same name as before

Select “No.” The title is divided and the Title List menu appears with the two divided titles.

Advanced Editing (Playlist Edit)

Labeling, Protecting, or Finalizing the Disc

Using the Disc Information display, you can label, protect, or finalize your disc. You can even eras e the entire disc except for the protected titles. This section explains settings effective for the entire disc.

Labeling a disc (Disc Name)

You can enter up to 64 characters for a disc name (the actual number of displayed characters will vary). The disc name will be displayed in the Title List, etc.

a Press TOOLS while the disc is in the

b Press M/m to select “Disc Info.,” then press

Labeling, Protecting, or Finalizing the Disc

RETURN

recorder.

The TOOLS menu appears.

ENTER.

The Disc Information display appears. Example: When the inserted disc is a DVD-RW (VR mode).

Disc Information

DiscName

Media DVD-RW Format VR

Title no. Original 3 / Playlist 2

Protected Not Protected

Date 9/15/2003 ~ 10/28/2003

HQ : 0H30M LP : 1H30M

Remainder

HSP : 0H45M

SP : 1H00M

SLP : 3H00M

EP : 2H00M

2. 3 / 4. 7GB

TOOLS

</M/m/,, ENTER

Disc Name

Protect Disc

Finalize

Erase All

Format

c Press M/m to select “Disc Name,” then press

ENTER.

The display for entering a disc name appears.

Input Disc Name

,. - 1

BA C 2

ED F 3

HG I 4

KJ L5

d Enter a name by following the explanation on

page 34.

The Disc Information display appears with the new disc name.

Disc Information

DiscName Movie

Media DVD-RW Format VR

Title no.

Original 3 / Playlist 2

"A"

NM O 6

"a"

Back

QP R S

Symbol

Clear All

UT V 8

XW Y Z79

Space

Cancel

Finish

Disc Name

Protect Disc

e Press RETURN to turn off the display.

Note

The disc name will not appear when the disc is played on a differ ent recorder.

Protecting a disc (Protect Disc)

You can protect an entire disc. To protect individ ual titles, see page 64.

Note that this protection is effective only for inadvertent edit commands and erasure.

a Press TOOLS while the disc is in the

recorder.

The TOOLS menu appears.

b Press M/m to select “Disc Info.,” then press

ENTER.

The Disc Information display appears.

Disc Information

DiscName Movie

Media DVD-RW Format VR

Title no. Original 3 / Playlist 2

Protected Not Protected

Date 9/15/2003 ~ 10/28/2003

HQ : 0H30M LP : 1H30M

Remainder

HSP : 0H45M EP : 2H00M

SP : 1H00M

SLP : 3H00M

2. 3 / 4. 7GB

Disc Name

Protect Disc

Finalize

Erase All

Format

1-17

Page 24

b Press M/m to select “Disc info.,” then press

ENTER.

The Disc Information display appears.

Disc Information

DiscName Movie

Media DVD-RW Format VR

Title no. Original 3 / Playlist 2

Protected Not Protected

Date 9/15/2003 ~ 10/28/2003

HQ : 0H30M LP : 1H30M

Remainder

c Press M/m to select “Erase All,” then press

ENTER.

The display asks for confirmation. When there is a protected title on the disc, a list of protected titles appears.

Erase All Titles

Do you want to erase all the titles?

OK Cancel

d Press </, to select “OK,” then press

ENTER.

The titles are erased.

HSP : 0H45M

EP : 2H00M

SP : 1H00M

SLP : 3H00M

2. 3 / 4. 7GB

Disc Name

Protect Disc

Finalize

Erase All

Format

Reformatting a disc (Format)

By reformatting, you can change the recording format of DVDRWs, or record again on DVD-RWs (Video mode) that have been finalized. Make sure nothing important is left on the disc, as all the disc contents will be erased. For DVD+RWs, reformat the disc if you want to create a blank disc.

a Press TOOLS while the disc is in the

recorder.

The TOOLS menu appears.

b Press M/m to select “Disc Info.,” then press

ENTER.

The Disc Information display appears.

Disc Information

DiscName Movie

Media DVD-RW Format VR

Title no. Original 3 / Playlist 2

Protected Not Protected

Date 9/15/2003 ~ 10/28/2003

HQ : 0H30M LP : 1H30M

Remainder

c Press M/m to select “Format,” then press

ENTER.

The display asks for confirmation.

d Press </, to select “OK,” then press

ENTER.

Labeling, Protecting, or Finalizing the Disc

HSP : 0H45M

EP : 2H00M

SP : 1H00M

SLP : 3H00M

2. 3 / 4. 7GB

Disc Name

Protect Disc

Finalize

Erase All

Format

◆ When you place a DVD-RW and set “Format Disc” to “Selectable” in Options Setup

The display asks you to select the recording format.

Format

Select the recording format.

VR Video

Press </, to select “VR” or “Video,” then press ENTER.

The recorder starts formatting the disc.

Notes

• Even when you have set protection for the title, all the c ontents will be erased after formatting the disc.

• A protected disc cannot be reformatted (DVD-RW in VR mode only ).

Connecting a Digital Video Camera or Other Equipment

You can record from connected equipment, such as a digital video camera.

•

Before Recording/Editing

•

Available DV Dubbing Functions

•

Recording an Entire DV/Digital8 Format Tape

(ONE TOUCH DUB)

•

Program Edit

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

•

Advanced Program Edit

•

Re-editing the “program” in the DV/D8 Edit List

•

Creating a Copy of the Edited Contents (Copy

Dubbing)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

•

Recording From Equipment Connected to the

LINE IN Jacks

. . . . . . . . . .

page 75

. . . . .

page 77

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page88

page 78

page 79

. . . . . .

page 81

page 84

page 86

Before Recording/Editing

The recorder has a DV IN jack that inputs digital signals, and LINE jacks that input/output analogue signals. The DV IN jack on this recorder conforms to the i.LINK standard. You can connect other equipme nt tha t ha s an i.LIN K (DV) jack. For more information, see “About i.LINK” (page 106). If you plan to do additional editing on a disc afte r the initia l dub, use the DV IN jack and record on a DVD-RW in VR mode.

◆When recording from the DV IN jack

See “Preparing for recording using the DV IN jack” below.

◆When recording from the LINE IN jacks

See “Recording From Equipment Connected to the LINE IN Jacks” (page 88).

Preparing for recording using the DV IN jack

You can connect a digital video camera to the DV IN jack on the recorder to record or edit from a DV/Digital8 format tape. Operation is smooth because the recorder will fast forward and rewind the tape for you – you do not need to operate your di gital video camera. Do the following to start using the DV Edit functions of this recorder. See also the instruction manual supplied with the digital video camera before connecting.

◆If you connect a digital video camera but cannot use the DV Edit functions

See “Recording from connected equipment” (page 88).

Notes

• The DV IN jack on this recorder is for input only. If you want to have the recorder output signals, for example, w hen you use this r ecorder as source player, connect other equipment to this recorde r’s LINE OUT jacks.

• Only DVC-SD form at signals can be input to the DV IN jac k on this recorder. Do not connect a MICRO MV format digital video camera even if it has an i.LIN K jack.

• Recording may be l imited if the images on the tape contain copyrig ht protection signals.

Before Recording/Editing

Connecting a Digital Video Camera or Other Equipment

continued

Hookups

Digital video camera

: Signal flow

Z OPEN/CLOSE

REC MODE

INPUT SELECT

a Turn on your TV and this recorder, then set

the TV to the connected channel (“VIDEO” etc.).

b Press Z OPEN/CLOSE, and place a

recordable disc on the tray.

Make sure that the disc has enough free space to record the contents of your tape.

To DV IN

i.LINK cable (not supplied)

DV output

DVD recorder

TOOLS

M/m, ENTER

c Press Z OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc tray.

Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front panel display. If you use an unused DVD, formatting starts automatically. When using an unused DVD-RW, select the recording format, VR or Video.

d Insert the source DV/Digital8 format tape

into the digital video camera.

For the recorder to record or edit, the digital video camera must be set to video playback mode.

e Press INPUT SELECT on the remote

repeatedly to select “DV.”

The front panel display changes as follows.

Channel number

f Press REC MODE on the remote repeatedly

to select the recording mode.

The recording mode changes as follows:

L2L1 L3 DV

HQ SP LP EPHSP SLP

g Select the audio input for the digital video

camera using the TOOLS menu.

A Press TOOLS. B Press M/m to select “DV/D8 Audio Input,”

then press ENTER.

C Press M/m to select the item, then press

ENTER.

• Stereo1 (default)

• Mix (both stereo 1 and stereo 2)

• Stereo2

You are ready to start recording.

Hints

• You can adjust the set tings for the recording picture before recording. See “Adjusting the Recording Picture Quality and Si ze” (page46).

• If you plan to re-e dit the “program” (page 77), insert a DVD-RW and format it in VR mode.

Notes

• You cannot conne ct more than two pieces of digital video equipment to the recorder.

• Depending on the digital vid eo e qui pment, you may not be able to control the equipment.

• You cannot control the rec orde r using another device or another recorder of the same model.

• You cannot record date , time or the contents of the cassette memory onto the disc.

• If you record from a DV / D ig ital8 format tape with a sound track that is recorded in multiple sampling frequen cies (48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 32 kHz), no sound will be output when playing b ack the switched point on the disc.

• In order to use this recorder’s Auto Scene Chaptering feature, be sure to correctly set the clock on your digital video camera be fore shooting.

• The recorded picture m ay be m omentarily affected if the picture size of the source image changes, or if the re is nothing recorded on the tape.

Available DV Dubbing Functions

◆One Touch Dub

(page 78)

Records the entire contents of a DV/Digital8 format tape to a disc of your choice with a single touch of the ONE TOUCH DUB button.

(page 79)

◆Program Edit

Allows you to select scenes from a DV/Digital8 format tape, and then record the selected scenes to a disc of your choice. As you select the scenes, you will create a “program” (see below), which will then be used to dub the selected scenes to a disc. Before you dub the scenes, you can rearrange the order and make other changes using the “Scene List” (see below).

◆Advanced Program Edit

Allows you to select scenes from a DV/Digital8 format tape by first recording the entire contents of the tape to a DVD-RW (VR mode), whereupon you can easily create a “program” (see below). By first copying the entire contents of the tape to a disc, the start and stop points on the tape automatically beco me scenes (you can also select scenes manually). These scenes are displayed in a “scene list” (see below). You can then delete, rearrange, or select new scenes to create a “program.” Once the “program” is complete, you will use it to copy the scenes to a disc of your choice from the “DV/D8 Edit List” (see below). Furthermore, you can also automatically create a Playlist of the edited scenes and save it on the DVD-RW (VR mode) you used to originally record the entire contents of the tape.

◆Re-editing the “program” in the DV/D8 Edit List (DVD-RW in VR mode only)

Allows you to select the “program” (see below) created during One Touch Dub or Advanced Program Edit from the “DV/D8 Edit List” (see below), and make further edits before coping the contents to a disc. You can delete or create new scenes, or rearrange the order of existing scenes.

◆Copy Dubbing

Allows you to make duplicate copies of the “programs” (see below) in the “DV/D8 Edit List” (see below) to a disc of your choice. When making copies, you will need the original DV/ Digital8 format tapes used to create the “program.”

About “programs”

“Programs” are automatically created whenever you make a On e Touch Dub, Program Edit, or Advanced Program Edit . These programs are stored in the “DV/D8 Edit List” (see below) and contain editing information such as which scenes have been selected, moved, or deleted. Programs are useful when you want to make duplicates of the edited contents because you do not have to select the same scenes again from the tape – just select the program. You can also re-edit the program to create different variations of the original program. Note that programs contain onl y th e start and stop points of the scenes; they do not contain the actual scenes themselves so you need to use the original DV/Digital8 format tapes to copy a program to a disc.

(page 81)

(page 84)

(page 86)

◆About the “DV/D8 Edit List”

The “DV/D8 Edit List” contains the “programs.” If you re-edit the program, the re-edited program is stored in the DV/D8 Edit List, but the original program is lost. You can st ore up to 20 programs in the DV/D8 Edit List.

DV/D8 EDIT LIST

DV10/11/02 1:30PM - 11/12/02 4:46PM

DV12/11/02 1:00PM - 12/11/02 7:05PM

DV12/24/02 11:34AM - 12/25/02 1:24PM

1 Disc mark 2 Program name 3 Total playing time 4 Date of editing or recording

◆About the “Scene List”

The contents of the programs are contained in the “Scene Li st.” A thumbnail of each scene, as well as the length of the scene is displayed in the list. You can add or delete scene s, or chan ge the order of the scenes. 50 scenes can be made for each program.

SCENE LIST

1 Thumbnail picture 2 Time information 3 Total duration of the program 4 Total number of scenes

Note

After you make a dubbing, do not throw away or record over y our tapes. You will need them later to make additional edits or c opi es.

0:00:30-0:00:52 Duration 0:00:22

0:01:40-0:06:23 Duration 0:06:43

0:07:07-0:10:51 Duration 0:03:44

0:11:40-0:16:19 Duration 0:04:39

1H12M 6/ 5

1H16M 6/10

1H24M 6/18

Total 1:23:30 Scenes 20

Quit

Add

Connecting a Digital Video Camera or Other Equipment

Before Recording/Editing

1-18

Available DV Dubbing Functions

Page 25

Recording an Entire DV/

Program Edit

Connecting a Digital Video Camera or Other Equipment

Program Edit

You can select scenes from a DV/Digital8 format tape, and then automatically record selected scenes to a disc of your choice.

Example for DVD-RWs (VR mode)

When using a DVD-RW (VR mode), chapter marks [b] are marked where the recordings start on the tape [a] (Auto Scene Chaptering). Chapter marks are also inserted at the IN points of the selected scenes [c]. For other discs, the recorder marks chapters either in 6 or 15 minute intervals depending on the setting in “Auto Cha pt er” in Features Setup (page 97).

To use this function, you will do the fol l owing:

Using the recorder’s remote control, you will fast forward or rewind the tape to select the scenes. At this point, the selected scenes are not copied to the disc. The recorder only remembers the IN and OUT points of the scenes that you selected for dubbing. You can also reset, erase, or change the order of the scenes.

After you have selected the scenes, the recorder will fast forward and rewind the tape automatically and record the scenes to a disc of your choice.

a Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Preparing for recording

using the DV IN jack” (page 75), then press

SYSTEM MENU.

b Press M/m to select “DV/D8 EDIT,” then

press ENTER.

The DV/D8 Edit menu appears.

c Press M/m to select “Program Edit,” then

press ENTER.

The display asks whether to start selecting scenes.

◆ If you have previously saved a program

The display asks whether to edit an existing program or to create a new program. To resume editing the existing program, select “Saved Data.”

d Press

</,

to select “Start,” then press

ENTER.

The display for setting the IN point (start of the scene on the tape) appears.

e Press H PLAY to start playback of the tape

in your digital video camera.

The scene starts to play in the background.

Connect your digital video camera and prepa re for recording

Select and edit the scenes you want to dub

Dub the selected scenes to a disc

bbb

</M/m/,, ENTER

RETURN

m/M

SYSTEM MENU

x REC STOP

H PLAY

DV/D8 EDIT

Select only the scenes you want to copy from the DV/D8 tape.

Program Edit

Advanced Program Edit

DV/D8 Edit List

Scenes Selection

Do you want to select a scene?

Start Cancel

continued

Advanced Program Edit

Connecting a Digital Video Camera or Other Equipment

l Press </, to select “Start,” then press

ENTER.

The recorder starts recording the tape contents as programmed. To quit recording, press x REC STOP.

m When the recording is finished, press

ENTER to select “Close.”

The display returns to the DV/D8 Edit menu.

n Press RETURN repeatedly to turn off the

display.

Notes

• The disc may not be recorded as programmed if the tape’s time code is not sequential or there are blanks between the rec ord ings on the tape. In this case, follow the instructions of “Recording From Equi pment Connected to the LINE IN Jacks” (page 88).

• The start a nd end points of a program may be different f rom what you have set if the source DV/Digital8 format ta pe is in an y of the following conditions:

– Recording mode was changed during the recording. – There is a blank space in the recorded portion of the ta pe .

• If you set the be ginning of the tape as the IN point and the end point as the OUT point, the IN and OUT points may change slightly during dubbing.

• You cannot set a sce ne short er than one second.

• This function ma y not work with certain digital video cameras. In this case, follow the instructions of “Recording From Equipment Connected to the LINE IN Jacks” (page 88).

Advanced Program Edit

You can quickly edit a DV/Digital8 format tape by first copying the entire contents of the tape to a DVD-RW (VR mode) and then select the scenes you want from the disc. After you select the scenes, you can change discs and record the scen es to another disc of your choice. If necessary, you can also create a Pla ylist title of the selected scenes in the DVD-RW (VR mode).

When dubbing to a DVD-RW (VR mode), chapter marks [b] are marked where the recordings start on the tape [a] (Auto Scene Chaptering). Chapter marks are also inserted at the I N p oints of the selected scenes [c].

To use this function, you will do the following:

Taking advantage of the disc’s quick accessibility, you will select the scenes you want from the recorded DVD-RW. You do not have to fast forward or rewind the tape as exp lained in “Program Edit” (page 79). You can also reset, erase, or change the order of the scenes.

After you have selected the scenes, you can dub the selected scenes to another disc of your choice. Or, you can create a Playlist of the selected scenes.

Connect your digital video camera and prepare for recording

Record the entire contents of the DV/Digital8 tape to a DVD-RW (VR mode)

Select and edit the scenes you want to dub

Dub the scenes to another disc

bbb

DVD-RW

(VR)

New disc

continued

Digital8 Format Tape (ONE TOUCH DUB)

You can record the entire contents of a DV/Digital8 format tape onto a disc with a single press of the ONE TOUCH DUB button. The recorder controls the digital video camera for the whole process, and completes the recording.

Example for all disc types

When using a DVD-RW (VR mode), chapter marks [b] are marked where the recordings start on the tape [a] (Auto Scene Chaptering). For other discs, the recorder marks chapters either in 6 or 15 minute intervals depending on the setting in “Auto Chapter” in Features Setup (page 97).

Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Preparing for recording using the DV IN jack” (page 75), then press ONE

TOUCH DUB on the front panel of the recorder.

The recorder rewinds the tape and then starts recording the tape contents. When the recording is finished, the recorder rewinds the tape in the digital video camera, and turns off.

To stop during recording

Press x REC STOP.

Hints

• The date and time of th e recording made with your digital video camera is assigned as the program name in the DV/D8 Edit Li st (page 84) (example: DV 10/25/03 10:00PM – 10/31/03 11:30PM) .

• If you set “Finalize Disc” to “Auto” in Features Setup (page 98), the recorded disc will automatically be finalized after rec ordi ng is finished.

Notes

• The recorder does not start One Touch Dub when you set “Add to Edit List” to “On” (default) in Features Setup (page 98) and there are already twenty programs on the recorder. In th is cas e, the recorder beeps and the front panel display lights up. Delete unnecessary programs from the DV/D8 Edit List menu (page84) and repeat the steps above.

• When a blank space on the tape continues for more than five minutes, One Touch Dub ends automatically.

• This function may not wo rk with certain digital video cameras. In this case, follow the instructions of “Recording From Eq uipment Connected to the LINE IN Jacks” (page88).

• In order for a On e Touch Dub recording to be added to the D V/D8 Edit List, “Add to Edit List” in Features Setup must be set to “On” (def ault) (page 98).

• The recorder au tomatically records a blank for five minutes before it stops dubbing. When you press recording, rewinds the tape, and turns off.

REC STOP, the recorder stops

Recording an Entire DV/Digital8 Format Tape (ONE TOUCH DUB)

f While watching the playback picture, search

g While watching the playback picture, search

h Press </M/m/, to select “OK,” then press

i Press </M/m/, to select “Add” and press

Program Edit

Select scene(Set IN point)

IN 0:00:30

OUT : :

–– – – –

for the IN point by pressing m or M, then press ENTER.

The display for setting the OUT point (end of the scene on the tape) appears. The scene starts to play in the background from the IN point.

Select scene(Set OUT point)

IN 0:00:30

OUT 0:00:52

for the OUT point by pressing m or M, then press ENTER.

The display asks whether to add the selected scene to the Scene List menu.

Scenes Selection

Do you want to capture the scene between IN 0:00:30 and OUT 0:00:52?

OK Cancel

Preview Change IN Change OUT

To preview the scene, select “Preview.” To reset either the IN or OUT point, select “Change IN” or “Change OUT.” Repeat from step 5.

ENTER.

A new Scene List menu appears with the selected scene.

SCENE LIST

ENTER. Then repeat steps 5 to 9 to select all the scenes you want to include.

You can add up to 50 scenes to a title.

Total 0:00:22 Scenes 1

0:00:30-0:00:52 Duration 0:00:22

Quit

Add

Total 1:23:30 Scenes 20

SCENE LIST

0:00:30-0:00:52

Duration 0:00:22

0:01:40-0:06:23

Duration 0:06:43

0:07:07-0:10:51

Duration 0:03:44

0:11:40-0:16:19

Duration 0:04:39

To edit the Scene List, select a scene by pressing </ M/m/,, and then press ENTER. When the sub-

menu appears, select an edit option you want to apply to the scene.

◆ To erase the scene

A Press M/m to select “Erase,” then press

ENTER.

B When the display asks for confirmation, press

</, to select “OK,” then press ENTER.

◆ To move the scene

A Press M/m to select “Move,” then press

ENTER.

The display for selecting the scene insertion point appears.

B Press M/m to select the point, then press

ENTER.

The scene moves to the selected location.

◆ To reset the start or end of the scene

Press M/m to select “Change IN” or “Change OUT,” then press ENTER.

◆ To preview the scene

Press M/m to select “Preview,” then press ENTER.

To cancel, press </M/m/, to select “Quit” in the Scene List menu, then press ENTER.

j When you finish editing the Scene List, press

/M/m/, to select “OK,” then press

ENTER.

The display for entering a title name appears.

Title Name

Enter the title name.

DV10/11/02 1:30PM - 11/12/02 4:46PM

OK Enter

To enter a new name, select “Enter,” and follow the explanations on page 34.

k To use the default name, press </, to select

“OK,” then press ENTER.

The default title name is fixed, and the display asks whether to start recording. If you want to change the recording mode, press </, to move the cursor, then press M/m to select the mode.

DV/D8 Dubbing

Change the recording mode if necessary. Select "Start" to start dubbing.

Start Cancel

Quit

Add

1-19

Page 26

SYSTEM MENU

RETURN

a Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Preparing for recording

using the DV IN jack” (page75), then press

SYSTEM MENU.

Insert a DVD-RW (VR mode) into the recorder. Make sure that the disc has enough free space to record the contents of your tape.

b Press M/m to select “DV/D8 EDIT,” then

press ENTER.

The DV/D8 Edit menu appears.

DV/D8 EDIT

Select only the scenes you want to copy

Program Edit

from the DV/D8 tape.

Advanced Program Edit

DV/D8 Edit List

c Press M/m to select “Advanced Program

Edit,” then press ENTER.

The display asks whether to start recording.

DV/D8 Dubbing

Change the recording mode if necessary. Select "Start" to start dubbing.

Start Cancel

If you want to change the recording mode, press </, to move the cursor, then press M/m to select the mode.

d Press </, to select “Start,” then press

ENTER.

The recorder starts recording the tape contents. To quit recording, press x REC STOP.

When recording is finished, the display asks if you want to create scenes within the generated program automatically or manually, or quit editing.

</M/m/,, ENTER

m/M

x REC STOP

Edit

Select the method for dividing scenes.

DV10/11/02 1:30PM - 11/12/02 Chapter 2

Auto Manual Cancel

◆ To create scenes automatically

Press </, to select “Auto,” then press ENTER. The recorder divides the generated program into scenes, and the Scene List menu appears.

◆ To create scenes manually

A Press </, to select “Manual,” then press

ENTER.

The display for setting the IN point appears. The scene starts to play in the background.

B While watching the playback picture, press

m or M to search for the IN point, then press ENTER.

The IN point is set, and the display for setting the OUT point (end of the scene) appears.

C While watching the playback picture, press

m or M to search for the OUT point, then press ENTER.

The OUT point is set, and the display asks whether to add the selected scene to the Scene List menu.

Scenes Selection

Do you want to capture the scene between IN 0:00:30 and OUT 0:00:52?

OK Cancel

Preview Change IN Change OUT

• To preview the scene, select “Preview.”

• To reset either the IN or OUT point, select “Change IN” or “Change OUT.”

D Press </M/m/, to select “OK,” then press

ENTER.

A new Scene List menu appears with the selected scene.

E Press </M/m/, to select “Add,” then press

ENTER.

The display for selecting the scene insertion point appears.

F Press M/m to select the insertion point in the

Scene List, then press ENTER.

The display for setting the IN point (start of the scene) appears.

G Repeat steps 2 to 6 to create all the scenes

you want to add to the Scene List.

You can add up to 50 scenes.

◆ To quit editing

Press </, to select “Cancel,” then press ENTER.

e To edit the Scene List, press </M/m/, to

select a scene in the Scene List menu and press ENTER.

When the sub-menu appears, select an edit option you want to apply to the scene.

◆ To erase the scene

A Press M/m to select “Erase,” then press

ENTER.

B When the display asks for confirmation, press

</, to select “OK,” then press ENTER.

◆ To move the scene

A Press M/m to select “Move,” then press

ENTER.

The display for selecting the scene insertion point appears.

B Press M/m to select the point, then press

ENTER.

The scene moves to the selected location.

◆ To reset the start or end of the scene

Press M/m to select “Change IN” or “Change OUT,” then press ENTER.

◆ To preview the scene

Press M/m to select “Preview,” then press ENTER.

To cancel, press </M/m/, to select “Quit” in the Scene List menu, then press ENTER.

f When you finish creating the Scene List,

press </M/m/, to select “OK,” then press ENTER.

The edited program is saved, and the display asks if you want to create a Playlist title. If you select “No,” the display returns to the DV/D8 Edit menu. Go to step 9.

g Press </, to select “Yes,” then press

ENTER.

The display for entering a Playlist title name appears. To enter a new name, select “Enter,” and follow the explanations on page 34.

h To use the default name, press </, to

select “OK,” then press ENTER.

A Playlist title of the default title name is created on the same disc, and the display returns to the DV/D8 Edit menu. You now have a disc containing both the entire contents of the DV/Digital8 format tape and a Playlist of the selected scenes. To edit the Playlist title, see “Advanced Editing (Playlist Edit)” (page 67).

i Dub the selected scenes to a disc.

Make copies of the selected scenes to a disc of your choice. Go to step 3 of “Creating a Copy of the Edited Contents (Copy Dubbing)” (page86).

Notes

• The disc may not be rec orded as programmed if the tape’s time code is not sequential or there are blanks between the reco rdings on the tape. In this case, follow the instru c tions of “Recording From Equipment Connected to the LINE IN Jacks” (page 88).

• You cannot set a scene to be shorter than one seco nd.

• The start and end poin t of a program may be different from what you have set if the source DV/Digital8 format tape is in any of the following conditions:

– Recording mode was changed during the recording. – There is a blank space in the recorded portion.

• This function may no t work with certain digital video cameras. In this case, follow the instructions of “Recording From Equipment Connected to the LINE IN Jacks” (page 88) .

• In step 4, the recorder automatically records a blank for five minutes before it stops dubbing. When you press x REC STOP, the recorder stops recording.

Connecting a Digital Video Camera or Other Equipment

Advanced Program Edit

Re-editing the “program” in the DV/D8 Edit List

Each time you dub a DV/Digital8 format tape, the sta rt and stop points of the selected scenes (called a “program”) are saved in a DV/D8 Edit List. You can make additional changes to these “programs” if they were created by One Touch Dub or Advanced Program Edit on a DVD-RW (VR mode). You can reset, erase, or change the order of the scenes and then d ub the re-edited program to a disc of your choice.

To use this function, you will do the following:

Connect your digital video camera and prepare for editing

Be sure to use the original DV/Digital8 format tape and the DVD-RW (VR mode) that corresponds to the program in the DV/D8 Edit List.

Select a program from the DV/D8 Edit List

Edit the program in the DV/D8 Edit List

Dub the selected scenes to a disc

The recorder will fast forward and rewind the tape automatically and record the scenes to a disc of your choice.

SYSTEM MENU

a Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Preparing for recording

using the DV IN jack” (page 75), then press

SYSTEM MENU.

Be sure to use the original DV/Digital8 format tape and the DVD-RW (VR mode) that corresponds to the program in the DV/D8 Edit List.

Re-editing the “program” in the DV/D8 Edit List

</M/m/,, ENTER m/M

b Press M/m to select “DV/D8 EDIT,” then

press ENTER.

The DV/D8 Edit menu appears.

DV/D8 EDIT

Select only the scenes you want to copy

Program Edit

from the DV/D8 tape.

Advanced Program Edit

DV/D8 Edit List

c Press M/m to select “DV/D8 Edit List,” then

press ENTER.

The DV/D8 Edit List menu appears. A disc mark will appear next to the program that corresponds to the inserted disc. You can only edit the programs that display a disc mark (

DV/D8 EDIT LIST

DV10/11/02 1:30PM - 11/12/02 4:46PM

DV12/11/02 1:00PM - 12/11/02 7:05PM

DV12/24/02 11:34AM - 12/25/02 1:24PM

1 Disc mark 2 Program name 3 Total playing time 4 Date of editing or recording

d Press M/m to select the program you want to

edit, then press ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

e Press M/m to select “Edit,” then press

ENTER.

The Scene List menu appears with all the scenes the program contains.

Total duration of the program

SCENE LIST

0:00:30-0:00:52

Duration 0:00:22

0:01:40-0:06:23

Duration 0:06:43

0:07:07-0:10:51

Duration 0:03:44

0:11:40-0:16:19

Duration 0:04:39

◆ To add a new scene to the Scene List

A Press </M/m/, to select “Add,” then press

ENTER.

The display for selecting the scene insertion point appears.

B Press M/m to select the insertion point in the

Scene List, then press ENTER.

The display for setting the IN point (start of the scene) appears.

1H12M 6/ 5

1H16M 6/10

1H24M 6/18

Total number of scenes

Total 1:23:30 Scenes 20

Quit

Add

C While watching the playback picture, press

m or M to search for the IN point, then press ENTER.

The IN point is set, and the display for setting the OUT point (end of the scene) appears.

D While watching the playback picture, press

m or M to search for the OUT point, then press ENTER.

The OUT point is set, and the display asks whether to add the selected scene to the Scene List menu.

Scenes Selection

Do you want to capture the scene between IN 0:00:30 and OUT 0:00:52?

OK Cancel

Preview Change IN Change OUT

• To preview the scene, select “Preview.”

• To reset either the IN or OUT point, select “Change IN” or “Change OUT.”

E Press </M/m/, to select “OK,” then press

ENTER.

A new Scene List menu appears with the selected scene. To add another scene, repeat from step 1.

◆ If you select a program that contains no scenes

The display asks whether to generate scenes within the selected program. To generate scenes automatically, press </, to select “Auto,” then press ENTER. Scenes are generated and a new Scene List menu appears. To capture scenes manually, select “Manual,” then press ENTER. The display for adding a scene appears. Follow steps 3 to 5 above. You can add a maximum of 50 scenes.

f Press M/m to select the scene you want to edit,

then press ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

g Press M/m to select the edit option you want

to apply to the scene, then press ENTER.

◆ To erase the scene

A Press M/m to select “Erase,” then press

ENTER.

B When the display asks for confirmation, press

</, to select “OK,” then press ENTER.

◆ To move the scene

A Press M/m to select “Move,” then press

ENTER.

The display for selecting the scene insertion point appears.

B Press M/m to select the point, then press

ENTER.

The scene moves to the selected location.

Advanced Program Edit

◆ To reset the start or end of the scene

Press M/m to select “Change IN” or “Change OUT,” then press ENTER.

◆ To preview the scene

Press M/m to select “Preview,” then press ENTER.

To cancel, press </M/m/, to select “Quit” in the Scene List menu, then press ENTER.

h When you finish editing the Scene List, press

</M/m/, to select “OK,” then press ENTER.

The display asks if you want to make a Playlist title. If you select “No,” the edited program is saved, and the display returns to the DV/D8 Edit List. Note that the original program will be rewritten. To dub the selected scenes to a disc, go to step 4 of

“Creating a Copy of the Edited Contents (Copy Dubbing)” (page 86).

i Press </, to select “Yes,” then press

ENTER.

The display for entering a Playlist title name appears. To enter a new name, select “Enter,” and follow the explanations on page 34.

j To use the default name, press </, to

select “OK,” then press ENTER.

A Playlist title of the default title name is created on the same disc, and the display returns to the DV/D8 Edit List. You now have a disc containing both the entire contents of the DV/Digital8 format tape and a Playlist of the selected scenes. To edit the Playlist title, see “Advanced Editing

(Playlist Edit)” (page 67).

k Dub the selected scenes to a disc.

Make copies of the selected scenes to a disc of your choice. Go to step 4 of

Edited Contents (Copy Dubbing)” (page86).

To preview a program

After you edit a program, you can preview the changes you made.

While the DV/D8 Edit List is displayed, press M/ m to select the program, then press ENTER.

Press M/m to select “Preview,” from the submenu, then press ENTER.

To create a Playlist title of the program

After you edit a program, you can create a Playlist title of the edited program. The Playlist will be created on the inserted DVD-RWs (VR mode).

While the DV/D8 Edit List is displayed, press M/ m to select the program, then press ENTER.

Press M/m to select “Make a Playlist,” from the sub-menu, then press ENTER.

The display for entering a Playlist title name appears. To enter a new name, select “Enter,” and follow the explanations on page 34.

“Creating a Copy of the

Re-editing the “program” in the DV/D8 Edit List

Connecting a Digital Video Camera or Other Equipment

continued

1-20

Page 27

Creating a Copy of the Edited C ontents (Copy Dubbing)

Connecting a Digital Video Camera or Other Equipment

c Press M/m to select “DV/D8 Edit List,” then

press ENTER.

The DV/D8 Edit List menu appears.

1 Disc mark 2 Program name 3 Total playing time 4 Date of editing or recording

d Press M/m to select the program you want to

record on a disc, then press ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

e Press M/m to select “DV Dubbing,” then

press ENTER.

The display for entering a title name appears.

To enter a new name, select “Enter,” and follow the explanations on page 34.

f To use the default name, press </, to

select “OK,” then press ENTER.

The default title name is fixed, and the display asks whether to start recording. If you want to change the recording mode, press </, to move the cursor then press M/m to select the mode.

g Press </, to select “Start,” then press

ENTER.

The recorder starts recording the tape contents as programmed. To stop during recording, press x REC STOP.

h When the recording is finished, press

ENTER to select “Close.”

The display returns to the DV/D8 Edit menu.

i Press RETURN repeatedly to turn off the

display.

To change the name of a program

While the DV/D8 Edit List is displayed, press M/ m to select the program name you want to change,

then press ENTER.

Press M/m to select “Rename” from the submenu, then press ENTER.

The display for entering the program name appears.

Enter a name by following the explanations on page 34.

To erase a program

While the DV/D8 Edit List is displayed, press M/ m to select the program you want to erase, then

press ENTER.

Press M/m to select “Erase” from the sub-menu, then press ENTER.

Press </, to select “OK,” then press ENTER.

Hints

• You can preview the scenes with in the program title by selecting “Preview” in step 5.

• On a DVD-RW (VR mode), chapter marks are inserted at the start of each scene and where the record in gs start on the tape. For other discs, the recorder marks chapters ei ther in 6 or 15 minute intervals depending on the setting in “Auto Chapter” in Features Setup (page97).

Notes

• If you want to play the disc on other DVD equipment, finalize the disc (page73).

• In order for a One Touch Dub recording to be added to the DV /D8 Edit List, “Add to Edit List” in Features Setup must be set to “On” (page98).

• Copy dubbing may not wo rk if yo u ha ve edited sections that do not contain any recorded material .

• This function may no t work with certain digital video cameras. In this case, follow the instructions of “Recording From Equipment Connected to the LINE IN Jacks” (page 88) .

DV/D8 EDIT LIST

DV10/11/02 1:30PM - 11/12/02 4:46PM

DV12/11/02 1:00PM - 12/11/02 7:05PM

DV12/24/02 11:34AM - 12/25/02 1:24PM

1H12M 6/ 5

1H16M 6/10

1H24M 6/18

Title Name

Enter the title name.

OK Enter

DV10/11/02 1:30PM - 11/12/02 4:46PM

DV/D8 Dubbing

Change the recording mode if necessary. Select "Start" to start dubbing.

Start Cancel

Recording From Equipment Connected to the LINE IN Jacks

Connecting a Digital Video Camera or Other Equipment

f Select the audio input using the TOOLS

menu.

A Press TOOLS. B Press M/m to select “Line Aud io Inpu t,” then

press ENTER.

C Press M/m to select the item, then press

ENTER.

• Stereo (default)

• Main/Sub*

* When “Main/Sub” is selected, the two different types of sounds

are recorded. You can select either sound when playi ng a di sc. Select “Main/Sub” only when using a DVD-RW (VR mode). For other discs, select “Stereo.” Only stereo sound is recorded.

g Press X REC PAUSE to set this recorder to

record pause.

h Insert the source tape into the connected

equipment and set to playback pause.

i At the same, press X REC PAUSE on this

recorder and the pause or play button on the connected equipment.

Recording starts.

j To stop recording, press x REC STOP on

this recorder.

◆If you connect a digital video camera with a DV IN jack (without using the DV Edit functions)

• Select “DV” in step 4.

• Select “Stereo1,” “Mix,” or “Stereo2” from “DV/D8 Audio Input” in step 6.

Hint

You can adjust the settings for the recording pi cture before recording. See “Adjusting the Recording Picture Quality and Size” (page 46).

Note

When recording a video game image, the screen may not be clear.

To use the default name, press </, to select “OK,” then press ENTER.

Notes

• You cannot set a scene to be shorte r than on e second.

• In order for a On e Touch Dub recording to be added to the D V/D8 Edit List, “Add to Edit List” in Features Setup must be set to “On” (page 98).

Creating a Copy of the Edited Contents (Copy Dubbing)

You can make copies of the programs in the DV/D8 Edit List . Each time you dub a DV/Digital8 format tape, the start and stop points of the selected scenes (called a “program”) are saved in a DV/D8 Edit List. You can select a program from the DV/D8 Edit List and use this information to copy the same contents onto another disc of your choice.

To use this function, you will do the following:

Connect your digital video camera and prepare for recording

Be sure to insert the original DV/Digital8 format tape that corresponds to the program in the DV/D8 Edit List.

Select a program from the DV/D8 Edit List

Dub the selected scenes to a disc

The recorder will fast forward and rewind the tape automatically and record the scenes to a disc of your choice. On a DVD-RW (VR mode), chapter marks are inserted at the start of each scene and where the recordings start on the tape. For other discs, the recorder marks chapters either in 6 or 15 minute intervals depending on the setting in “Auto Chapter” in Features Setup

(page97)

Creating a Copy of the Edited Contents (Copy Dubbing)

Recording From Equipment Connected to the LINE IN Jacks

You can connect other equipment (e.g. a VCR or video camera), and output the audio/video si gnal s to the r ec orde r fo r r eco rdi ng. Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the equipment has a DV output jack (i.LINK jack). See also the instruction manual supplied with the connected equipment.

Connecting other equipment to the LINE 2 IN jacks

You can monitor the recorded picture with a TV connected to the recording equipment.

When the connected equipment o utputs only monaural sound, use audio cables that distribute monaural sounds to left/right channels (not supplied).

Notes

• Do not connect the yellow LINE IN (VIDEO) jack when using an S VIDEO cord (not supplied).

• Do not connect the outp ut jack of this recorder to another equipment’s input jack with the other equipment’s output jack connected to the input jack of this recorder. Noise (feedback) may result.

• Pictures containing copy pr otection signals that prohibit any copying cannot be recorded.

Recording From Equipment Connected to the LINE IN Jacks

VCR, etc.

OUTPUT

AUDIO

VIDEO

S VIDEO

Audio/video cord

S VIDEO

(not supplied)

cord (not supplied)

to LINE 2 IN

: Signal flow

Hint

DVD recorder

SYSTEM MENU

RETURN

a Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Preparing for recording

using the DV IN jack” (page 75), then press

SYSTEM MENU.

Be sure to insert the original DV/Digital8 format tape that corresponds to the program in the DV/D8 Edit List.

b Press M/m to select “DV/D8 EDIT,” then

press ENTER.

The DV/D8 Edit menu appears.

</M/m/,, ENTER

x REC STOP

Recording from connected equipment

Z OPEN/CLOSE

TOOLS

M/m, ENTER

X REC PAUSE

REC MODE

INPUT SELECT

a Turn on your TV and this recorder, then set

it to the connected channel (“VIDEO,” etc.).

b Press Z OPEN/CLOSE, and place a

recordable disc on the tray.

c Press Z OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc tray.

Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front panel display.

d Press INPUT SELECT to select a input

source according to the connection you made.

The front panel display changes as follows:

Channel number

e Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the

recording mode.

The recording mode changes as follows:

HQ SP LP EPHSP SLP

x REC STOP

L2L1 L3 DV

1-21

Page 28

Settings and Adjustments

The Setup Displays allow you to adjust the recorder to suit your preferences. This section first lists the ty pes of Setup Displays, and then explains how to use the Setup Displays (“Using the Setup Displays”).

•

About the Setup Display Structure

•

Using the Setup Displays

•

Settings (Basic Settings)

•

Video Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

•

Audio Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

•

Features Settings

•

Options Settings

•

Easy Setup (Resetting the Recorder)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . .

page 90 page 91 page 92 page 94 page 95 page 97 page 99

page 100

About the Setup Display Structure

By using the Setup Displays, you can make various adju stments to items such as picture and sound, as well as select a language for the subtitles.

System Menu

DVD Recorder

Dual RW

Compatible

SYSTEM MENU

TITLE LIST

Plays/erases/edits recorded titles.

TIMER

TIMER LIST

DV/D8 EDIT

SETUP

Select “SETUP”

Setup Displays

SETUP

Settings

Video

Audio

Features

Options

Easy Setup

SETUP

Settings

Video

Audio

Features

Options

Easy Setup

SETUP

Settings

Video

Audio

Features

Options

Easy Setup

SETUP

Settings

Video

Audio

Features

Options

Easy Setup

SETUP

Settings

Video

Audio

Features

Options

Easy Setup

SETUP

Settings

Video

Audio

Features

Options

Easy Setup

Tuner Preset

Set VCR Plus+ Channels

Clock

Language

TV Type :

Pause Mode :

Component Black Level :

Progressive Mode :

Line1 Input :

Line3 Input :

Auto Stereo :

Tuner Audio :

Audio ATT :

Audio DRC :

Downmix :

Digital Out :

Dolby Digital

DTS :

Auto Chapter :

Parental Control

One Touch Dubbing

Format Disc :

Dimmer :

Auto Display :

Command Mode :

Factory Setup

Easy Setup

Selectable

Bright

DVD3

4 : 3 Letter Box

Auto

Video

Main

Off

Standard

Dolby Surround

D-PCM

Off

6 Min

1. “Settings”

(page 92)

2. “Video”

(page 94)

3. “Audio”

(page 95)

4. “Features”

(page 97)

5. “Options”

(page 99)

6. “Easy Setup”

(page 100)

Using the Setup Displays

The Setup Displays are used in the following way.

Note

Playback settings stored in the disc take priority over the Setup Display settings, and not all the functions described may work.

SYSTEM MENU

RETURN

Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is stopped.

The System Menu appears.

DVD Recorder

Dual RW

Compatible

SYSTEM MENU

TITLE LIST

TIMER

TIMER LIST

DV/D8 EDIT

SETUP

Press M/m to select “SETUP,” then press ENTER.

The Setup Display appears.

SETUP

Settings

Tuner Preset

Video

Set VCR Plus+ Channels

Audio

Clock

Features

Language

Options

Easy Setup

Plays/erases/edits recorded titles.

</M/m/,, ENTER

Press M/m to select “Settings,” “Video,” “Audio,” “Features,” “Options,” or “Easy Setup,” then press ENTER.

The selected Setup Display appears. Example: “Video”

SETUP

Settings

Features

Options

Easy Setup

Press M/m to select the item you want to set up, then press ENTER.

Available options for the item appear. Example: “TV Type”

Settings

Features

Options

Easy Setup

Some items display a dialogue box that provides further detailed settings. Example: The following dialogue box appears when “Parental Control” in Features Setup is selected.

Features - Parental Control

Enter your password.

In this case, see “Parental Control” in “Features Settings” (page 97).

Press M/m to select an option, then press ENTER.

The set option is displayed next to the setup item. Example: when “16:9” is set.

Settings

Features

Options

Easy Setup

To turn off the display

Press SYSTEM MENU repeatedly.

Video

Audio

SETUP

Video

Audio

SETUP

Video

Audio

TV Type :

Pause Mode :

Component Black Level :

Progressive Mode :

Line1 Input :

Line3 Input :

TV Type :

Pause Mode :

Component Black Level :

Progressive Mode :

Line1 Input :

Line3 Input :

TV Type :

Pause Mode :

Component Black Level :

Progressive Mode :

Line1 Input :

Line3 Input :

4 : 3 Letter Box

Auto

Video

4 : 3 Letter Box

16 : 9

Auto

4 : 3 Letter Box

4 : 3 Pan Scan

Auto

Video

Cancel

16 : 9

Auto

Video

Settings and Adjustments

About the Setup Display Structure

Settings (Basic Settings)

The Settings Setup helps you to make fundamental settings for the recorder.

Select “Video” in the Setup Display. To use the display, see “Using the Setup Displays” (page 91). The default settings are underlined.

SETUP

Settings

Tuner Preset

Video

Set VCR Plus+ Channels

Audio

Clock

Features

Language

Options

Easy Setup

Tuner Preset

◆Auto Preset

Automatically presets the receivable channels. The recorder can receive VHF channels 2 to 13, UHF channels 14 to 69, and unscrambled CATV channels 1 to 125. First, we recommend that you preset the receivable channe ls in your area using automatic presetting methods.

Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Using the Setup Displays” (page 91) to select “Settings” in the Setup Display.

Press M/m to select “Tuner Preset,” then press ENTER.

Settings - Tuner Preset

Antenna / Cable :

Cable

Auto Preset

Manual Set :

Add

AFT :

Press M/m to select “Antenna/Cable,” then press ENTER.

Settings - Tuner Preset

Antenna / Cable :

Cable

Antenna

Auto Preset

Cable

Add

Manual Set :

AFT :

◆ To preset cable TV channels

Press M/m to select “Cable,” then press ENTER.

◆ To preset VHF and UHF channels

Press M/m to select “Antenna,” then press ENTER.

Press M/m to select “Auto Preset,” then press ENTER.

All receivable channels are preset in numerical sequence.

Settings - Tuner Preset - Auto Preset

Settings (Basic Settings)

Searching for receivable channels. Please Wait.

Ch 23

Using the Setup Displays

◆Manual Set

Presets or disables channels manually. If some channels could not be set using th e Auto Preset or Easy Setup function, you can set them manually. If there is no sound or if the picture is distorted, the tuner sy stem may not have been preset correctly or completely during Auto Preset or Easy Setup. Set the correct tuner system manually by the steps below.

Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Using the Setup Displays” (page 91) to select “Settings” in the Setup Display.

Press M/m to select “Tuner Preset,” then press ENTER.

Settings - Tuner Preset

Antenna / Cable :

Auto Preset

Manual Set :

AFT :

Press M/m to select “Antenna/Cable,” then press ENTER.

Settings - Tuner Preset

Antenna / Cable :

Auto Preset

Manual Set :

AFT :

◆ To preset cable TV channels

Press M/m to select “Cable,” then press ENTER.

◆ To preset VHF and UHF channels

Press M/m to select “Antenna,” then press ENTER.

Ch1

Select the channel you want to preset or disable.

Settings - Tuner Preset

Antenna / Cable :

Auto Preset

Manual Set :

AFT :

◆ To preset a channel

A Enter the channel number using the number

button(s), then press SET.

B Press M/m to select “Manual Set,” then press

ENTER.

C Press M/m to select “Add,” then press ENTER.

◆ To disable a channel

A Press CH +/– to select the channel number. B Press M/m to select “Manual Set,” then press

ENTER.

C Press M/m to select “Erase,” then press

ENTER.

Cable

Add

Cable

Antenna

Cable

Add

Channel to be preset/disabled

Cable

Add

Erase

Ch1

Ch34

Press M/m to select “AFT,” then press ENTER.

Settings - Tuner Preset

Antenna / Cable :

Auto Preset

Manual Set :

AFT :

Press M/m to select “On,” then press ENTER.

On Normally select this. Off Allows you to adjust the pictures manually.

Select this if the Auto Fine Tuning function does not work effectively.

◆ If the picture is not clear

A Press

M/m

to select “Off,” then press ENTER.

The fine tuning bar appears.

Fine Tuning

B Press

</,

press ENTER.

To preset or disable another channel, repeat steps 3 and 6.

Set VCR Plus+ Channels

Sets up the guide channel number assigned to each channel. You need to set this correctly when you set the timer recording using the VCR Plus+ function. For details, see page25.

Clock

◆Auto (Auto Clock Set)

Turns on the Auto Clock Set function when a channel in your local area broadcasts a time signal.

Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Using the Setup Displays” (page 91) to select “Settings” in the Setup Display.

Press M/m to select “Clock,” then press ENTER.

Settings - Clock

Select a method for setting the clock. If you select "Auto", this recorder will look for a time signal when you turn it off.

Auto Manual

Press </, to select “Auto,” then press ENTER.

Settings - Clock - Auto Clock Set

Full Auto :

Clock Set CH :

Time Zone :

Daylight Saving :

Press M/m to select “Full Auto,” then press ENTER.

Press M/m to select “Yes,” then press ENTER.

The recorder automatically sets the clock by searching for a channel that carries a time signal and sets your time zone and Daylight Saving Time (if applicable).

Ch1

Cable

Add

Off

Ch34

to obtain a clearer picture, the

Yes

– –

◆If the clock does not activate

If your clock is set to the wrong time zone or Daylight Saving Time, you can adjust these settings without turning off the Auto Clock Set function.

Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Using the Setup Displays” (page 91) to select “Settings” in the Setup Display.

Press M/m to select “Clock,” then press ENTER.

Press </, to select “Auto,” then press ENTER.

Press M/m to select “Full Auto,” then press ENTER.

Press M/m to select “No,” then press ENTER.

Settings - Clock - Auto Clock Set

Full Auto :

Clock Set CH :

– –

Time Zone :

Auto

Daylight Saving :

Auto

Press M/m to select the item you want to set and press ENTER. Then press M/m to make the setting and press ENTER.

◆ Clock Set CH

Select a channel that carries a time signal using the number buttons. Use this option if you know of a channel that carries a time signal. Most PBS member stations broadcast a time signal. For the fastest response select your local PBS station. Leave the setting at “--” to have the recorder automatically search for a channel that carries a time signal. To return to “- -,” enter “0.”

Settings - Clock - Auto Clock Set

Full Auto :

Clock Set CH :

– –

Time Zone :

Auto

Daylight Saving :

Auto

◆ Time Zone

Select the time zone of your area, or select “Auto” to have the recorder automatically set your time zone. The options are: Auto y Atlantic y Eastern y Central y Mountain y Pacific y Alaska y Hawaii y Auto

◆ Daylight Saving

Select “On” or “Off” (standard time), or select “Auto” to have the recorder automatically set the daylight saving time.

Hint

If you set “Full Auto” to “Yes,” the Auto Clock Set functi on is activated whenever the recorder is turned off.

◆Manual (Manual Clock Set)

If the Auto Clock Set function did not set the clock correctly for your local area, set the clock manually.

Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Using the Setup Displays” (page 91) to select “Settings” in the Setup Display.

Settings (Basic Settings)

Settings and Adjustments

continued

1-22

Page 29

Audio Settings

Settings and Adjustments

Pause Mode (DVDs only)

Selects the picture in pause mode.

Component Black Level

Selects the black level (setup lev el) for the video signals output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks (page 51). This setting is not effective when the recorder outputs progressive signal and the PROGRESSIVE indicator lights up on the front panel.

Progressive Mode

Selects the conversion mode of software when the recorder is set to output video signals in progressive format (page 51).

Line1 Input

Selects a method of inputting video signals for t he LINE IN 1 jack on the rear panel of the recorder.

Line3 Input

Selects the method of inputting video signals fo r t he L INE IN3 jack on the rear panel of the recorder.

Audio Settings

The Audio Setup allows you to set the sound according to the playback and connection conditions.

Select “Audio” in the Setup Display. To use the display, see “Using the Setup Displays” (page91). The default settings are underlined.

Auto Stereo

This function affects only w hen “Tuner Audio” is set to “Main.”

Tuner Audio

Selects the sound to be recorded.

Notes

• If no SAP sound is received, the main sound is recorded regardless of the setting.

• When “Tuner Audio” is set to “SAP,” set “Auto Stereo” to “On.”

Audio ATT (attenuation)

If the playback sound is distorted, set this item to “On.” The recorder reduces the audio output level. This function affects the output of the following jacks: –LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R) 1/2 jacks

Auto

The picture, including subjects that move dynamically, is output with no jitter. Normally select this position.

Frame The picture, including subjects tha t d o

not move dynamically, is output in high resolution.

Sets the black level of the output signal to the standard level.

Off Select this when connecting equipment

for which the black level (setup level) is set to “0.”

Auto

Automatically detects if you are playing Film based or Video based software and convert the signal to the appropriate conversion mode. Normally select this.

Video Selects the conversion mode for Video

based software, regardless of the software type that you are playing.

Video

Inputs video signals.

S Video In puts S video signals.

Video

Inputs video signals.

S Video In puts S video signals.

On Receives stereo programs. Normally

select this.

Off Select this to reduce noise. Th e sound

changes to monaural.

Main

Records only main sound.

SAP Records onl y t he S A P (S eco nd Audio

Program) sound.

On Select this when the playback sound

from the speakers is distorted.

Off

Normally select this position.

Settings

Video

Audio

Features

Options

Easy Setup

Auto Stereo :

Tuner Audio :

Audio ATT :

Audio DRC :

Downmix :

Digital Out :

Dolby Digital

DTS :

Main

Off

Standard

Dolby Surround

D-PCM

Off

SETUP

continued

Features Settings

Settings and Adjustments

Features Settings

The Features Setup provides entries to the following features. Select “Audio” in the Setup Display. To use the display, see

“Using the Setup Displays” (page 91) . The default settings are underlined.

Auto Chapter

Automatically divides a recording (a title) into chapters by inserting chapter markings at a specified interval. The markings are made during recording.

Notes

• Depending upon the size of the recording being made, the actual interval may vary from the interval selected in “Auto Chapter.” The selected interval should only be used as an approximation to create chapters.

• This function is not available when using DVD-RWs in VR mode with the DV Edit function. Chapter marks are automatically entered where the recordings start on the tape (page78, 79, 81).

Parental Control (DVD VIDEO only)

Playback of some DVD VIDEOs can be limited according to a predetermined level, such as the age of the use rs. Scenes may be blocked or replaced with different scenes.

Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Using the Setup Displays” (page 91) to select “Features” in the Setup

Display.

Press M/m to select “Parental Control,” then press ENTER.

◆ If you have not entered a password

The display for registering a new password appears.

◆ When you have already registered a password

The display for entering the pas sword appears.

Enter your four digit password using the number buttons, then select “OK” and press ENTER.

Press M/m to select “Standard,” then press , or ENTER.

The selection items for “Standard” are displayed.

Press M/m to select a geographic area as the playback limitation level, then press ENTER.

The area is selected. When you select “Others,” press the number buttons to select and enter an area code in the table on page 98. Then select “OK” and press ENTER.

Press M/m to select “Level,” then press ENTER.

The selection items for “Level” are displayed.

Select the level you want using M/m, then press ENTER.

Parental Control setting is complete. The lower the value, the stricter the limitation.

• To cancel the Parental Control setting for the disc

Set “Level” to “Off” in step 7.

• To change the password

A In step 4, select “Password,” then press ENTER.

The display for registering a password appears.

B Enter a new four-digit password using the number

buttons, then select “OK” and press ENTER.

Notes

• If you forget your password, you will have to re set it by selec ting “Parental Control” under “Factory Setup” in Options Setup (page 99).

• When you play discs which do not hav e the Parental Control function, playback cannot be limited on this recorder.

• Depending on the disc , you may be asked to change the Parental Control level while playing the disc. In this ca se, enter your password, then change the level. If the Resume Play mode is canceled, the level returns to the previous level.

Off No chapter mark is inserted.

6Min

Inserts chapter marks at approximately 6 minute intervals.

15Min Inserts chapter marks at approximately 15

minute intervals.

Settings

Video

Audio

Features

Options

Easy Setup

Auto Chapter :

Parental Control

One Touch Dubbing

6 Min

SETUP

Features - Parental Control

Enter a new password.

Cancel

Features - Parental Control

Enter your password.

Cancel

Features - Parental Control

Level :

Standard :

Password

Off

USA

Features - Parental Control

Level :

Standard :

Password

Off

Others

USA

Others

Features - Parental Control

Level :

Standard :

Password

Off

Others

Off

continued

Press M/m to select “Clock,” then press ENTER.

Settings - Clock

Select a method for setting the clock. If you select "Auto", this recorder will look for a time signal when you turn it off.

Auto Manual

Press </, to select “Manual,” then press ENTER.

Settings - Clock - Present Time

Set the time and date manually.

2003/

1/112:Wed 00 AM

Press M/m to set the month, then press ,.

Set the day, year, hour, and minutes in sequence. Press </, to select the item to be set, then press M/m to set the numbers. The day of the week is set automatically.

Press ENTER to start the clock.

Hint

To change the numbers in step 3, press < to return to the item to be changed, and select the numbers by pressing M/m.

Language

◆OSD (On-Screen Display)

Switches the display language on the screen.

◆DVD Menu

Switches the language for the DVD menu.

◆Audio

Switches the language of the sound track. When you select “Original,” the language given priority in the disc is selected.

◆Subtitle

Switches the language of the subtitles recorded on the disc. When you select “Audio Follow,” the subtitle language changes according to the language you selected for the soun d track.

Hint

If you select “Others” in “DVD Menu,” “Subtitle,” or “Audio,” select and enter a language code from “Language Code List” (page 108) using the number buttons.

Note

If you select a language in “DVD Menu,” “Subtit le,” or “Audio” that is not recorded on the DVD VIDEO, one of the recorded languages will be automatically selected.

Video Settings

Choose the settings according to the TV, tuner, or decoder to be connected.

Select “Video” in the Setup Display. To use the display, see “Using the Setup Displays” (page91). The default settings are underlined.

SETUP

Settings

Features

Options

Easy Setup

TV Type

Selects the aspect ratio of the connected TV (4:3 standard or wide).

16:9 Select this when connecting to a wide-

4:3 Letter Box

4:3 Pan Scan Select this when connecting to a 4:3

16:9

4:3 Letter Box

4:3 Pan Scan

Note

Depending on the disc, “4:3 Letter Box” may be selected automatically instead of “4:3 Pan Scan” or vice versa.

TV Type :

Video

Pause Mode :

Audio

Component Black Level :

Progressive Mode :

Line1 Input :

Line3 Input :

screen TV or TV with a wide mode function.

Select this when connecting to a 4:3 screen TV. Displays a wide picture with bands on the upper and lower portions of the screen.

screen TV. Automatically displays a wide picture on the entire screen and cuts off the portions that do not fit.

4 : 3 Letter Box

Auto

Video

Video Settings

Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) (DVDs only)

Makes the sound clear when the volume is turned down when playing a DVD that conforms to “Audio DRC.” This affects the output from the following jacks: –LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R) 1/2 jacks –DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack only when

“Dolby Digital” is set to “D-PCM” (page 96).

Standard TV Mode Makes low sounds clear even if you

Wide Range Gives you the feeling of be ing at a live

Downmix (DVDs only)

Switches the method for mixing down to two channels when you play a DVD which has rear sound elements (channels) or is recorded in Dolby Digital format. For details on the rear signal components, see “Checking the audio signal format” (page 58). This function affects the output of the following jacks: –LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R) 1/2 jacks –DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack when “Dolby

Digital” is set to “D-PCM” (page96).

Dolby Surround

Normal Multi-channel audio signals are

Digital Out

Selects if audio signals are output via the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks.

Off The influence of the digital circuit upon the analog

• To set the digital output signal

The following setup items switch the method of outputting audio signals when you connect a component such as an amplifier (receiver) or MD deck with a digital input jack. For connection details, see “Connecting the Audio Cords” (page 19). Select “Dolby Digital” and “DTS” after setting “Digital Out” to “On.”

If you connect a component that does not accept the selected audio signal, a loud noise (or no sound) will come o ut from the speakers, and may affect your ears or cause speaker damage.

Audio Settings

Normally select this position.

turn the volume down.

performance.

Normally select this position. Multi-channel audio signals are output to two channels for enjoying surround sounds.

downmixed to two channels for use with your stereo.

Normally select this position. When you select “On,” see “To set the digital output signal” for further settings.

circuit is minimal.

SETUP

Settings

Auto Stereo :

Video

Tuner Audio :

Audio

Audio ATT :

Features

Audio DRC :

Options

Downmix :

Digital Out :

Easy Setup

Dolby Digital

DTS :

Main

Off

Standard

Dolby Surround

D-PCM

Off

◆Dolby Digital (DVDs only)

Selects the type of Dolby Digital signal.

D-PCM Select this when the recorder is connected to an

audio component lacking a built-in Dolby Digital decoder. You can select whether the signals conform to Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) or not by making adjustments to the “Downmix” item in Audio Setup (page 96).

Dolby

Select this when the recorder is connected to an

Digital

audio component with a built-in Dolby Digital decoder.

◆DTS (DVD VIDEO only)

Selects whether or not to output DTS signals.

On Select this when the recorder is co nnected to an

audio component with a built-in DTS decoder. Select this when the recorder is connected to an

Off

audio component without a built-in DTS decoder.

1-23

Page 30

• Area code

Standard Code number

Argentina 2044 Australia 2047 Austria 2046 Belgium 2057 Brazil 2070 Canada 2079 Chile 2090 China 2092 Denmark 2115 Finland 2165 France 2174 Germany 2109 India 2248 Indonesia 2238 Italy 2254 Japan 2276 Korea 2304 Malaysia 2363 Mexico 2362 Netherlands 2376 New Zealand 2390 Norway 2379 Pakistan 2427 Philippines 2424 Portugal 2436 Russia 2489 Singapore 2501 Spain 2149 Sweden 2499 Switzerland 2086 Thailand 2528 United Kingdom 2184

One Touch Dubbing

Displays the following items.

◆Finalize Disc

Selects whether or not to finalize the disc automatically following One Touch Dub (page78).

Auto Automatically finalizes the disc following

One Touch Dub. Allows you to finalize the disc manually.

Manual

◆Add to Edit List

Automatically generates a program in the DV/D8 Edit List during One Touch Dub of DV/Digital8 forma t tapes. You can use the created program for further editing. For details, see page 78.

On Automatically generates a program during One

Touch Dub of DV/Digital8 format tapes.

Off No program is generate d.

Options Settings

The Options Setup allows you to set up other operational settings.

Select “Options” in the Setup Display. To use the display, see “Using the Setup Displays” (page 91) . The default settings are underlined.

SETUP

Settings

Format Disc :

Selectable

Video

Dimmer :

Bright

Audio

Auto Display :

Features

Command Mode :

DVD3

Options

Factory Setup

Easy Setup

Format Disc (DVD-RW only)

Selects the recording format when formatting a DVD-RW.

VR Automatically formats the disc in VR

Video Automatically formats the disc in

Selectable

Dimmer

Adjusts the lighting of the front panel display.

Bright Dark Low lighting. Display Off Turns off the lighting.

Auto Display

Off Displays information only when DISPLAY is

Command Mode

Changes the Command Mode of the recorder if other DVD equipment is assigned the same Command Mode. Be sure to match the Command Mode switch on the remote to the setting made here. For details, see “Preparing the Remote” on page 22.

DVD1 Select this if the default Command Mode

DVD2 Select this if the default Command Mode

DVD3

mode.

Video mode. Allows you to select the format before

formatting.

Bright lighting.

Automatically displays information on the screen when the recorder is turned on, etc.

pressed.

conflicts with other DVD equipment.

conflicts with other DVD equipment. The default Command Mode of the recorder.

Factory Setup

Allows you to select the setup settings by group, and return them to their default settings. Note that all of your previous settings will be lost.

Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Using the Setup Displays” (page 91) to select “Options” in the Setup Display.

Press M/m to select “Factory Setup,” then press , or ENTER.

The display for selecting the group of settings appears.

Press M/m to select the group of settings you want to return to default from “Settings,” “Video,” “Audio,” “Features,” “Options” “Parental Control,” and “All,” then press , or ENTER.

The dialogue box appears.

Press </, to select “Start,” then press ENTER.

The selected settings return to the default settings.

Press ENTER when “Finish” appears.

Settings and Adjustments

Features Settings

Easy Setup (Resetting the Recorder)

Select this to restart Easy Setup mode for basic setup.

Select “Easy Setup” in the Setup Display. To use the display, see “Using the Setup Displays” (page 91).

SETUP

Settings

Easy Setup

Video

Audio

Features

Options

Easy Setup

Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Using the Setup Displays” (page 91) to select “Easy Setup” in the Setup

Display.

Press </, to select “Start,” then press ENTER.

Follow the Easy Setup explanation from step 5 on page 22.

Easy Setup (Resetting the Recorder)

100

Additional Information

•

Troubleshooting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

•

Self-diagnosis Function (When letters/numbers

appear in the display)

•

Specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

•

About i.LINK

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

•

Glossary

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

•

Language Code List

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

page 101

page 104 page 105 page 106 page 107 page 108

Options Settings

Troubleshooting

If you experience any of the following difficulties while using the recorder, use this troubleshooting g ui de to help remedy the problem before requesting repairs. Should an y pr oblem persist, consult your nearest Sony dealer.

Power

The power does not turn on.

, Check that the AC power cord is connected securely.

Picture

There is no picture.

, Re-connect the connecting cord securely. , The connecting cords are damaged. , The Setup Display appears. Press RETURN to turn off t he

display.

, Check the connection to your TV (page 16). , Switch the input selector on your TV (su ch as to “VCR”) so

that the signal from the recorder appears on the TV screen.

Picture noise appears.

, The disc is dirty or flawed. , If the picture output signal from your r ecorder passes

through your VCR to get to your TV, or if you are connected to a combination TV/VIDEO player, the copy-protection signal applied to some DVD programs could affect pict ur e quality. If you still experience this problem even when you connect your recorder directly to your TV, try connecting your recorder to your TV’s S VIDEO input.

, You have set the recorder to progressive format (the

PROGRESSIVE indicator lights up) even though your TV cannot accept the progressive signal. In this case, press the PROGRESSIVE button on the front panel until the progressive indicator turns off.

, Even if your TV is compatible with progressive form at

(480p) signals, the image may be affected when you set the recorder to progressive format. In this case, press the PROGRESSIVE button so that the PROGRESSIVE indicator turns off and the recorder is set to normal (interlace) format.

TV program reception does not fill the screen.

, Set the channel manually in “Tuner Preset” in Settings Setup

(page 92).

, Select the correct source using the INPUT SELECT button,

or select a channel of any TV program using the CH +/– buttons.

Troubleshooting

Additional Information

continued

101

1-24

Page 31

TV program pictures are distorted.

103

Troubleshooting

Additional Information

The language for the sound track cannot be changed.

, Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the DVD VIDEO,

DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD+RW, or DVD-RW being played.

, The DVD VIDEO prohibits the changing of the language for

the sound track.

, Try changing the language using the DVD VIDEO’s menu.

The subtitle language cannot be changed or turned off.

, Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on the DVD VIDEO. , The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing of the subtitles. , Try changing the subtitle using the DVD VIDEO’s menu.

The angles cannot be changed.

, Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD VIDEO being

played.

, You are trying to change the angles when “ANGLE” does

not appear on the TV screen (page 59).

, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing angles. , Try changing the angle using the DVD VIDEO’s menu.

Recording/Timer recording/Editing

The channel cannot be changed from the channel you are recording.

, Set the TV’s input source to “TV.”

Recording does not start immediately after you press the z REC button.

, An unused DVD-RW was inserted. It takes a while for the

recorder to automatically format a DVD-RW (VR mode).

Nothing was recorded even though you set the timer setting correctly.

, There was a power failure during recording. , The recorder’s internal clock stopped due to a power failure

that lasted for more than 1 hour. Reset the clock (page 93).

, The channel was disabled after the timer recording is set.

(See “Manual Set” on page 92.)

, Disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet, and

connect it again.

, The program contains copy protection signals that restricts

copying.

, The timer setting overlapped with another setting that was

set later or has priority (page43).

Recording does not stop immediately after you press the x REC STOP button.

, It will take a few seconds for the recorder to input disc data

before recording can stop.

Recording does not stop after you press x STOP.

, Press x REC STOP.

Timer recording is not complete or did not start from the beginning.

, There was a power failure during recording. If the power

recovers during the time a timer recording is set, the recorder resumes recording. Should the power failure continue for more than 1 hour, reset the clock (page 93).

, The timer setting overlapped with another setting that was

set later or has priority (p age 43).

, Disc space was not enough.

Contents previously recorded were erased.

, Data that has been recorded on a DVD with a PC will be

erased from the disc when the disc is inserted.

Recording from the equipment with a timer

Nothing was recorded even though you set the Synchro-Rec setting correctly.

, You forgot to turn off the connected equipment. Turn off the

connected equipment and set the recorder to Synchro-Rec standby mode (page 47).

, The recorder was not set to the Synchro-Recor ding standby

mode. Press SYNCHRO REC to have the recorder stand by for recording. Make sure the SYNCHRO REC indicator lights up on the front panel (page 47).

, The recorder is connected to the TV output jack of the

connected equipment.

Synchro-Recording does not complete.

, The timer setting for the connected equipment overl app ed

the recorder’s timer setting (page 47).

, There was a power failure during the recording.

The recorder automatically starts recording when the satellite receiver is turned on.

, The Synchro-Rec function was activated. Turn off the

satellite receiver and cancel the Synchro-Rec function

(page 47).

Display

The clock has stopped.

, Set the clock again (page 93). , The clock stopped due to a power failure tha t lasted for more

than 1 hour. Reset the clock (page 93).

The TIMER REC indicator is flashing.

, The disc does not have enough space or there are more than

99 titles in the disc. Insert a recordable disc.

, There is no recordable disc inside the recorder.

The recording mode indication is incorrect.

, If you make a recording that is less than three minutes long,

the recording mode indication shown during playback may not match the recording mode you selected during recording. Note that the actual recording mode will always match the mode you selected, not the indication during playba ck.

continued

, Reorient the TV antenna. , Adjust the picture (see the TV’s instruction manual). , Place the recorder and TV farther apart. , Place the TV and any bunched antenna cables farther apart.

TV channels cannot be changed.

, Switch the input selector to TV. , Connect the antenna cable correctly (page 16).

The picture from equipment connected to the recorder’s input jack does not fill the screen.

, If the equipment is connected to the LINE IN 1 jack, select

“L1” in the front panel display by pressing CH +/– or INPUT SELECT. If the equipment is connected to the LINE 2 IN jacks, select “L2” in the front panel display by pressing CH +/– or INPUT SELECT. If the equipment is connected to the LINE IN 3 jack, select “L3” in the front panel display by pressing CH +/– or INPUT SELECT. If the equipment is connected to the DV IN j ack, (this is usually for a digital video camera connection), select “DV” in the front panel display by pressing CH +/– or INPUT SELECT.

The playback picture or TV program from the equipment connected through the recorder is distorted.

, If the playback picture output from a DVD player, VCR, or

tuner goes through your recorder before rea ching your TV, the copy-protection signal applied to some programs could affect picture quality. Disconnect the playback equipment in question and connect it directly to your TV.

The picture does not fill the screen, even though the aspect ratio is set in “TV Type” in Video Setup.

, The aspect ratio of the disc is fixed on your DVD.

Sound

There is no sound.

, The disc is dirty or flawed. , Re-connect all connections secure ly. , The connecting cord is damaged. , Check the connections to the amplifier input. , The input source setting on the amplifier is incorrect. , The recorder is in pause mode or in Slow-motion Play mod e. , The recorder is in fast forward or fast reverse mode. , If the audio signal does not come through the DIGITAL

OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks, check the Audio Setup settings (page 95).

Sound distortion occurs.

, Set “Audio ATT” in Audio Setup to “On” (page95).

Sound is noisy.

, The disc is dirty or flawed. , When playing a CD with DTS sound tracks, noise will come

from the LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R) 1/2 jacks (page 50).

The sound volume is low

, The sound volume is low on some DVDs.

The sound volume may improve if you set “Audio DRC” in Audio Setup to “TV Mode” (page 96).

, Set “Audio ATT” in Audio Setup to “Off” (page95).

An alternate audio track cannot be recorded.

, Second Audio Program (SAP) is not available for all

programs. A program you are recording does not have a second audio program.

, You have set “Tuner Audio” in Audio Settings to “Main”

(page 95). Select “SAP” to record alternate audio programs.

Playback

The disc does not play.

, No disc is inserted. , A blank disc is inserted. , The disc is upside down.

Insert the disc with the labeled side facing up.

, The disc is not correctly inserted. , The recorder cannot play certain discs (such as a CD-ROM)

(page 50).

, The region code on the DVD VIDEO does not match the

recorder (page 49).

, Moisture has condensed inside the recorder. Remove the

disc and leave the recorder turned on for about half an hour until the moisture evaporates (page2).

, If the disc was recorded on another recorder, the recorder

cannot play the disc if it was not finalized (page 73).

The disc does not start playback from the beginning.

, Resume play was activated (page 53). During stop, select

“Reset Resume” in the TOOLS menu, then press ENTER.

, You have inserted a disc whose Title menu or DVD menu

automatically appears on the TV screen when it is first inserted.

The recorder starts playing the disc automatically.

, The DVD VIDEO features an auto playback function.

Playback stops automatically.

, While playing discs with an auto pause signal, the recorder

stops playback at the auto pause signal.

Some functions such as Stop, Search, or Slowmotion Play cannot be performed.

, Depending on the disc, you may not be able to do some of

the operations above. See the instruction manual supplied with the disc.

Troubleshooting

102

Remote commander

The remote does not function.

, Batteries are weak. , There are obstacles between the remote and the recorder. , The remote is too far from the recorder. , There are no batteries in the remote. , The remote’s manufacturer code returned to the default

, Turn on the recorder. , The remote is not pointed at the remote sensor on the

, Different command modes are set for the recorder and

Other Sony equipment responds to the remote.

, The same command mode is set for both the equipment and

Others

The recorder does not operate properly.

, When static electricity, etc., causes the recorder to operate

Nothing appears in the front panel display.

, “Dimmer” in Options Setup is set to “Display Off”

Five numbers or letters are displayed on the front panel display.

, The self-diagnosis function was activated (see the table on

The disc tray does not open when you press the Z OPEN/CLOSE button.

, It may take a few seconds for the disc tray to open after you

The disc tray does not open and “TRAY LOCKED” appears on the front panel display.

, Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service

“RECOVERY” appears in the front panel display.

, The recorder’s recovery function was activated when the

Mechanical sound is heard when the recorder is off.

, When the recorder’s clock is being adjusted, operational

Self-diagnosis Function (When letters/numbers appear in the display)

104

setting when you replaced the batteries. Reset the code

(page 26).

recorder.

remote. Set the same command mode (page 28).

recorder. Set a different command mode for the recorder

(page 28).

abnormally, unplug the recorder and then plug it in again.

(page 99).

page 104).

have recorded or edited a disc. This is because the recorder is adding disc data to the disc.

facility.

recorder was turned on because the power was turned off or failed during recording. Leave the recorder on until “RECOVERY” disappears from the front panel display.

noises (such as the internal fan) may be heard, even when the power is off. This is not malfunction.

Self-diagnosis Function (When letters/numbers appear in the display)

When the self-diagnosis function is activated to prevent the recorder from malfunctioning, a five-cha racter service number (e.g., C 13 50) with a combination of a letter and four numbers appears on the front panel display. In this case, check the following table.

First three characters of the service number

C 13 The disc is dirty.

C 31 The disc is not inser t ed correctly.

E XX

(xx is a number)

Cause and/or corrective action

, Clea n the disc with a soft cloth (page 3).

, Re-i ns er t the disc correctly.

To prevent a malfunction, the record er ha s performed the self-diagnosis function. , Contac t your nearest Sony dealer or local

authorized Sony service facility and give the five-character service number. Example: E 61 10

1-25

Page 32

About i.LINK

The DV IN jack on this recorder is an i.LINK-compliant DV IN jack. This section describes the i.LINK standard and its features.

What is i.LINK?

i.LINK is a digital serial interface for handling digital video, digital audio and other data in two directions betwe en equipment having the i.LINK jack, and for controlling other equipment. i.LINK-compatible equipment can be conn ected by a single i.LINK cable. Possible applications are operations and data transactions with various digital AV equipment. When two or more i.LINK-compatible equipment are connected to this recorder in a daisy chain, operations and data transactions are possible with not only the equipment that this recorder is connected to but also with other devices via the di rectly connected equipment. Note, however, that the method of operation sometimes varies according to the characteristics and specific ations of the equipment to be connected, and that operations and data transactions are sometimes not possible on some connected equipment.

Note

Normally, only one piece of equ ipment can be conn ected to this r ecorder by the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable). When connecting this recorder to i.LINK-compatible equipment having two or more i.LINK jacks (DV jacks), see the instruction manual of the equipment to be connected.

About the Name “i.LINK”

i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394 data transport bus proposed by SONY, and is a trademark approved by many corporations. IEEE 1394 is an international standard standardized by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.

i.LINK Baud rate

i.LINK’s maximum baud rate varies according to the equi pment. Three maximum baud rates are defined:

S100 (approx. 100 Mbps* ) S200 (approx. 200 Mbps) S400 (approx. 400 Mbps)

The baud rate is listed under “Specifications” in the instruction manual of each equipment. It is also indicated near the i.LINK jack on some equipment. The maximum baud rate of equipment on whic h it is not indicated such as this unit is “S100.” When units are connected to equipment having a different maximum baud rate, the baud rate sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate.

*What is Mbps?

Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the amount of data that c an be sent or received in one second. For example, a baud rate of 100 Mbps means that 100 megabits of data can be sent in one second.

About i.LINK

106

i.LINK functions on this recorder

For details on how to dub when this recorder is connected to other video equipment having DV jacks, see page 75. The DV jack on this recorder can only input DVC-SD signals. It cannot output signals. The DV jack will not accept MICRO MV signals from equipment such as a MICRO MV digital video camera with an i.LINK jack. For further precautions, see the notes on page 75. For details on precautions when connecting this recorder, also see the instruction manuals for the equipment to be connected.

Required i.LINK Cable

Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable (during DV dubbing).

i.LINK and are trademarks.

Glossary

Chapter

(page 55)

Sections of a picture or a music feature that are smaller than titles. A title is composed of several chapters. Depending on the disc, no chapters m a y be recorded.

CPRM

(page 35)

CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media) is a coding technology that protects copyrights for images.

Dolby Digital

(page 96)

Digital audio compression technology developed by Dolby Laboratories. This technology conforms to multi-chan nel surround sound. The rear channel is stereo and there is a discrete subwoofer channel in this format. Dolby Digital provides the same discrete channels of high quality digital audio found in “Dolby Digital” theater surround sound systems. Good channel separation is realized because all of the channel data is recorded discretely and little deterioration occurs because all channel data processing is digital.

Dolby Surround (Pro Logic)

(page 96)

Audio signal processing technology that Dolby Laboratories developed for surround sound. When the input signal contains a surround component, the Pr o Logic process outputs the front, center and rear signals. The rear channel is monaural.

DTS

(page 96)

Digital audio compression technology that Digital Theater Systems, Inc. developed. This technology conforms to multi-channel surround sound. The rear channel is stereo and there is a discrete subwoofer channel in this format. DTS provides the same discrete channels of high quality digital audio. Good channel separation is realized because all of the channel data is recorded discretely and little deterioration occurs because all channel data processing is digital.

DVD VIDEO

(page 49)

A disc that contains up to eight hours of moving pictures even though its diameter is the same as a CD. The data capacity of a single-layer and single-sided DVD is 4.7 GB (Giga Byte), which is 7 times that of a CD. The data capacity of a double-layer and single-

sided DVD is 8.5 GB, a single-layer and double-sided DVD is 9.4 GB, and double-layer and double-sided DVD is 17GB. The picture data uses the MPEG 2 format, one of the worldwide standards of digital compression technology. The picture data is compressed to about 1/40 (average) of its original size. The DVD also uses a variable rate coding technology that changes the data to be allocated according to the status of the picture. Audio information is recorded in a multi-channel format, such as Dolby Digital, allowing you to enjoy a more real audio presence. Furthermore, various advanced functions such as the multi-angle, multilingual, and Parental Control functions are provided with the DVD.

DVD-R

(page 35)

A DVD-R is a recordable disc that is the same size as a DVD VIDEO. Contents can be recorded only once to a DVD-R, and will have the same format as a DVD VIDEO.

DVD-RW

(page 35)

A DVD-RW is a recordable and rewritable disc that is the same size as a DVD VIDEO. The DVD-RW has two different modes: VR mode and Vi deo mode. DVDs created in Video mode have the same format as a DVD VIDEO, while discs created in VR (Video Recording) mode allow the contents to be programmed or edited.

DVD+RW

(page 35)

A DVD+RW (plus RW) is a recordable and rewritable disc. DVD+RWs use a recording format that is comparable to the DVD VIDEO format.

Film based software, Video based software

(page 51)

DVDs can be classified as Film based or Video based software. Film based DVDs contain the same images (24 frames per second) that are shown at movie theaters. Video based DVDs, such as television dramas or sit-coms, display images at 30 frames (or 60 fields) per second.

Index

(page 57)

A number that divides a track into sections to easily locate the point you want on a CD. Depending on the disc, no index may be recorded.

Interlace format

(page 51)

Interlace format shows every other line of an image as a single “field” and is the standard method for displaying images on television. The even number field shows the even numbered lines of an image, and the odd numbered field shows the odd numbered lines of an image.

Progressive format

Compared to the Interlace format that alternately shows every other line of an image (field) to create one frame, the Progressive format shows the entire image at once as a single frame. This means that while the Interlace format can show 30 frames/60 fields in one second, the Progressive format can show 60 frames in one second. The overall picture quality increases and still images, text, and horizontal lines appear sharper.

Title

The longest section of a picture or mus ic feature on a DVD, movie, etc., in video software, or the entire album in audio software.

Track

Sections of a music feature on a CD (the length of a song).

(page 51)

(page 55)

Glossary

Additional Information

107

Language Code List

For details, see pages 57, 60, 94. The language spellings conform to the ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard.

Code Language

1027 Afar 1028 Abkhazian 1032 Afrikaans 1039 Amharic 1044 Arabic 1045 Assamese 1051 Aymara 1052 Azerbaijani 1053 Bashkir 1057 Byelorussian 1059 Bulgarian 1060 Bihari 1061 Bislama 1066 Bengali; Bangla 1067 Tibetan 1070 Breton 1079 Catalan 1093 Corsican 1097 Czech 1103 Welsh 1105 Danish 1109 German 1130 Bhutani 1142 Greek 1144 English 1145 Esperanto 1149 Spanish 1150 Estonian 1151 Basque 1157 Persian 1165 Finnish 1166 Fiji 1171 Faroese 1174 French 1181 Frisian 1183 Irish 1186 Scots Gaelic 1194 Galician 1196 Guarani 1203 Gujarati 1209 Hausa 1217 Hindi 1226 Croatian 1229 Hungarian 1233 Armenian

Language Code List

108

Code Language

1235 Interlingua 1239 Interlingue 1245 Inupiak 1248 Indonesian 1253 Icelandic 1254 Italian 1257 Hebrew 1261 Japanese 1269 Yiddish 1283 Javanese 1287 Georgian 1297 Kazakh 1298 Greenlandic 1299 Cambodian 1300 Kannada 1301 Korean 1305 Kashmiri 1307 Kurdish 1311 Kirghiz 1313 Latin 1326 Lingala 1327 Laothian 1332 Lithuanian 1334 Latvian; Lettish 1345 Malagasy 1347 Maori 1349 Macedonian 1350 Malayalam 1352 Mongolian 1353 Moldavian 1356 Marathi 1357 Malay 1358 Maltese 1363 Burmese 1365 Nauru 1369 Nepali 1376 Dutch 1379 Norwegian 1393 Occitan 1403 (Afan)Oromo 1408 Oriya 1417 Punjabi 1428 Polish 1435 Pashto; Pushto 1436 Portuguese 1463 Quechua 1481 Rhaeto-Romance 1482 Kirundi 1483 Romanian 1489 Russian 1491 Kinyarwanda 1495 Sanskrit 1498 Sindhi 1501 Sangho

Code Language

1502 Serbo-Croatian 1503 Singhalese 1505 Slovak 1506 Slovenian 1507 Samoan 1508 Shona 1509 Somali 1511 Albanian 1512 Serbian 1513 Siswati 1514 Sesotho 1515 Sundanese 1516 Swedish 1517 Swahili 1521 Tamil 1525 Telugu 1527 Tajik 1528 Thai 1529 Tigrinya 1531 Turkmen 1532 Tagalog 1534 Setswana 1535 Tonga 1538 Turkish 1539 Tsonga 1540 Tatar 1543 Twi 1557 Ukrainian 1564 Urdu 1572 Uzbek 1581 Vietnamese 1587 Volapük 1613 Wolof 1632 Xhosa 1665 Yoruba 1684 Chinese 1697 Zulu

1703 Not specified

1-26E

Page 33

SECTION 2

DISASSEMBLY

NOTE: The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.

Set

Top case

(Page 2-2)

RDR-GX7

Tray cover assembly

(Page 2-4)

Front panel section

(Page 2-4)

FL-130 board

(Page 2-7)

Power block

(Page 2-2)

Aluminum door, Door base

(Page 2-5)

FR-195 board

(Page 2-7)

D.C. fan

(Page 2-3)

Shaft (R)

(Page 2-5)

Rear panel

(Page 2-3)

RD-045 board

(Page 2-6)

DVD drive

(Page 2-8)

AV-071 board

(Page 2-9)

2-1

Page 34

NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.

2-1. TOP CASE

Tapping screw

Top case

Tapping screw

Three tapping screws

(+BV sumitite B3 × 10)

2-2. POWER BLOCK

Remove the power block in the

direction of the arrow.

Connector (CN4, 14P)

Five tapping screws

(+BV sumitite B3

P.C. board spacer

Two tapping screws

(+BV sumitite B3

Connector (CN3, 13

10)

From DVD drive (CN1, 4P)

2-2

Page 35

2-3. D. C. FAN

)

Remove the D.C. fan in the

direction of the arrow.

Connector (CN102, 3P)

Two tapping screws

(+BV sumitite B3 ×10

2-4. REAR PANEL

Connector

(CN102, 3P)

Three tapping screws

(+BV sumitite B3

10)

Tapping screw

Cap (rear)

10)

Seven tapping screw

(+BV sumitite B3 ×10

Screw

(+B 3

Rear panel

2-3

Page 36

2-5. TRAY COVER ASSEMBLY

Two claws

Open the tray

Tray cover assembly

2-6. FRONT PANEL SECTION

Two tapping screws

(+BV sumitite B3

Tapping screw

(+B 2 × 3.5)

Five claws

Front panel section

2-4

Page 37

2-7. ALUMINUM DOOR, DOOR BASE

)

door base in the direction of the arrow.

Four tapping bind screws

(

B 2.6 × 8)

Ground door plate

Aluminum door, Door base

Remove the aluminum door,

2-8. SHAFT (R)

Shaft (R)

Shaft (L

Two shaft (C)

Tapping bind screw

(+B 2.6

Damper

2-5

Page 38

2-9. RD-045 BOARD

)

Remove the harness

in the direction of the arrow.

Harness

(RD-FL) (CN2001, 6P)

Harness

(RD-PS) (CN1701, 14P)

Senven tapping screws

(+BV sumitite B3

RD-045 board,

Bracket (RD)

Flexible flat cable

(FRD-002) (CN1103, 40P

Flexible flat cable

(FRA-003) (CN1902, 40P)

Flexible flat cable

(FRA-002) (CN1901, 47P)

RD-045 board

Seven tapping screws

(+BV sumitite B3

2-6

Bracket (RD)

Page 39

2-10.FL-130 BOARD

)

Harness

(RD-FL) (CN1704, 6P)

Two tapping screws

(+BV sumitite B3

Two claws

Flexible flat cable

(FFF-018) (CN1702, 11P)

FL-130 board

Harness

(AV-FL) (CN1705, 11P)

2-11.FR-195 BOARD

Flexible flat cable

(FFF-018) (CN102, 10P)

Two tapping screws

(+BV sumitite B3

Flexible flat cable

(FAR-003) (CN101, 19P

Cursor

Three claws

FR-195 board

2-7

Page 40

2-12.DVD DRIVE

Four tapping screws

(+BV sumitite B3

Harness

(DR-PS) (CN1, 4P)

Remove the DVD section

in the direction of the arrow.

Harness

(DR-PS, 4P)

(CN1801, 44P)

Flexible flat cable

(FRD-002) (CN1802, 40P)

CN-177 board

Two tapping screws

(+BV sumitite B3

Two s crews

(+B 3

Bracket (right)

Two s crews

(+B 3

Bracket (left)

DVD drive

2-8

Page 41

2-13.AV-071 BOARD

Harness

(AV-FL) (CN801, 11P)

Connector

(CN3, 13P)

Five tapping screws

(+BV sumitite B3 × 8)

Flexible flat cable

(FAR-003) (CN602, 19P)

AV-071 boa

Flexible flat cable

(FRA-003) (CN202, 39P)

Flexible flat cable

(FAE-012) (CN502, 27P)

Two P.C. board spacer

AV-071 boar

2-9

Page 42

2-14.CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION

FL-130 board

Power block

CN-177 board

AV-071 board

RD-045 board

FR-195 board

2-10E

Page 43

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2)

SECTION 3

RDR-GX7

AV-071(1/2)

BOARD

UNSW6V

TU PCONT

IC402

TU+5V

REG

P CONT

Q415

Q416

IC406

TU+30V

REG

TU401 TUNER

9V/5V

SDA

ST/BIL/SIF

SCL

AFT

30V

AGC

SAP

MODE

FMONO

VIDEO

Q409,411 Q412,414

EPG VIDEO

VIDEO

AMP

Q408,410

TU VDET

DET

AGC

Q404

TU L TU R

TU G MAX

FMONO

MODE

SAP

ST/BIL/SIF

AFT SCL SDA

TU VDET

TU G MAX

TU FMONO

TU M/SAP

TU SAP D

TU S/B D

TU AFT TU SCL

TU SDA

LINE IN

S VIDEO

VIDEO

AUDIO L

AUDIO R

J802

C Y

J1701

FL-130(1/2) BOARD

C Y

C2 IN

Y2 IN

V2 IN

L2 IN

R2 IN

L2 YCC

L2 YCY

L2 CVBS

FA IN L

FA IN R

IC701

VIDEO

REC AMP

BUFF Q707

BUFF Q705

BUFF Q712

BUFF Q710

Q713,715

SYNC

BUFF

Q709,711,716

DET

IC201

AUDIO L1 YCC L3 YCC

C Y

L3 YCY L1 YCY L1 CVBS L3 CVBS AU1 IN L AU3 IN L AU1 IN R AU3 IN R

PROCESSOR

IC301

2ch D/A

CONV

Q708

+5V

P CONT

Q801

UVI CV

VSYNC

H DET

SEP V

EPG VIDEO

REC Y/CVBSS

GTUD DATA GTUD LRCK

GTUD BCK AAD DATA

AAD LRCK

AAD BCK CEVA SDO CEVA SDO

IC303 IC304

2 5

UNSW5V

SW5V TU PCONT SYNC POW

REC C

RD-045(1/2)

BOARD

Y/G

CB/B

CR/R

SW5V

AU12V

-10V

UVI CV

VSYNC

H DET

SEP V

BUFF Q809

BUFF Q810

BUFF Q811

BUFF Q812

BUFF Q813

BUFF Q814

+5V

IC302

+5V REG

Y/C

PROCESSOR

IC801

+5V REG

Q303

P CONT

Q302

Q802

P CONT

Q801

Q301

0UT L1 0UT L2 0UT R1 0UT R2

UNSW10V

SW3.3V

UNSW12V

SW-10V

C Y

Cr Cb Y

IC802

J801

C Y

J805

COMPONENT

OUT

3-1 3-2

Page 44

RDR-GX7

3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)

TU VDET

JUST CLK

TU FMONO TU M/SAP TU SAP D TU S/B D TU AFT TU SCL TU SDA

UVI CV

VSYNC

H DET

AV-071(2/2)

BOARD

BUFF

Q1101

BUFF

Q1102

BUFF

Q1105

DVD

DRIVER

LPF

Q1103,1104

V DATA

SYNC

IC1101

CN-177 BOARD

UVIC

UVIC SIN UVIC SOUT UVIC SCLK

IDE D0-15

IDE A0-2

IDE W IDE R IDE DACK IDE IO RDY IDE HD16 IDE DREQ IDE INT

X1101

3.579545MHz

RD-045(2/2)

BOARD

IC602

EEPROM

CEVI SDO5 CEVI SDI5 CEVI SCK5

STATUS 0 STATUS 1

TPA,NTPA TPB,NTPB

SPDIFO

FAN ON/OFF FAN SPEED

FAN DET

IT5V

SWITCHING

Q606-610

IC605

µCOM

T601

VFL

-F

ND1701

IC1701

FLD

DRIVER

FLD SOUT FLD SCLK

KEY4

TU PCONT SYNC POW

X601

32.768kHz

X602

20MHz

KEY1

KEY2

KEY3

KEY5

S1701

POWER

IC103

LED

DRIVER

S101-107 FUNCTION

KEY

S108-110 FUNCTION

KEY

S111-116 FUNCTION

KEY

S117-122 FUNCTION

KEY

Q1703

LED

DRIVE Q1704

LED

DRIVE

IC101

SIRCS

DIMMER P CONT

IC603

P FAIL

FAIL

REMOTE

CONTROL

RECIVER

Q102

IC604

RESET

VDD

+5V

BUZZER

UNSW18V

UNSW6V

SW3.3V

SW5V

DET D602 D603

IC102

+5V REG

Q612,613

UNSW+6V

Q315-317

IC101

FAN

DRIVE

AMP/ BUFF

FAN12V

SENS

UNSW18V

SW3.3V

UNSW6V

J601

BZ601

CN301

COAX OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OUT

FAN

IC106

UNSW5V

UNSW13V

+5V REG

FROM

POWER

IC105

UNSW12V

SW-10V

UNSW-10V

SW12V

+12V

REG

Q100

-10V REG

UNSW13V

UNSW-10V

FAN12V

FL-130(2/2)

BOARD

D1702

D1703

D102-107 D109-112 D114-119

FR-195 BOARD

Q101

+5V REG

POWER

STAND BY

TPA,NTPA TPB,NTPB

+5VLED+5V

CN1703

DV IN

3-3 3-4E

Page 45

PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

SECTION 4

RDR-GX7

19144 1763

2 GND

3 GND

45V

CN703

DV IN

L(MONO)

VIDEO

S VIDEO

FR-195 BOARD

19PCN101

KEY4

-F

FLD RESET

VFL

123456789

-F

VFL

KEY4

FLD RESET

19PCN602

SIRCS

FLD CS

GND5VGND

FAR-003

FLAT CABLE

GND

SIRCS

FLD CS

KEY1

KEY3

KEY2

101112131415161718

GND

KEY2

KEY1

KEY3

GND

KEY5+FFLD CLK

GND

KEY5

FLD CLK

11PCN102

-F +F

VFL

3 4

FFF-018

KEY4

FLAT CABLE

FLD RESET

FLD CS

GND

FLD SCLK

GND

FLD SOUT

DIMMER

FLD DATA

LED STB

HARNESS HARNESS

1234567

FLD LCK

DIMMER

FLD DATA

11PCN1702

-F

VFL1

9 8

5V KEY4

7 6

FLD RESET FLD CS

5 4

GND FLD SCLK

3 2

GND

FLD SOUT

CN1705 11P

AU GND11

AU GND 11

CN801 11P

AN GND5

V2 IN6

AN GND7

L2 IN8

AU GND9

R2 IN10

L2 IN 8

V2 IN 6

R2 IN 10

AN GND 5

AN GND 7

AU GND 9

AN GND3

C2 IN4

C2 IN 4

AN GND 3

FL-130 BOARD

S2 SW1

Y2 IN2

Y2 IN 2

S2 SW 1

CN1704 6P

6PCN2001

TPB-

TPB+3

DGND1

1GND

2TPB-

3TPB+

J1701

1TPB2TPB+ 3TPA-

TPA-4

TPA+5

DGND6

4TPA+

RF-133AL-066

4TPA-

5TPA+

6GND

182 225 15 16

BASE UNIT

IDE_D1

IDE_D13

IDE_D2

IDE_D12

IDE_D3

10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940

IDE_D11

10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940

IDE_D4

IDE_D10

IDE_D5

LINE 2 IN

N.C

GND

IDE_R

GND

IDE_W

IDE_DREQ

IDE_D15

IDE_D0

IDE_D14

CN1801

DASP

IDE_A4(CS1)

IDE_A4(CS0)

IDE_A2

IDE_A0

N.C

GND

IDE_A1

IDE_HD16

IDE_INT

N.C

GND

IDE_DACK

IDE_IORDY

IDE_D9

IDE_D6

IDE_D8

IDE_D7

123456789

GND

IDE_RST

123456789

1 12V

CN-177 BOARD

40PCN1802

IDE_A0

IDE_A4(CS0)

N.C

DASP

IDE_A4(CS1)

GND

IDE_A2

GND 1

CN1103 40P

NC 7

DASP 2

IDE_A2 5

IDE_A0 6

IDE_A3(CS1) 3

IDE_A4(CS0) 4

IDE_A1

IDE_A1 8

IDE_HD16

IDE_HD16 9

IDE_INT

IDE_INT 10

N.C

IDE_IORDY

GND

IDE_R

GND

IDE_DACK

GND 11

IDE_DACK 12

NC 13

GND 15

IDE_IORDY 14

IDE_W

FRD-002

FLAT CABLE

GND 17

IDE_R 16

IDE_W 18

IDE_D0

IDE_D2

IDE_D14

GND

N.C

GND

IDE_DREQ

GND 19

IDE_DREQ 20

IDE_D1

IDE_D15

NC 21

GND 22

IDE_D0 24

IDE_D15 23

IDE_D3

IDE_D13

IDE_D12

IDE_14 25

IDE_D1 26

IDE_D2 28

IDE_D3 30

IDE_D13 27

IDE_D12 29

IDE_D11

10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940

IDE_D11 31

IDE_D4

IDE_D4 32

IDE_D10

IDE_D10 33

IDE_D5

IDE_D5 34

IDE_D9

IDE_D9 35

IDE_D6

IDE_D6 36

IDE_D8

IDE_D8 37

IDE_D7

IDE_D7 38

IDE_RST

GND

123456789

DP-090

HARNESS

GND 39

IDE_RST 40

20810 13 217

AV-071 BOARD

J801

J802

112V

2GND

3GND

UNSW6V

UNSW13V

101112

UNSW6V

UNSW13V

UNSW6V UNSW6V

AC_CONT

45V

PB/CB

PR/CR

CN301

1D IN 2VCC 3GND

J601

CN102

1FAN 12V 2SENS

FAN

3GND

J805

COMPONENT VIDEO

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

DIGITAL OUT PCM/DST/MPEG DOLBY DIGITAL

RD-045 BOARD

(NOT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM)

14PCN1701

1UNSW6V 2AGND 3AGND 4UNSW3.3V 5UNSW3.3V 6UNSW3.3V 7DGND 8DGND

9SW3.3V 10SW3.3V 11SW3.3V 12DGND 13DGND 14P_CONT

RP-118

HARNESS

CN4 1 UNSW6V 2 AGND 3 AGND 4 UNSW3.3V 5 UNSW3.3V 6 UNSW3.3V 7 DGND 8 DGND 9 SW3.3V

10 SW3.3V 11 SW3.3V 12 DGND 13 DGND 14 P_CONT

POWER BLOCK

CN1901 47P

R41

AGND

B31

AGND

RECC

RECY

AGND

FC43

3738394041424344454647

123456789

R41

FC43

AGND

47P

CN1201

10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940414243444546

B31

RECC

RECY

AGND

AI_BCK

FY33

AGND

XITFLMRST

CVBSS

AGND

G21

IT_XAWAKE

AI_SDT

FSW

FLAT CABLE FLAT CABLE

G21

FY33

FSW

AGND

CVBSS

AI_SDT

XITFLMRST

IT_XAWAKE

DGND

SHAWAKE5

DGND

IT_XRST

AI_LRCK

DGND

23242526272829303132333435

IT_SIN

256FS

AAD_XRST

512FS

AAD_XSCS

FRA-002 FRA-003

DGND

256FS

512FS

AI_BCK

IT_XRST

AI_LRCK

IT_SIN

AAD_XRST

AAD_XSCS

SHAWAKE5

DGND

SPDIFO

IT_SCLK

DGND

IT_SCLK

SPDIFI

DGND

SPDIFI

SPDIFO

SHSTATUS1

IT_REQ

IT_SOUT

SHSTATUS0

10111213141516171819202122

IT_REQ

IT_SOUT

SHSTATUS1

SHSTATUS0

EPG_PCONT

EPGGND

EPG_PCONT

EPGVIDEO 1234567

EPGVIDEO

CN1902 40P

CR/R

CB/B

AGND

TEMP

AGND

123456789

CB/B

CR/R

TEMP

AGND

40PCN1202

DIAG

AGND

XVMUTE

AGND

Y/G

10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940

Y/G

AGND

XVMUTE

RS_XEN

DGND

AGND

DGND

DIAG

AGND

DGND

RS_XEN

RESERVED

SH_TXD2

DGND

ADA_FS96

SH_RXD2

DGND

SH_TXD2

SH_RXD2

ADA_FS96

RESERVED

DGND

AO_SDT

XAMUTE

AO_BCK

10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940

DGND

AO_SDT

AO_BCK

XAMUTE

AO_LRCK

RESERVED

AV_XRST

ADA_XSCS

TTXT_ENABLE

ADA_XSCS

TTXT_ENABLE

ADA_SIN

ADA_SCK

TTXT_SCL

TTXT_SDA 123456789

TTXT_SDA

SW3.3V

DGND

FAN12V

N.C

CN3

123456789

N.C

DGND

FAN12V

SW3.3V

CN101 13P

UNSW-10V

B to B

UNSW18V

AGND

UNSW18V

4-1 4-2

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

Page 46

RDR-GX7

4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS (In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)

(For printed wiring boards)

• X : indicates a lead wire mounted on the component side.

• x : indicates a lead wire mounted on the printed side.

• a : Through hole.

• b : Pattern from the side which enables seeing.

(The other layers' patterns are not indicated.)

Caution: Pattern face side: Parts on the pattern face side seen from (Side B) the pattern face are indicated. Parts face side: Parts on the parts face side seen from (Side A) the parts face are indicated.

(For schematic diagrams)

• All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µµF.

50V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and tantalums.

• All resistors are in ohms, 1/4 W (Chip resistors : 1 /10 W) un-less otherwise specified. kΩ=1000Ω, MΩ=1000kΩ.

• Caution when replacing chip parts. New parts must be attached after removal of chip. Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, because it is damaged by the heat.

• All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B, unless otherwise noted.

• 2 : non flammable resistor

• 5 : fusible resistor

• C : panel designation

• f : internal component.

• C : adjustment for repair.

• U : B+ Line

• V : B– Line

• Circled numbers refer to waveforms.

• Voltages are dc between measurement point.

• Readings are taken with a color-bar signals on DVD reference disc.

• Readings are taken with a digital multimeter (DC 10MW).

• Voltage variations may be noted due to normal production tolerances.

Note :

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Note :

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

WAVEFORMS

AV-071

BOARD

1 IC407 6

54.3ns

2 IC605 eh

30.5µs

3 IC605 ek

50ns

4 IC701 qa (S-VIDEO IN)

670mVp-p

4.2Vp-p

3.4Vp-p

3.3Vp-p

9 IC802 wf (PLAY)

q; IC802 wl (PLAY)

qa IC802 ea (PLAY)

qs IC802 ed (PLAY)

2.0Vp-p

1.8Vp-p

2.5Vp-p

When indicating parts by reference number, please include the board name.

5 IC701 wa (S-VIDEO IN)

1.0Vp-p

6 IC701 ef (VIDEO IN)

1.0Vp-p

7 IC802 w; (PLAY)

1.4Vp-p

8 IC802 ws (PLAY)

qd IC1101 es

226ns (PAL) 279ns (NTSC)

5.4Vp-p

WAVEFORMS

AV-071

1.4Vp-p

4-44-3

Page 47

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-23 for printed wiring board.

RDR-GX7

1825 15 16

19144 1763

20810 13

B+

C459

IC407

30V

JL415

JL414

JL436

VHF/UHF TUNER

JL416

JL432

R454

C462

C460

R452

R453

C461

VIDEO SIGNAL

JL435

C464

CAPL_M

R456

RESET5V

Y/CHROMA

JL419

C466

TU_AFT

AHVSUP

SC1_OUT_L

SC1_OUT_R

DACM_L

DACM_R

D410

VIDEO

181318103141512 16217546 9

JL420

JL421

22k

R459

R460

R457

R458

TU_SCL

TU_SDA

VREF1

VREF2

C465

RESET5V

SIGNAL

JL418

JL417

JL433

R455

C463

JL446

36NC37NC38NC39

AHVSS

AGNDC

R471

YCHROMA

GND/SCL

SDA

GND

AGC OUT

9V/5V

AFT

MUTE

ST/BIL/SIF

MODE

F MONO

SAP

21 22 23 24 25 26 27

JL425

JL423

JL424

JL422

R465

R467

R468

4700

R461

R463

22k

R462

R464

R466

TU_FMONO

TU_AMUTE

TU_M/SAP

TU_S/B_D

TU_SAP_D

C467

C468

JL447

JL448

NOT USE

AUDIO

JL426

R482 4700

100

R470

R469

AV-071 BOARD(1/9)

VHF/UHF TUNER

-REF.NO.;10000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

Q407

Q418

Q404

Q406

IC401

AGC

OUT

GND

CONT

JL403

JL438

5678

R413

47k

C408

RELAY

TU_SCL TU_SDA

TU_S/B_D

TU_SAP_D TU_FMONO TU_AMUTE

(8/9)

(5/9)

(3/9)

NOT USE

(2/9)

TU_M/SAP

TU_AUTOP TU_G_MAX

TU_PCONT

TU_VDET

JUST_CLK

EPGVIDEO

TU_VIDEO BS_VIDEO

TU_AFT

TU_R TU_L

BS_R BS_L

TUDV TU_L TU_R

XXCN401

TU_SCL

TU_SDA

TU_S/B_D

TU_SAP_D TU_FMONO TU_AMUTE

TU_AFT TU_M/SAP TU_AUTOP

TU_G_MAX

C401

10u 50V

C402

10u 50V

R480

R412

R411

TO BS-005 BOARD CN1501

THROUGH THE AV-BS FLAT CABLE

(SEE PAGE 4-47)

TO BS-005 BOARD CN1502

THROUGH THE AV-BS HARNESS

(SEE PAGE 4-47)

XXCN402

AGC

JL401

TU_G_MAX

TU_AUTOP

100k 100k

13TU BST C 12NC 11SCL 10SDA

9C/N_OUT 8BIT_SW 7DEC_SW 6C_DET 5V_DET 4CNV_C 3DETIN_DET 2AGND 1AGND

1UNSW18V 2SW5V 3BS_VIDEO 4TU5V 5BS_L 6UNSW12V 7SW12V 8BS_R 9AGND

10AGND

RELAY

TU_SCL TU_SDA

8PIN

VYL3

TUDVD

XRGBSEL

CDINSEL

DVDEXT

BS_D_DET

B+

JL405

B+

JL406

B+

JL407

D405XXD406

D404

Q402

R405

100

R408

R404

100k

R406

R407

C403

2SD601A-QRS-TX

R410

27k

UN2213-TX

JL402

C407

1234

F IL

C405

LPF

JL437

INPUT

VCC

C406

B+

R416

L401

10uH

B+

C413

47u 16V

C410

C411

R417

R414

D407

L402 10uH

C415

2.2u 2012

C414

0.1u B

JL404

JL431

Q409

2SD601A-QRS-TX

BUFFER

R418

1500

Q408

2SD601A-QRS-TX

L403

JL427

JL428

L411

47uH

C436

4.7u 50V

1SS355TE-17 0

R420

JL430

Q410

2SB709A-QRS-TX

D408

C416

0.022u B

C418

0.001u

Q411

R486

2.2

D411

R422

RB501V-40TE-17

Q408,410,413,420 V DET

R423

R424 4700

R421 2700

Q412

UN2211-TX

CLAMP

C422

2200p

R427

1500

R488

AMP

Q414

2SB709A-QRS-TX

IC406

TK11850L-1TL

VIN

EXT

C419

4700p

R419 3900

R425

R426

100

R440

L412

100uH

C444

4.7u 50V

R431XXR435

GND

VFB

2SB709A-QRS-TX

R436

Q413

R428

R437

C426

R483

330k

±0.5%

IC403

R429 1500

R432

100

0 Q420

2SD601A-QRS-TX

R430

820

C431

C430

47u

0.1u 16V

IC406

+30V REG

C469

68p

R484 5600

0.5% C440

0.1u

L409 47uH

OUT

VCC2CTL3OUT4NC5GND

12.2

R433

C433

R415

R434

L404 10uH

R485

100

2012

B+

R441

D412

C447

C448

0.1u

47u

35V

JL429

B+

L405

L406

B+

47uH

L407 47uH

C437

0.1u B

C438

C441

C446

C439

C443

47u

1000u

0.1u

6.3V

16V

B+

VHF/UHT

INPUT

OUTPUT (TO TV)

B+

R444

R472

R473

R487

C452

C454

C449

X401

C450

C451

R443

B+

C427

8PIN

RELAY

(8/9)

(9/9)

VYL3

TUDVD

CDINSEL

DVDEXT

XRGBSEL

BS_D_DET

SW12V UNSW12V UNSW18V

UNSW6V

GND

(ANALOG)

SW5V

8PIN

RELAY

VYL3

TUDVD

CDINSEL

DVDEXT

XRGBSEL

BS_D_DET

B+ B+ B+

B+

IC402

PQ070XZ01ZP

VCC2CTL3OUT4NC5GND

5.9

R401

C404

0.22u B

C409

0.1u

IC402

+5V REG

5.3

PS401

R402

OUT

C412

47u 16V

100k

±0.5%

R403 5600

±0.5%

1.3

JL439

±0.5%

B+

R409

33k

0.7A

B+ B+

C428

Q415

UN2211-TX

JL440

SWITCH

5.3 R439

C432 100u

10V

C429

0.1u B

R438 10k

2SB1561T100Q

Q416

SWITCH

5.3

JL441

05.3

JL444

5 SW5V

JL443

L408

C442

C445

4 SIF IN 3 AGND

JL442

2 SIF OUT 1 AGND

TU401

AGC

ADRS

SCLIFSDA

711

B+

JL408

JL409

R447

L410

R448

C456

C455

R481

Q417

Q419

R442

AVSS

AVSUP

ANA_IN+

ANA_IN-

TESTN

XTAL_IN

XTAL_OUT

D_CTR_I/O_1

D_CTR_I/O_00

ADR_SEL

STANDBYQ

SCL

R445

TU_SDA

TU_SCL

JL413

JL410

JL411

JL412

470

R450

R451

R449

TU_SDA

TU_SCL

AGC

JL434

C457

C458

JL445

VREFTOP

MONO_IN

SC1_IN_L

SC1_IN_R

SDA13TP14TP15TP16TP17TP_CO18DVSUP19DVSS20TP21RESETQ

R446

SIGNAL PATH

REC

XXCN403

4-5 4-6

VHF/UHF TUNER

AV-071 (1/9)

Page 48

RDR-GX7

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-23 for printed wiring board.

• Refer to page 4-4 for waveforms.

25 15 16

AV-071 BOARD(2/9)

VIDEO IN PROCESS

-REF.NO.:1000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

(10/9)

(1/9)

GND

(DIGITAL)

B+

SW5V

B+ B+

UNSW5V

C703

BS_VIDEO

TU_VIDEO

L2_YCYIN

L3_YCYIN L3_CVBSIN L2_CVBSIN

C707

0.1u

C701

0.1u

C702

0.1u

C704

0.1u

C705

0.1u

(4/9)

IC701

VIDEO INPUT

SELECT

C706

L1_CVBSIN

L1_YCCIN

L2_YCCIN

L3_YCCIN

L1_YCYIN

(5/9)

(8/9)

INSEL_1 INSEL_2

INSEL_TU

0.1u

C708

0.1u C709

0.1u C710

0.1u C711

0.1u

R755

3216

SYNCPOW

TU_PCONT

R715

4700

C768

R707

R741

R765

JL715

2.002.002.2

COMPOSITE IN3

IC701

STANDBY ON/OFF

LA73030-TLM-E

2.0

4.9

COMPOSITE IN226DBAMP ON/OFF-13COMPOSITE IN14VCC15CHROMAIN-16INPUT SELECT-17CHROMA IN28INPUT SELECT-29CHROMA IN310INPUT SELECT-311CHROMA IN412VCC213CHROMA IN514YC DISABLE15Y IN-1166DBAMP ON/OFF-217Y IN-218OUT SELECT

JL708

R701

R702

C714

R712

JL716

COMPOSITE IN4

2.0

4.9

JL709

CLP-I UP

C716 47u 16V

JL717

JL718

GND1

COMPOSITE IN5

COMPOSITE OUT

2.002.902.9

JL710

C715

0.1u B

C717

0.1u B

JL719

0.4

2.6

2.1

C SYNC OUT

JL711

2.3

GND4

CHROMA OUT

5.2

2.9

JL712

C720

C724

0.1u

47u

16V

R750

REG

C725

JL721

Y OUT

JL722

0.4

2.2 Y IN422Y IN5

GND3

2.0

4.9

R736

C728

R725

0.1u

C726

0.1u B

JL720

GND2

4.9

2.9

JL713

C729

JL723

2.1

COMPOSITE ON/OFF

2.0

5.2

JL714

1SS355TE-17

C727

2.1

Y IN3

C766

0.1u B

D705

D706

R716 4700

D709

R766

R719

R720

330

R745

680

B+

R754

810 13

Q708

2SB1561T100Q

SWITCH

4.3

R723

0.1

UN2212-TX

SWITCH

5.05.0

Q706

R717

10k

R718 4700

3.8

C735

47u 16V

R721

L703 10uH

L701

L702

10uH

JL703

JL704

JL701

B+

C745

0.1u B

Q712

2SA1162-YG-TE85L

BUFFER

R729 1200

R731

470

2.5

1.8

R732 3900

B+

R722

0.9

0.2

R746

220

0.9

Q707

Q705

0.2

BUFFER

2SB709A-QRS-TX

JL724

JL725

C738

0.1u B

Q716

2SD601A-QRS-TX

B+

Q709,711,716

B+

R742

0.1

HSYNC DET

C739

JL702

R743

33k

0.7

R744

10k

2SC2412K-T-146-QR

R724 1500

2SA1037AK-T146-QR

2.2u B

4.8 1SS355TE-17

Q709

R726

0.9 Q710

2SA1162-YG-TE85L

Q711

D707

0.2 C740

0.022u B

C741

0.001u B

C743 4700p

R727

R728 4700

1.5

C746

47u

16V

5.0 C748

2200p

4.4

R733

1.8

R734

4700

R730

3900

2700

C753

47u 16V

R735 1500

C751

50V

C757

C754

R739

0.01u XX

XXIC707

1NC2

R737

C756

R738

144 1763

C763

2.2u 50V

C764

0.1u B

C759

C761

X701

R740

VCC

AFC CTL

VIDEO IN3F.B.CLAMP4SYNC OUT5VD OUT6GND7EXC

C760

VCO OUT

VCO IN

HD OUT

DET OUT

C762

4.4

R747

220

R748

Q713

2SA1162-YG-TE85L

C765

5600p

R749

510

R752

R753

Q713,715 VSYNC DET

5.0

0.4

R751 1300

JL705

JL706

JL707

0.1

R756

510

Q715

2SC2712-YG-TE85L

RECY/CVBSS RECC

(3/9)

RECY/CVBSS L3RC

SEPV

NOT USE

CSYNC VSYNC UVICV

R764

5.0

VSYNC

HDET

YCSEPON

(7/9)

(8/9)

VIDEO IN PROCESS

AV-071 (2/9)

R708

R703

C712

L1VID

16V

R709

D701

R704

D702

Q703

Q701

R713

C723

C718

C719

IC702

456

123

R710

R705

R711

NOT USE

L3VID

L1VI L3VI L1BC

L3RC

C713

16V

D703

D704

R706

Q704

Q702

R714

C721

C722

IC703

456

123

C767

R767

C734

IC704

C732

C733

C730

C731

456

123

IC705

456

123

C736

C737

SIGNAL PATH

SYNCPOW

TU_PCONT

SYNCPOW

TU_PCONT

L1SEL

VIDEO SIGNAL

CHROMA Y/CHROMA

REC

4-84-7

Page 49

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-23 for printed wiring board.

AV-071 BOARD(3/9)

RD I/F

-REF.NO.;10000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT

(9/9)

NOT USE

RECY/CVBSS

(5/9)

RECY/CVBSS

(6/9)

(5/9)

AWAKE_DONE

(8/9)

(1/9)

XVMUTE

AADDATA

AADBCK AADLRCK CEVASDO CEVASCK

PL2256L1

XAADRST

XAADCS

XAVRST XFLMRST

XAWAKE5

XITRST5

CEVISDO5

STATUS1 STATUS0

ITREQ5

CEVISDI5

CEVISCK5

TU_PCONT

EPGVIDEO

ONDO

SEPC SEPY

L3B

L3G

FSW

RECC

L3RC

(4/9)

(6/9)

(9/9)

XVMUTE

CR/R CB/B

Y/G

Y C

CN1203

RS_XEN

SH_RXD2

SH_TXD2

OPSFS96

GTUDBCK

XAMUTE

GTUDDATA

GTUDLRCK

XADACS

XAVRST

SPDIFO

PL1512L1

SW3.3V

GND

(DIGITAL)

GND

(ANALOG)

R1207

100

DIAG

R1213

100

R1208

100

R1209

100

4 5

DGND

HZM6.8ZWA1TL

B+

D1202

HZM6.8ZWA1TL

RDR-GX7

R1223

R1225

R1224 R1221

R1220

R1226

R1228

R1227

810 137

R1222

XX XX

JL1246

JL1214

JL1247

JL1248

JL1215

JL1216

JL1217

JL1218

JL1219

JL1220 JL1221

JL1222

JL1223 JL1224 JL1225

JL1226

JL1227

JL1228

JL1201 JL1229

JL1230

JL1231

JL1232

JL1233

JL1234

JL1235

JL1203

JL1205

JL1207 JL1236 JL1213

JL1245 JL1212

JL1237 JL1238 JL1239

JL1240 JL1208 JL1241 JL1209 JL1242 JL1243 JL1244 JL1210 JL1211

47P

CN1201

AGND

1 2

R41 AGND

FC43

AGND

5 6

RECC

AGND B31

8 9

AGND

RECY

AGND

FY33

AGND

G21

AGND

JL1249

10kR1217

JL1250

JL1202

JL1204

JL1206

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

CVBSS AGND FSW XITFLMRST AI_SDT IT_XAWAKE AI_BCK IT_XRST AI_LRCK DGND 256FS DGND DGND 512FS DGND IT_SIN AAD_XRST SHAWAKE5 AAD_XSCS SHSTATUS1 SHSTATUS0 IT_REQ IT_SOUT IT_SCLK DGND DGND SPDIFO DGND SPDIFI EPG_PCONT EPGGND EPGVIDEO

40PCN1202 TEMP CR/R AGND CB/B AGND Y/G AGND Y AGND XVMUTE AGND C AGND V AGND DGND DIAG DGND RS_XEN DGND SH_RXD2 ADA_FS96 SH_TXD2 DGND RESERVED RESERVED DGND AO_BCK XAMUTE AO_SDT DGND AO_LRCK RESERVED AV_XRST TTXT_ENABLE ADA_XSCS ADA_SIN ADA_SCK TTXT_SCL TTXT_SDA

TO RD-045 BOARD CN1901

THROUGH THE FRA-002 FLAT CABLE

(NOT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM)

SIGNAL PATH

CHROMA

REC

TO RD-045 BOARD CN1902

THROUGH THE FRA-003 FLAT CABLE

(NOT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM)

VIDEO SIGNAL

Y/CHROMA

AUDIO

SIGNAL

463

R1206

SPDIFO PL1512L1

B+

R1203

R1218XXR1215

R1210

R1214

R1211

R1212

C1203

PL1512L1

SPDIFO

10k

R1219

R1204

R1216

C1202

C1201

C1204

D1201

JL305

4-9

4-10

RD I/F

AV-071 (3/9)

Page 50

RDR-GX7

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-23 for printed wiring board.

1 AV-071 BOARD(4/9)

A/V IN/OUT TARMINAL

-REF.NO.;10000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

TO FL-130 BOARD CN1705

THROUGH THE AL-066 HARNESS

(

(SEE PAGE 4-29)

)

(8/9)

(3/9)

NOT USE

(9/9)

CN801

S2 SW 1

Y2 IN 2

AN GND 3

C2 IN 4

AN GND 5

V2 IN 6

AN GND 7

L2 IN 8

AU GND 9

R2 IN 10

AU GND 11

GND

XNENTMUTE

S2SW WIDE DSEL

11P

UNSW-10V

XVMUTE

UNSW6V

(DIGITAL)

(ANALOG)

SW12V

SW3.3V

V C Y

Y/G CB/B CR/R

ERV ERC

ERY ERYG ERCB ERCR

ER+5V

ER-5V

ER+6V ER12V

SW5V

V C Y

Y/G

CB/B

CR/R

JL839 JL840

L2_YCYIN

JL841

L2_YCCIN

JL842

L2_CVBSIN

FA_INL

FA_INR

FL804

C805

0.01u B

FL801

B+

FL802

B+

B- B-

B+

J805

COMPONENT VIDEO

20810

J801

OUTPUT2

AUDIORAUDIO

VIDEO

S VIDEO

J802

INPUT3

AUDIO

VIDEO VIDEO

S VIDEO

217

OUTPUT1

VIDEO

S VIDEO

INPUT2

AUDIO

S VIDEO

SIGNAL PATH

VIDEO SIGNAL

CHROMA

Y/CHROMA

REC

AUDIO

SIGNAL

Cb_OUT

Cr_OUT

AUOUTR1 AUOUTR2

(6/10)

B-

NC NC

4.9

+5V

-0.1

GND

-0.1

C_OUT

-0.1

Y_OUT

29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

-5.0

-5V

-5.0

-5V NC

4.9

-0.7

Y_OUT

GND

-1.3

2120

-1.3

-5.0

-5V

19 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

B-

C818

C819

0.47u 470u

6.3V

2012

10 11

AUOUTL1 AUOUTL2

R841

R840

10k

R857

R849

C820

0.1u B

C821

0.1u B

R858

R850

R842

R843

D802

HZM6.8ZWA1TL

D808

HZM6.8ZWA1TL

R870

R871

D809

R844

R845

FA_INL

FA_INR

AU1INR

(5/10)

AU3INR AU1INL

AU3INL

L1_CVBSIN

L3_CVBSIN

L1_YCCIN

L3_YCCIN

(2/10)

L3_YCYIN

L1_YCYIN

L2_YCYIN L2_YCCIN

L2_CVBSIN

FA_INL FA_INR

D803

HZM6.8ZWA1TL

C822

C824

C825

C823

D801

HZM6.8ZWA1TL

R855

R881

R882

FB801

0uH

D810

HZM6.8ZWA1TL

R865

R868

R889

D813

HZM6.8ZWA1TL

R890

L2_YCYIN L2_YCCIN

L2_CVBSIN

R846

R847

R848

R852

R859

D804

R853

R860

D805

R854

R861

D806

R862

R863

HZM6.8ZWA1TL

R869

HZM6.8ZWA1TL

R866

R867

HZM6.8ZWA1TL

R872

R873

D807

D811

D812

R874

R875

R876

182 225 15 16

R877

JL819

JL820 JL821

JL822 JL823

JL802 JL825

JL803

JL804

JL826

R878

R879

JL814

JL815 JL824

JL816 JL817

JL818 JL827

FB802

JL805 JL806

JL807

JL828

0uH

JL829

JL830

JL808

JL809

JL810

JL831

JL811 JL812

JL813

D814

R833

L803 47uH

B+ B+ B+

B-

Q809

2SD601A-QRS-TX

BUFFER

R821

5.0

0.9

0.3

R815

2200

R809

Q803

R802

2200

Q810

2SD601A-QRS-TX

BUFFER

5.0

0.6

R810

Q804

R803 2200

Q811

2SD601A-QRS-TX

BUFFER

5.0

0.3

R811

Q805

R804 2200

Q812

2SD601A-QRS-TX

BUFFER

5.0

R812

Q806

R805

2200

Q813

2SD601A-QRS-TX

BUFFER

5.0

R813

Q807

R806 2200

Q814

2SD601A-QRS-TX

BUFFER

5.0

R814

Q808

R807 2200

FL803

C803

0.01u B

C801

0.01u B

Q801,802 SWITCH

C802

0.01u B

2SD1766-T100-QR

R801 10k

R808 2200 3216

Q802

-11.4 R827

3.03.2

Q801

UN2111-TX

-12.2-12.2

2200 3216

L79M05TLL-SONY-TL

C804

0.01u B

R816 2200

R817 2200

R818 2200

R819 2200

R820 2200

R822

1.2

R823

0.9

R824

0.7

R825

0.7

R826

0.7

IC801

GND1IN2OUT

-5.1

-12.2

C807

C809

47u

16V

C808

C810

47u 16V

B-

B+

B-

B+

L801

100uH

C811

0.1u B

C812

0.1u

L802 100uH

IC801

-5V REG

JL832

C806

47u 16V

Q816

UN2111-TX

SWITCH

4.9

Q815

UN2213-TX

SWITCH

Y/G

CB/B

CR/R

B+

B-B-

R898

R835

C814

47u 16V

R836

4.9 C815

47u 16V

R834 3300

C816

0.47u F

R837

R838

R839

Q817

5.0

JL833

JL834

JL801

R897

JL835

JL836 JL837 JL838

4.9

IC802

VIDEO OUT PROCESS

IC802

LA73053-TLM-E

12345678

NC NC

0.3 VIDEO_IN

0.7 VIDEO_OUT

DCCNT1 GND

0.6

C_IN

3.3

MUTE1

0.3

Y_IN

1.3

91011

NC(DCCNT2) NC(GND) NC

+5V(NC)

Y_IN(NC)

1.3

DCCNT2

GND

1415

0 Cb_IN

3.3

MUTE2

161718

0 Cr_IN

-5.0

-5V

C817

47u 16V

Q818

19144 1763

PR/Cr PB/CB Y

CN802

GND

N.C.

LINE1

LINE2 N.C.

LINE3

SW_GND

N.C.

B+B+

A/V IN/OUT TERMINAL

AV-071 (4/9)

4-11 4-12

Page 51

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-23 for printed wiring board.

AV-071 BOARD(5/9)

AUDIO IN

-REF.NO.;10000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT

(4/9)

AU1INR

FA_INR

AU3INR

AU3INL

FA_INL

AU1INL

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

R210

R206

JL203

R202

JL204

R201

JL202

R205

JL201

R209

R204

RDR-GX7

463

8107

12925

SIGNAL PATH

AUDIO

SIGNAL

REC

B+

2.5

C221

47u 16V

R222

47k

±0.5%

JL232

C242

C226

R224

47k

±0.5%

JL231

2.5

47u 16V

C235

47u 16V

R227

47k

±0.5%

JL229

JL230

2.5

JL228

5.0

C246

C245

C204

R208

D201

R212

D202

C217

R219

JL233

2.5

C220

47u 16V

R220

47k

±0.5%

2.5

M/S

RIN1

TEST5

2.5

C228

0.1u

C236

10u 50V

CTRL

R248

10k

R250

10k

R253

10k

R277

100

R254

R255

100

R256

R239

R245

R246

INSEL_TU

INSEL_2

INSEL_1

XAADCS XAVRST

XAADRST

PL2256L1

CEVASCK

CEVASDO

AADLRCK

AADBCK

AADDATA

10 10

16 16

(2/9)

(8/9)

(3/9)

(6/9)

CNS/CAD1

CCLK/SCL

CDTI/SDA

SEL2

SEL1

SEL0

SMUTE

ALC

PDN

MLCK

LRCK

1.6

1.2

3.2

JL227

3.3 JL226

3.3 JL225

3.3 JL224

3.6 JL223

JL222

JL221

3.2 JL220

1.6 JL219

1.6

R278

22k

R279

22k

R280

22k

R257

R258

IC201

5.0

TEST6

C227

2.2u 50V

RIN2

C224

0.1u

B+

TEST7

AUDIO IN PROCESS

2.5

C222

0.1u B

R221

22k

±0.5%

RIN3

IC201

AK5365VQ

C223

10u 50V

2.5

JL215

TEST8

RIN4

2.5

TU_R

(1/9)

NOT USE

TU_L

BS_R

BS_L

EUAUINR3

EUAUINL3

EUAUINR1

EUAUINL1

R260

R262

R259

R261

R275

R276

C243

C211

C210

47u 16V

C207

C244

C241

R213

R214

C208

47k

47u

±0.5%

16V

R215

47k

±0.5%

C209

47u

16V

R216

47k

±0.5%

R217

47k

±0.5%

R218

22k

±0.5%

JL208

JL209

JL210

JL211

LIN5

2.5

WTM1

LIN4

2.5

WTMO

LIN3

2.5

ZELMN

LIN2

2.5

LIN1

2.5 LOPIN

2.5 LOUT

2.5

C203

C205

R207

D204

C201

D203

C212

4.7u 50V

RIN5

IPGAL13IPGAR14ROUT15ROPIN16AVDD17AVSS18VCOM19DVSS20DVDD21SDTO22BICK

JL214

C218

4.7u 50V

(6/9)

(9/9)

GND GND

SWA5V

SW3.3V

(ANALOG)

(DIGITAL)

B+ B+

R231

B+

4-13 4-14

AUDIO IN

AV-071 (5/9)

Page 52

RDR-GX7

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-23 for printed wiring board.

25 15 16

810 137

129

144 1763

AV-071 BOARD(6/9)

AUDIO OUT

-REF.NO.;10000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

(3/9)

(5/9)

(9/9)

GND

(8/9)

OPSFS96

SPDIFO

XAMUTE

PL1512L1

GTUDBCK GTUDDATA GTUDLRCK

XAVRST

XADACS CEVASCK CEVASDO

AADBCK AADDATA AADLRCK

SW3.3V

UNSW12V

SW-10V

UNSW6V

(ANALOG)

(DIGITAL)

XP_MUTE

R322 8200

±0.5%

R323 8200

±0.5%

IC303

AUDIO AMP

R324 8200

±0.5%

R325 8200

±0.5%

R326

10k

±0.5%

R327

10k

±0.5%

IC301

2ch DAC

C307

R310

R311

100

R314

R312

R313

100

R315

R316

R317

R304

R305

R306

JL308

1.6

JL309

1.6 JL310 JL311 JL312 JL313 JL314 JL315

C306

C308

0.001u

1.6

3.2

3.3

IC301

CXD9627A-E2

1234567

MCLK BICK SDTI LRCK PDN CSN CCLK

CDTI

AOUTL+

AOUTL-

AOUTR+

AOUTR-

DZFL DZFR

VDD

VSS

2.5

C313

0.01u B

0 0

5.0

9 10111213141516

JL316 JL317

B+

JL318 JL319 JL320 JL321

C314

0.22u B

C316

R329

C319

1500

C367

15p

-10.3

BA44558F-E2IC303

5678

1.4

C369 150p

C370 150p

C320

C323 560p

C324

R331

560p

1500

R333

10k

±0.5%

C325

R335

1800

JL324

C368 150p

1.4

1234

1.4

12.2

R336 1800

JL325

C327

1500

R328

R332

10k

±0.5%

R330 1500

B+

-10.3

-11.0

SWITCH

Q301

R307

R308 100k

R368

Q303

2SB1561T100Q

SWITCH

10k

R309

5600

12.212.2

11.5

-10.9 Q302

2SD601A-QRS-TX

SWITCH

-11.0

D302

EC10DA40-TE12

JL322

JL323

B+B+

B-

C304

C343

47u 16V

C305

C344

47u 16V

R320

R382

470

NJM78M05DL1A-TE1

C310

47u 63V

D351

DAN202K-T-146

2 1

R367

IC302

+5V REG

IC302

IN2GND3OUT

5.112.2 0.6

B+ B+

C311

C315

C312

47u

16V

JL333

JL334

C357 220u

16V

D303

DAP202K-T-146

R334 4700

D304

R337

R321

3216

C302 330u

6.3V

R301

220k

C303

-12.2

2SB1561T100Q

R302

470

-11.6 R303

10k

C301

47u

25V

C329

1200p

R340 1800

BA44558F-E2IC304

R341 1800

C330

1200p

C364 470p

C334

C331

50V

R338

10k

4.6

Q304

UN2213-TX

C332

R339

Q305

C335

R348

XX C363

470p

R349

C336

-10.3

5678

C333

R347

R342

Q308

2SB709A-QRS-TX

R343

10k

R344

47k

Q309

R345

R346

JL326

1234

12.2

JL327

7.57.5

6.8

R350

10k

DTC124TKA-T146

R351

Q307

Q306

C338

47u 50V

C342

B-

IC304

AUDIO AMP

B+

C339

C340

47u 50V

JL331

JL332

R352

470

R354

47k

R355

47k

R353

470

Q304,306,308 MUTE CONT.

C348

0.1u

C347

0.1u

Q311

MUTE

2SD1938(F)-T(TX).SO

JL328

Q310

2SD1938(F)-T(TX).SO

MUTE(3/9)

0.8 R356

4700

R357 4700

R358

0.8

JL329

R381

R359 100k

R360

B+

B-

SIGNAL PATH

AUDIO

REC

SIGNAL

C362

0.01u

B+

Q314

UN2113-TX

3.2 POWER SW

JL330

3.1

R362

R361 100k

0.8

470

0.001u

Q312

SWITCH

2SD1938(F)-T(TX).SO

Q313

0.001u

SWITCH

2SD1938(F)-T(TX).SO

C349

2200p

C350

C351

C352

R318

R363

470

R364

470

R365

470

R366

470

R319

FB301

0uH

FB302

0uH

C355

C353

100p

C354

C356

100p

FB303

0uH

FB304

0uH

AUOUTL1

AUOUTL2

(4/9)

AUOUTR1

AUOUTR2

EUAUOUTR

NOT USE

EUAUOUTL

B+

SWA5V

(5/9)

B+

R371

R372

22k

3.6

2.1

R373

10k

R370

C359

47u

16V

C317

C360

47u 16V

R369

C318

R375

100

Q315

1.4 2SC2712-YG-TE85L

R374

C326

JL304 JL303 JL302

JL306

R380

47p

JL301

C361

47u 16V

5.0

3.6

R377

C358

47u 16V

R378

2SC2712-YG-TE85L

2.9

Q317

5 4

B+

Q316

Q315-317 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

2SA1162-YG-TE85L

GND3

VCC2

D IN1

J301

CN301

DIGITAL OUT PCM/DTS/MPEG DOLBY DIGITAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

AUDIO OUT

AV-071 (6/9)

4-15 4-16

Page 53

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-23 for printed wiring board.

• Refer to page 4-4 for waveforms.

RDR-GX7

463

925

AV-071 BOARD(7/9)

UV IC

-REF.NO.;10000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT

(9/9)

GND

SW5V

(DIGITAL)

B+ B+

(2/9)

UVICV

JL1110

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

L1101

10uH

R1101

47k

2.1

C1106

10u 50V

C1101

22u 25V

C1105

0.01u B

L1102

10uH

R1102

47k

R1105

220

C1107

22u 25V

Q1101

XN4501-TW

1.4

C1108

0.01u

L1103

10uH

C1109

R1106

5.0

2.5

50V

220k

Q1101-1105 DATA/SYNC SEPA

Q1102

XN4501-TW

R1108

22k

3.0

C1110

22u

25V

R1109

33k

2.5 5

C1112

10u 50V

C1111

0.01u

5.0

1.8 1.5

R1110

470

R1112

390

R1111

2.8

R1113

470

C1114

0.1u

2.1

2SD601A-QRS-TX

R1114

10k

2.8

R1115

18k

C1113

10u

50V

R1116

22k

Q1103

5.0

2.2 R1118

330

R1117

Q1104

2SB709A-QRS-TX

2.2

C1116

C1117

27p

15p

L1104

47uH

R1119

JL1104

2.8

C1118

0.1u

Q1105

R1127

3.3

C1121

0.1u

R1130

100k

R1124

47k

R1120

C1119

220p

JL1105

C1120

10u 50V

2.6

R1125

47k

2SB709A-QRS-TX

B+

5.0

1.4

1718192021222324

C1102

C1103

27p

C1104

27p

JL1111

R1103

10k

JL1101

R1104

470k

X1101

3.579545MHZ

5.2

5.0

2.5

2.6

JL1102

2526272829303132

PLLTD

TEST

PAR/SER

RESET

BUSY

VSS3

OSC1/EXT

OSC2

R1107

100

VDD1

XFC

VDD3

PLLTA

VSS1

VSS2

IC1101

UVIC

IC1101

MC68HC68VBIFB

AD2/SWIN

JL1103

AD3

AD1/SDTA

AD0/SCLK

12345678

AD4

AD5

VDATA

AD6

SYNC

AD7

VDD2

VSS3

SCK/E

SDO/RW

SDI/AS

VDD3

CSA

5.0

3.9

4.8

3.8

3.9

5.0

9 10111213141516

R1123

47k

R1122

4700

R1121

10k

R1126

R1128

R1129

JL1106

JL1107

JL1108

JL1109

UVICCS

UVICSCLK

UVICSIN

UVICSOUT

UVICBSY

RESET5V

(8/9)

4-17 4-18

UV IC

AV-071 (7/9)

Page 54

RDR-GX7

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-23 for printed wiring board.

• Refer to page 4-4 for waveforms.

AV-071 BOARD(8/9)

SYSTEM CONTROL

XX MARK:NO MOUNT NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

AC_CONT FAN_ONOFF FAN_SPEED

FAN_DET

GND

(DIGITAL)

(9/9)

UNSW6V

Q607_5V

UNSW5V

FL_PCONT

UVICSIN

UVICSOUT

UVICSCLK

(7/9)

UVICBSY

UVICCS

(7/9)

RESET5V

CEVISDO5

CEVISDI5

CEVISCK5

ITREQ5

XITRST5

XAWAKE5

(3/9)

AWAKE_DONE

XFLMRST

STATUS0 STATUS1

TUPCONT

ONDO

JL659 JL660

J601

MA8068-TX-146

BZ601

XXCN601

VPP

VDD

GND

RESET

SIN

SOUT

SCLK

29 10

NOT USE

20810 13

(10/10)

TO FR-195 BOARD CN101

THROUGH THE FAR-003 FLAT CABLE

(SEE PAGE 4-39)

(1/9)

(6/9)

(2/9)

(4/9)

(5/9)

R684

47k

D611

DAN202K-T-146

Q613

DETECT

XL3MUTE

R128

15K

±0.5%

JL604

R608

JL621

R609

JL630

B+ B+

B+

10k

4700

R611

R613

R612

UVICSOUT UVICSCLK

CEVISDO5 CEVISDI5 CEVISCK5

LED_LCK

R614 FLD_DAT FLD_CLK

SIRCS

FLD_RST FLD_CS

DIMMER

RESET5V UVICCS XITRST5 XFLMRST STATUS0

R610

10k

100k

R675

10k

IC603

B+

IC603

BD4745G-TR

VCC

VOUT

4.9

5.0

C609

C610

0.01u B

C603

C604

47u

0.1u

16V

D602

Q612

UN2113-TX

SWITCH

C639

2.2u

6.3V

EC10DA40-TE12

D603

EC10DA40-TE12

R685

2200

UN2213-TX

FL601

123

R695 4700

±0.5%

R604

470

±0.5%

AC_CONT

R605

470

FAN_ONOFF

±0.5%

FAN_SPEED

FAN_DET

B+

R602

UVICSIN

UVICSOUT

UVICSCLK

UVICBSY

UVICCS

RESET5V

CEVISDO5

CEVISDI5

CEVISCK5

ITREQ5

XITRST5

XAWAKE5

AWAKE_DONE

XFLMRST STATUS0 STATUS1

TUPCONT

ONDO

R651

D612

C640

R601

UVICSCLK

SUB

GND

R603

R653

IC602

S-24C04BFJ-TB

VSS

B+

5.2

VCC

5.2

SCL

5.2

SDA

C605

C606

0.01u XX

IC604

RESET

TU_PCONT

IT_SCL

UVICSIN

R633

R668XXR669

220k

R2603

10k

R2604

10k

C608 470u

6.3V C607

0.1u B

R625

JL632

3.8

R626

JL636

4.6

100

R627

JL637

5.2

100

R628

JL647

5.2

100

R629

JL654

470

R630

JL655

4.7

100

R631

JL658

4.9

100

5.2

R615 R694 R617 R618

R619 R620 R621 R622 R623

R616

R624

5.2

100 10k

4.7

100

5.2

100

0.3

0.6

100

1.1

100

5.2

100

4.5

100

JL661

100

JL601 JL602 JL603

5.2

2.6

100

JL605

5.2

JL662

3.9

100

JL606

5.2

JL607

3.3

JL608

B+

IC604

PST3241NL

4.9

VOUT

VDD

GND3NC

5.2

R634

JL663

JL610

3.8

99100

SIN

TTXT_SCL

12345678

SOUT SCLK IIC1 SDA

IIC SW FOR GR IIC1 SCL

IT SOUT IT SCLK

91011

EVDD EVSS LED LCK

BUZZER

1213141516

SIRCS FL PCONT FLD IN FLD DATA FLD CLK

1718

UNSWXRESET FLD CS

F MONO(32KOUT)

2021

VPP

AV LINK OUT

X3MUTE

2324252627282930

EEP WP DIMMER RESET5V UVIC CS IT XRST XFLMRST

STATUS0

C612

0.047u

R632 470k

TP601

TP602

T t

AWAKE

STATUS1

5.2

31 32

JL611

JL609

XAWAKE5

STATUS1

C611

0.01u B

WIDE

IT_SDA

UVICBSY

XPDCDAV

IT_ENABLE

10k R2601 *

100

R636

JL618

JL616

JL617

JL614

JL612

JL664

0.5

0.7

5.00000.4

WIDE

TTXT_SDA

AV LINC IN

UVIC BUSY

TTXT_ENABLE

REGC

RESET

XT1

XT2

AWAKE DONE

5.0

1.3

1.5

3.3

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46

JL613

AWAKE_DONE

1.4

JL619

JL615

X601

100

R635

32.768kHz

C614

22p

C613

C615

22p

X602

20MHz

Q601

IMUTE

VSYNC

ITREQ5

10k

R639

470

R640

R637

JL623

JL620

JL665

JL666

IT REQ

P_FAIL

SYNC V

XPDCDAV

IC605

SYSTEM CONTROL

IC605

UPD70F3033

VSS

VDD

5.2000000

1.3

JL622

JL624

C616

C618

0.1u

1000u

6.3V

R638XXR643

10k

ONDO

C617

R641

3.905.105.0

IMUTE

CLKOUT

JL625

XNENTMUTE

TU_G_MAX

JL667

ONDO

XNENTMUTE

JL626

VYL1

R644

C642

R6470R645

AGC

VYL1

TU_S/B_D

JL668

JL627

VYL3

Q602

8PIN

KEY5

KEY4

TU_AFT

470k

2200p

R2602

100

R654

R657

R652

R650

R659

JL669

JL670

5.2

5.20000

8586878889909192939495969798

KEY4

KEY5

TU AFT

TTT

STEREO/BILINGUAL

BS C/N DET/ EURO8_DET

SYNCHRO POWER

CDINSEL /BS VOL DET

DVDEXT

XRGBSEL /BS COR DET

TUDVD /BS DET SW

VYL3 /BS BLT SW

47 48 49 50

JL628

JL629

JL635

JL631

JL633

DVDEXT

CDINSEL

XRGBSEL

TUDVD

Q603

R656

R649

KEY3

10k

R661

100

5.2

81828384

KEY3

RELAY_CONT

FAN_ONOFF

FAN_SPEED

INSEL TU

TU V DET

TU PCONT

AUTO PRESET

JUST CLK

MAIN/SAP

XP MUTE

YC SEP ON

CMUTE/DSEL

/BS CONV CONT

RELAY

/BS BST CONT

5.2

R607

RELAY

8200

R663

FAN_DET

INSEL2 INSEL1

TA MUTE

SAP DET

L1 SEL

Q604

1825 15 16

KEY1

C619

2200p

C620

2200p

C621

10k

2200p

R665

R658 1800

KEY2

C622

2200p

C623

2200p

10k

R687

R688

B+

R673

100

5.2

KEY2 KEY1

AREA AVref AVSSIT SIN AVDD

IDET

73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

BVSS

59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72

BVDD

S2SW

H DET

51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58

R674

5.2

100

JL634

5.0

5.1

5.2

1.0 0 0 0

5.2 0 0 0 0 0 0

0.1 0 0

5.2

5.1 0

5.1

5.2 0 0

0.1

R676

100

JL638

JL639 JL640

R677

100

JL641 JL642 JL643 JL644

R678

JL671

100

R679

JL672

100

R680

JL673

100

JL645 JL646

R681

JL674

100

R682

JL675

100

JL648 JL649

R683

JL676

100

JL650 JL651 JL652 JL653

IC606

1234

OE1

4.7 B1

GND

C629

R693

R690

10k

R691

10k

C627 470u

6.3V R648

10k

C628

0.1u B

R655

10k

VCC

OE2

R692

B+

5.2

4.8

5.2

5678

MUON_DET

FAN_ONOFF FAN_SPEED

TU_PCONT TU_AMUTE TU_AUTOP

JUST_CLK TU_SAP_D TU_M/SAP

FAN_DET

AC_CONT

INSEL_TU

INSEL_2 INSEL_1

TU_VDET

IDET

XP_MUTE

YCSEPON

SYNCPOW

L1SEL S2SW

DSEL HDET

B+

IC607

B+

R689

3216

C624

C625

0.22 XX

5.5V

AVLINK

1234

5678

C641

R660

R664

R662

R666

B+

R667

R671

R686

R670

D604

C626

Q605

TU_M/SAP TU_AUTOP TU_G_MAX TU_S/B_D TU_AMUTE JUST_CLK TU_VDET TU_AFT TU_SAP_D

TU_PCONT

RELAY 8PIN DVDEXT VYL3 TUDVD XRGBSEL CDINSEL

XP_MUTE

INSEL_1 INSEL_2 INSEL_TU

L1SEL YCSEPON SYNCPOW HDET VSYNC

S2SW XNENTMUTE

WIDE DSEL

INSEL_TU

XPDCDAV VYL1 AVLINK IDET

WIDE DSEL IMUTE XL3MUTE IT_ENABLE IT_SDA

IT_SCL

KEY4 FLD_RST FLD_CS

SIRCS

KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY5

FLD_CLK

FLD_DAT LED_LCK DIMMER

B+

19144 1763

B-

VFL +F

-F

19PCN602

JL677

-F

JL678

JL679

VFL

JL680

KEY4

JL681

FLD RESET

JL682

FLD CS

14 13

GND

JL683

SIRCS

GND

JL684

KEY1

JL685

KEY2

JL686

KEY3

JL687

KEY5

7 6

GND

JL688

FLD CLK

JL689

JL690

FLD DATA

JL691

FLD LCK

JL692

DIMMER

TU_SCL TU_SDA

TU_FMONO TU_M/SAP TU_AUTOP TU_G_MAX TU_S/B_D TU_AMUTE JUST_CLK TU_VDET TU_AFT TU_SAP_D

TU_PCONT

RELAY 8PIN DVDEXT VYL3 TUDVD XRGBSEL CDINSEL

XP_MUTE

INSEL_1 INSEL_2 INSEL_TU

TU_PCONT L1SEL YCSEPON SYNCPOW HDET VSYNC

S2SW XNENTMUTE

WIDE DSEL

SCL SDA INSEL_TU

XPDCDAV VYL1 AVLINK IDET WIDE DSEL IMUTE XL3MUTE IT_ENABLE IT_SDA IT_SCL TU_SCL TU_SDA RESET5V

SYSTEM CONTROL

AV-071 (8/9)

4-19 4-20

Page 55

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-23 for printed wiring board.

25 15 16

RDR-GX7

810 137

14463

POWER

-REF.NO.;10000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

FAN

CN102

CN103

TO POWER BLOCK CN3

(SEE PAGE 4-42)

JL109

1FAN12V

JL110

2SENS 3GND

JL111

1FAN12V

JL112

2SENS 3GND

R134

CN101 13P

B+

R118

R136

D102

D103

JL101

R126

10k

R133

DGND DGND

FAN12V SW3.3V

UNSW-10V

AGND

AGND UNSW18V UNSW13V

UNSW6V UNSW6V

AC_CONT

C104

10u 50V

JL118

2 3

N.C

JL103

B+

JL102

B+

JL106

B-

JL119

7 8

JL108

B+

JL107

B+

10 11

JL105

B+

JL104

7.6

OUT

2.6

R123 ±0.5%

R124

12k

C102

±0.5%

0.1u B

R125 3900

±0.5%

FAN CONT SW

IC101

PQ20WZ5U

7.6

33k

Q103

UN2213-TX

R130

R129

PS102

0.7A

R137

B+

PS101

ET101

D101

AC_CONT

BS_D_DET

IC102

+5V REG

5.1

IC102

PQ050DZ01ZPH

R108

ET102

C120

R114

C106

IC106

IC101

FAN DRIVE

IN2CTL3OUT4ADJ5GND

R135

5.2

B+

16.6

FAN_ONOFF

C101

0.1u B

FAN_SPEED

FAD_DET

JL120

B+ B+

R131

R115

C107

OUT

IN1CTL2OUT3N.C4GND

6.0

B+

3.3

5.1

B+ B+

C108

C110

47u

16V

C121

+5V REG

PQ1L503M2SPQ

6.0 1.3

IC103

IN2CTL3OUT4N.C5GND

R109

C109

47u 16V

IC106

5.16.0

VIN

VOUT

NR1GND2VC

C103

0.1u B

OUT

C111

47u 16V

JL113

ET103

JL114

JL122

R110

R119

C112

R120

C113

R116

JL121

C123

R117

B+

C118

R113

10k

-12.4 -12.3

IC104

IN2CTL3OUT4ADJ5GND

C114

IC105

PQ20WZ5U

IN2CTL3OUT4ADJ5GND

16.2

R111

C115

47u 25V

ET104

3.1

R112 3300

Q108

2SD1766-T100-QR

C116

16.2

12.2

C117

47u 16V

JL123

-11.6

Q107

UN2111-TX

3.2

R132 3300

R121

JL115

OUT

JL116

R101

R102

R103

12.2

OUT

2.7

R104 4700

R105 3300

R106 2200

L101

R122

IC105

+12V REG

JL117

B+

SW3.3V

B-

UNSW-10V

B+

UNSW18V

B+

UNSW18V

B+

UNSW6V

B-

SW_10V

B+

SW5V

R107

B+

SW12V

R127

B+

UNSW12V

B+

UNSW5V

UNSW12V UNSW6V SW12V SW5V

BS_DET

UNSW5V SW5V

SW3.3V

UNSW6V UNSW-10V SW12V SW5V SW3.3V

SW3.3V

UNSW12V UNSW6V SW3.3V SW-10V

SW5V

UNSW6V UNSW5V Q607_5V AC_CONT FAN_ONOFF FAN_SPEED FAN_DET FL_PCONT

SW5V SW3.3V

UNSW18V

B+

UNSW12V

B+

UNSW6V

B+

SW12V

B+

SW5V BS_DET

(ANALOG)

GND

B+

UNSW5V

B+

SW5V

(DIGITAL)

GND

B+

SW3.3V

(DIGITAL)

GND

(ANALOG)

GND

B+

UNSW6V

B-

UNSW-10V

B+

SW12V

B+

SW5V

B+

SW3.3V

(DIGITAL)

GND

(ANALOG)

GND

B+

SW3.3V

(DIGITAL)

GND

(ANALOG)

GND

B+

UNSW12V

B+

UNSW6V

B+

SW3.3V

B-

SW-10V

(DIGITAL)

GND

(ANALOG)

GND

B+

SW5V

(DIGITAL)

GND

B+

UNSW6V

B+

UNSW5V

B+

Q607_5V AC_CONT FAN_ONOFF FAN_SPEED FAN_DET FL_PCONT

(DIGITAL)

GND

B+

SW5V

B+

SW3.3V

(DIGITAL)

GND

NOT USE

(1/9)

(2/9)

(3/9)

(4/9)

(5/9)

(6/9)

(7/9)

(8/9)

AV-071 BOARD(9/9)

R606

L601

R699

2700

Q606

Q606,607 FL POWER SW

FL_PCONT

Q607_5V

UN2211-TX

C630

B+

R672

Q607

UN2111-TX

R696

5.1

R642

R646

3300

5.2

10k

-11.4

-12.1 Q608

2SD1781K-T146-QR

SWITCH

3300

5.0

47uH

Q609

-12.1

C631 220u

16V

2SC5053T100Q

OSC

-12.4

-12.1

-12.3

Q610

2SC5053T100Q

OSC

C632

0.018u C633

0.018u B

C643

0.012u B

C644

0.01u B

-0.1

T601

SB-Q3532

R697 2200

D607

1SS355TE-17

D608

1SS355TE-17

D605

1SS355TE-17

D606

1SS355TE-17

JL656

JL657

B-

C635

C634

22u

0.1u 50V

Q611

2SA1037AK-T146-QR

VFL REG

R698

-22.8

D609

UDZS-TE17-22B

-22.2-26.6

C637

C636

0.1u B

D610

R700

27k

MA8062-L-TX

C638

0.1u B

B-

VFL

-F +F

(8/9)

POWER

4-21 4-22

AV-071 (9/9)

Page 56

RDR-GX7

AV-071 (TUNER, VIDEO IN PROCESS, RD I/F, AV IN/OUT, UV IC, SYSTEM CONTROL, PDC, POWER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

AV-071 BOARD (SIDE A)

BZ601 H-12 CN101 E-1

CN102 D-1 CN301 A-9 CN602 H-8 CN801 C-7 CN1201 D-10 CN1202 E-7 CN1203 A-1

D303 C-1 D408 E-11 D602 I-10 D603 I-10 D611 I-10 D707 C-6

IC106 F-3 IC201 C-8 IC301 D-5 IC402 F-11 IC406 F-12 IC603 E-2 IC604 I-12 IC701 B-7 IC1101 F-5

PS101 E-2 PS102 E-2 PS401 F-12

Q103 F-2

Q304 C-1 Q306 C-2 Q404 E-12 Q406 E-12 Q408 E-11 Q409 E-11 Q410 E-11 Q412 E-11 Q413 E-11 Q414 E-11 Q415 F-11 Q416 F-12 Q609 H-8 Q612 I-10 Q613 I-10 Q705 B-6 Q709 C-7 Q710 C-7 Q713 C-6 Q716 C-7 Q801 B-1 Q802 B-1 Q1101 F-7 Q1102 F-6 Q1103 F-6 Q1104 F-6 Q1105 F-6

X601 I-12 X602 I-12 X1101 F-5

AV-071 BOARD(SIDE A)

Q801

CN102

CN103

Q802

CN1203

C806

L801

C803

L802

C807

C808

R801

R808

R827

LP102

Q304

D303

R121

CN101

C331

C118

R119

R129

LP101

D101

R137

Et101

PS102

FL803

Q818

C817

C815

Q306

Q305

R344

R346

D304

R337

R334

C332

C115

R105

R106

R104

IC603

C114

R103

R102

R101

R107

L101

FL801

C801

R123R124

R125

Q103

Q307

J805

Q817

R839

C819

C811 C812

C357

C117

R114

PS101

123

C116

R122

C104

CN802

J801

R835

R836

R898

C818

C816

R897

D814

C814

R320

R368

R116

C110

C103

R504

C111

FL802

FL804

C802

C805

IC106

C108

C109

R131

3 2 1

CN402

C304

C343

C344

R321

C305

C303

C311

C310

R505

C315

R506

C351

C349

C338

C302

C301

C347

C342

C335

C329

LP103

C319

C325

C324

C314

C316

R311

R310

C312

C1107

X1101

C1103

R1104

C1104

IC301

C352

C350

C727

C339

R1130

R1127

C1118

C730

C1113

R1125

C1121

R1119

C340

IC705

Q1104

R1124

C733

Q1103

C721

R1117

C1119

R1111

R741

C1109

C768

C703

C334

C348

C330

C320

C327

C323

R317

R316

R315

R313

R312

R314

CN501

C1110

C1120

C1114

IC1101

Q1105

R754

C726 R750

C763

R765

IC704

IC703

R1120

R736

R725

C714

C729

C724

C725

R719

R721

C732

C1112

R745

Q707

Q705

R720

C746

R726

R735

R728

C743

R734

R751

C751

R749

D707

Q713

R764

C718

C723

R714

Q704

R710

R705

C712

C713

C1101

R1108

Q1102

C1105

JL701

C722

R1118

C1117

C1116

L1104

• : Uses unleaded solder.

R727

CN801

C1106

R1105

IC701

Q710

C741

R724

C737

Q1101

Q709

C707

C716

R753

JL704

L703

X701

R739

R742

C759

R730

C757

Q716

C754

R744

JL703

C756

R737

R743

C740

C739

JR014

R713

C719

Q703

CN901

R1106

R1102

R503

JL707

CN1202

C241

C244

C208

C210

Q701

C209

C212

C207

C243

R752

JL706

C735

D702

R958

R950

C941

R1227

C745

R731

C753

R709

R704

R708

R703

D701

R1228

R1216

R1215

R501

Q916

CN301

J802

C246

C226

C242

IC201

R218

C224

R221

R217

C218

C223

C236

X901

R953

C954

R954

R956

C957

L910

C955

C952

C944

C937

C926

C927

C928

C929

C916

C911

C920

R908

C220

R248

C221

R280

R279

R278

C217

R257

C245

R258

C227

C235

CN502

C956

C945

C949

C950

IC903

100

C935

C931

C932

C934

C936

C938

C918

R922

C909

IC902

C905

R925

FL903

R909

C903

C317

C359

R250

R253

R277

R254

R255

R256

C211

D407

R417

R1206

R902

Q903

R906

L903

R905

C914

C910

C958

R903

R901

Q902

C901

R904

R907

C924

FL902

R914

R911

R921

R915

R940

C908

Q907

Q912

R929

R935

L901

C919

C358

R411

R412

R414

IC401

C410

R1222

C902

C904

C913

FL901

C907

C922

R1223

J301

C360

C361

C401

C402

C406

C405

C407

R1217

CN1201

L902

J601

C446

L409

C438

L406

C448

L407

L405

L410

C408

L402

R1224

R1225

JL431

Q417

R1221

C441

C462

X401

R472

Q419

R481

R444

C458

C442

R1220

R480

Q411

C431

L403

C413

R418

C414

Q408

C404

C412

CN403

R487

C449

C454

R442

C464

C459

R431

R435

Q409

C426

R426

R425

R488

Q412

Q414

R429

R419

D408

Q410

R424

R421

C418

C416

C419

R423

CN401

C409

R401

IC402

R403

R409

R402

L412

C444

JL436

JL435

JL434

C467

R459

R462

R464

R466

C466

C433

R428

Q413

C422

R427

D406

D405

D404

Q416

Q415

R439

R438

C429

PS401

IC406

R484

Q404

C436

tU401

JL432

JL433

R410

Q406

R405

R408

R404

Q402

C428

Et104

C432

C469

L411

Power block

AV-071 board

FL-130 board

CN-177 board

RD-045 board

FR-195 board

1234567

TUNER, VIDEO IN PROCESS, RD I/F, AV IN/OUT, UV IC, SYSTEM CONTROL, PDC, POWER

AV-071

R662

R666

IC607

R664

C641

C629

R693

R658

R660

IC606

C606

R612

R611

R615

R618

R681

R655

R613

R622

R616

R621

R684

BZ601

C608

R2603

R617

C615

R2604

R619

R620

R607

X601

R635

C612

X602

C618

R632

tP601

tP602

CN001

Q609

R128

L1001

R1010

C1001

IC1001

Et102

C631

R697

t601

CN602

R675

Et103

R602

L601

C635

C634

R603

R606

C1003

R1003

R1004

C1002

C621

FL601

D603

C603

D602

C630

C625

C619

C620

C623

R609

C622

R608

C624

R671

R656

Q605

R670

D604

R644

Q604

C626

R667

R686

Q603

R643

R639

R638

Q602

R634

R649

Q601

C617

R636

C642

R2602

R652

R640

R641

R650

R2601

Q613

Q612

R648

R685

R691

R679

D611

C639

R682

R680

C627

R683

8 9 10 11 12

4-24

C611

IC604

CN601

123

Page 57

AV-071 board

FR-195 board

RD-045 board

FL-130 board

CN-177 board

Power block

AV-071 BOARD(SIDE B)

tU401

C456

R447

JL408

JL409

C443

JL410

JL411

JL412

JL413

JL415

JL416

JL417

JL418

JL419

JL420

JL421

R460

JL422

R482

JL423

JL424

JL425JL426

JL606

JL607

JL608

JL609

JL611

JL613

R601

C123

R468

Et104

JL430

JL402

R610

R623

JL662

R624

JL615

JL621

JL1302

R448

R449

R450

R451

C437

D412

R441

C447

C439

R456

R454

D410

C463

C461

R455

C465

R471

R457

R458

R461

R463

JL448

R465

JL447

R467

R469

R470

R430

Q420

JL429

C428

IC403

C432

R486

R483

R440

L411

JL1220

C440

C436

BZ601

JL1224

R694

R614

JL661

JL602

JL601

JL603

C614

C613

X602

JL625

JL626

JL1305

JL1307

JL1303

JL1306

JL414

IC602

JL619

C446

JL443

JL442

CN403

R443

R445

R446

407

C468

R453

JL446

C467

C464

C460

JL444

R436

C426

C466

R437

C433

R415

R434

R432

R433

JL441

C427

L412

D411

C606

C605

R631

R627

R628

R629

R630

JL637JL647JL654JL655JL658

C608

C607

JL624

C618

C616

JL653

JL650

JL652

JL635

JL631

JL651

JL628

JL633

JL629

JL627

JL1304

JL691

JL692

RDR-GX7

• : Uses unleaded solder.

AV-071 BOARD (SIDE B)

D302 D-4 D351 D-2 D411 F-11 D605 I-9 D606 H-8 D607 I-9 D608 I-9 D609 I-9 D610 I-8 D612 A-10 D705 C-7 D706 D-8 D801 B-7 D802 B-4 D803 B-3 D808 B-4 D809 B-3 D810 A-7 D811 B-7 D812 B-6 D813 B-6 D1201 B-1 D1202 A-2

IC101 F-2 IC102 E-3 IC105 D-2 IC302 E-3 IC303 D-5 IC304 C-5 IC602 G-11 IC605 I-11 IC801 A-1 IC802 B-3

JL812

JL801

JL1232

JL317

D351

JL316

R382

JL121

R604

R108

R115

C109

R109

J805

JL806JL807

R876

R875

R848

R847

R846

JL805

R874

C819

JL832

JL837

R838

R818 R819 R820

R804

R805 R806 R807

Q805 Q806

Q812 Q813

R824 R825 R826

R812 R813 R814

JL504

JL332

R351

JL334

Q309

R345

C357

C117

R127

JL117

R695

C609

C610

R605

C112

JL116 C116

IC104

C104

C102

IC101

C817

C815

R339

IC105

C101

R350

C332

C113

C114

C1201

D1202

L803

C807 C809

JL836

Q807 Q808

Q308

C115

R111

JL107

R110

R135

R1207

CN1203

C806

R343

R120

R1213

R1208

R1209

IC801

C1204

D1201

C1202

C804

C1203

R833

R1214

R1211

R1212

R1210

C810

C808

JL506

JL838

Q814

JL1229JL1230JL1231

JL503

LP102

D102

D103

JL109

JL111

JL110

JL115

R338

Q108

C331

R112

R113

R132

C118

JL123

Q107

JL105

JL104

JL108

JL119

JL102

JL106

R130

JL103

CN101

JL118

LP101

R133

R136

JL101

JL112

R126

R118

R134

Et101

JL306

J301

D612

J601

JL659

C640

JL660

R651

R653

L409

C438

JL304

C441

C451

C457

C455

C459

R452

JL1227

JL1228

R422

R420

JL428

JL427

L404

JL404

L401

C415

C444

R625

R626

R668

JL632

JL636

JL663

JL610

100

605

C628

JL676

JL648

JL649

L406

C448

R485

L407

C462

L410

C450

X401

C452

C445

JL1226

C413

JL439

JL612

JL1301

R669

JL614

JL622

JL675

C408

R473

JL445 C458

JL403

L408

C442

JL1225

C431

C430

Q407Q418

CBEC

R416

JL440

C412

JL616

JL620

JL1223

JL618

JL664

JL401

R637

JL617

JL665

R645

JL666

JL669

JL623

JL668

JL667

JL670

R674

JL634

JL684

R676

R692

JL644

JL643

R690

JL642

JL641

JL640

JL671

C627

R677

R678

JL639

JL645

JL672

JL674

JL646

JL673

JL305

JL303

C360

R377

Q316

R371

C361

R378

C358

Q317

L405

C401

C402

R406

C403

JL438

JL437

R413

R407

C407

C411

C410

JR002

JR003

JL1218

JL1216

JL1221

JL1249

JL1219

C913

Q901

JL904

C915

Q906

R924

R920

C912

R927

R930

Q908

JL525

JL1241

JL605

JL630

JL604

R633

R647

R661

JL687

R654

JL689

R657

R659

R663

JL680

JL686

R673

JL685

R665

R687

R688

JL205

JL638

CN301

JL302

R375

R380

C326

JL301

C317

R369

C318

R374

R373

R370

C359

JL223

Q315

R372

JL220

R381

C362

JL221

R231

JL219

C211

JL522

JR009

JL1248

R510

R509

JL1247

JL1246

R917

JL1214

R916

R923

Q904

JL903

R910

R912

R934

C917

R933

R919

Q913

R937

R931

C925

Q909

C907

C923

R938

R932

JL905

C922

C919

C921

R936

C1007

R1014

R1012

C1004

R1008

R1009

R1006

Q1001

R1007

C1002

R1005

C630

R696

C624

R689

JL681

JL682

JL683

R204

D201

C246

R220

C220

C204

R206

R208

JL203

C221

JL228

JL227

JL1222

JL224

JL229

R239

JL222

JL233

C217

R219

C228

C245

C227

C235 R227

R259

JL230

Q905

C603

JL521

R260

JL908

JR001

JL909

R926

C625

R507

R508

JL524

L909

C949

C945

C946

C951

C947

L907

R949

D901

R918

JL910

C939

C933

R943

L906

C938

C936

C930

JL902

C903

R1011

R1013

C1006

C1005

R1015

JL1001

JL1002

C635

JL656

R699

R672

R646

Q607

R642

Q606

JL688

JL690

C121

JL523

R941

C604

JL814

JL815

J802

JL204

R212

R202

R210

C953

D608

D607

D605

D202

R222

JL232

C242

C222

C236

R957

C942

JL912

L905

JL901

L601

D609

Q608

D204

C201

C226

R275

JL231

R955

C943

L904

C920

C208

R224

C209

JL226

JL214

R245

C212

JL215

C223

C218

JL519

JL407

JL225

R716

JR008

R246

JR007

L908

C944

R948

FB903

C940

C937

C916

C120

Et102

C631

JL657

C633

C632

D606

t601

C636

R698

Q611

R700

JL678

Et103

JL816

R201

D706

R879

R881

R882

JL824

JL818

JL202

JL518

JL209

R215

JL210

R207

JL406

R766

D709

JL926

JL930

C941

C948

JL906

JL907

FB902

R1203 R1204

Q610

C643

C644

JL677

C637

JL679

C638

R869

R209

D203

C205

R276

R214

JL208

JL520

C243

JR015

JL1244

D807

C704

C241

JR013

C244

JL719

R729

C210

JL211

R216

C203

R205

JL201

R213

C207

R261

R262

C735

R718

Q708

Q706

R717

C766

R723

R755

JL927

JL928

CN901

JL929

JL915

JL922

JL914

JL913

JL916

JL919

JL917

JL920

JL931

JL918

JL932

JL921

JL1242

JL1211

JL1210

JL1212

JL1209

JL1208

JL1245

JL1213

JL1201

D610

JL705

D705

JL1243

JL827

JL817

D810

JL828 JL829

R855

D801

C706

JL716

JL708

C717

R732

C753

L702

L701

JL925

JL1206

JL1236JL1237

JL1207

R1226

JL1203

JL1202

FB802

R889

FB802

FB801

R865

R866

C708

JL710

R702

R701

C716

R722

R712

JL718

Q712

X701

R740

IC707

C760

R738

JL924

JL923

R913

JL911

JL1233

R1219

R1218

JL1205

JL1204

JL1238

JL1109

D812

D811

C710

JL712

C715

C728

JL709

C720

R707

JL722

R715

R746

JL711

C709

C705

JL717

JL842

JL715

R733

C748

C761

C738

Q711

C764

Q715

C762

JL702

C719

IC702

C737

R711

C712

C1106

L1101

JL1110

R1101

R1116

R1112

JL1250

R878

JL830

R868

R890

R867

D813

C711

C702

JL724

JL714

C724

JL713

JL723

JL721

JL720

C701

JL840JL841

JL839

CN801

JL725 C746

C763

R747

C751

C765

R748

R756

C732

C718

C734

C767

D703

C722

JL514 JL515

Q702

C713

R706

D704

C1101

C1112

R1109

R1113

R1115

R1110

R1114

JL819

JL820

J801

C354

C356

FB304

FB303

R366

R365

R319

R355

R357

R360

R358

JR012

JL329

C350

R353

JL327 C339

C340

R336

C733

R330

R332

R767

C736

C731

JL321

JL405

C721

JL513

JL512

JL517

JL516

C1109

C1113

JL1104

JL1105

R1126

JL1107

R1128

JL1108

R1129

C353

FB302

R364

R354

Q311

Q310

C352

Q313

C334

C364

R342

C333

IC304

R347

R341

C348

C330

C320

C369

R328

C370

R325

JL315

IC303

JR006

JL325

C327

R327

C323

R324

JL320

C306

C308

C313

JL314

JL311

JL313

JL1217

R306

JL310

JL1240

R304

R305

JL1239

JL1215

JL511

C1110

C1120

L1103

C1108

R1103

C1111

JL1106

R1123

R1122

JL1111

JL1103

R1121

JL1102

JL1101

JL821JL822

C355

R363

JL312

FB301

R318

R356

C347

C336

LP103

R326

JL318

JL309

C307

C1107

L1102

R1107

C1102

R329

JR005

Q312

C351

R349

JL308

C363

R348

C329

C367

C325

JL324

R323

JL502

JL505

X1101

R877

JL802

JL823

R857

R849

R850

R858

R361

R359

R362

JL328

R352

C349

JL326

C342

C335

R340

R335

C319

R307

C368

R331

C302

R333

C324

R322

Q301

JL319

R302

C316

C312

JL804

JL803

R870 R871

JL825

D802

Q314

C822 C823

JL330

C338

JR011

JR010

C304

Q303

Q302

R309

R308

JR004

R301

C301

R303

C315

JL826

R872 R873

D808

D803

D809

C824 C825

R842

C820

R843

C821

Q815

JL331

R834

CN402

C343

JL323

C305

C344

D302

C303

JL322

C311

C310

IC302

JL507

JL509

JL811

R862

R845

R844

R840

R837

JL813

D806

R854

R841

Q816

R815

C814

Q809

R821

JL1235

JL333

R367

CN802

JL831

JL809

JL810

JL808

R860

R861

D805

JL833 JL834

R802

Q803 Q804

R809 R810 R811

R863

D804

R859

R852

R853

IC802

JL835

JL501

JL508

R816 R817

R803

Q810 Q811

BECBECBECBECBE

R822 R823

JL1234

JL510

JL122

C108

C106

IC102

JL113 C110

JL120

C107

C111

JL114

IC103

R117

123456789101112

Q107 D-1 Q108 D-1

Q301 D-4 Q302 D-4 Q303 D-4 Q308 C-2 Q310 B-5 Q311 B-5 Q312 B-5 Q313 B-5 Q314 B-4 Q315 B-9 Q316 B-10 Q317 B-10 Q420 E-11 Q606 I-9 Q607 I-9 Q608 I-9 Q610 H-8 Q611 I-8 Q706 D-8 Q708 D-7 Q711 C-7 Q712 B-7 Q715 C-6 Q809 C-3 Q810 C-3 Q811 C-2 Q812 C-2 Q813 C-2 Q814 C-2 Q815 B-3 Q816 B-3

4-25

TUNER, VIDEO IN PROCESS, RD I/F, AV IN/OUT, UV IC, SYSTEM CONTROL, PDC, POWER

AV-071

Page 58

RDR-GX7

FL-130 (FL DRIVE) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

FL-130 BOARD (SIDE A)

❈✵✻✴✶

❅❏

❈✵✻✴✷

❘✵✻✴✵

❇M✵✻✴✸

✵✺

❇M✵✻✴✷

✼

✺

• : Uses unleaded solder.

❇✵✻✴✻

I✵✻✴✵

M❈✵✻✴✵

❇✵✻✴✶

❘✵✻✴✶

✵✵

❇M✵✻✴✶

✶

✵

FL-130 board

Power block

CN-177 board

FR-195 board

AV-071 board

RD-045 board

✸

✻

✵✶✷

FL-130 BOARD (SIDE B)

R1702

JL1776

JL1773

JL1772

JL1702

JL1704

JL1703

JL1705

JL1780

✹

JL1706

JL1707

JL1708

JL1709

JL1710

JL1779

JL1781

JL1711

JL1712

R1708

R1707

C1704

JL1713

R1703

R1706

JL1714

JL1715

JL1777

JL1778

JL1716

JL1717

R1710

R1709

JL1775

JL1718

JL1719

JL1720

JL1721

JL1769

JL1722

JL1723

JL1724

JL1726

JL1730

JL1732

JL1734

JL1737

JL1729

JL1725

JL1731

JL1733

JL1736

IC1701

3364

C1711

D1709

FB1703

FB1702

C1712

R1716

JL1768

D1710

JL1767

C1708

JL1770

JL1738

D1708

JL1774

JL1739

D1704

JL1741

JL1740

FB1701

JL1742

JL1743

1 32

JL1744

C1710

JL1745

C1705

R1711

JL1746

D1705

R1715

JL1747

C1706

C1703

D1706

JL1748

JL1735

JL1763

JL1749

JL1771

JL1701

JL1764

R1718

JL1750

JL1751

R1719

JL1765

#PC00126

D1713

JL1752

FB1704

JL1753

JL1755

R1712R1713R1714

JL1754

R1723

JL1756

R1724

JL1766

R1704

R1705

D1707

Q1703

JL1727

D1712

Q1704

JL1728

JL1762

JL1760

JL1758

JL1761

JL1759

JL1757

D1711

FL DRIVE

FL-130

4-27 4-28

Page 59

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-27 for printed wiring board.

FL-130

FL DRIVE

XX MARK:NO MOUNT

TO FR-195 BOARD CN102

THROUGH THE FFF-108 FLAT CABLE

(SEE PAGE 4-40)

11PCN1702

FLD RESET

FLD CS

FLD SCLK

FLD SOUT

JL1772

-F

JL1773

JL1774 JL1775 JL1776 JL1777 JL1778

JL1779 JL1780 JL1781

BB+

VFL1

9 8

KEY4

7 6 5 4

GND

3 2

GND

810 137

ND1701

15ST-41GNK

FLUORESCENT TUBE DISPLAY

AD2

AD1

SEG35

SEG34

SEG32

JL1703

AD1

JL1704

SEG35

JL1705

SEG34

JL1706

SEG33

JL1707

SEG32

2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 451 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 59 60

JL1702

AD2

JL1708

SEG31

JL1709

SEG30

JL1710

SEG29

JL1711

SEG28

JL1712

SEG27

JL1713

SEG26

JL1714

SEG25

JL1715

SEG24

JL1716

SEG23

JL1717

SEG22

JL1718

SEG21

JL1719

SEG20

JL1720

SEG19

JL1721

SEG18

JL1722

SEG17

JL1723

SEG16

JL1724

SEG15

JL1725

SEG14

JL1726

SEG13

JL1729

SEG12

JL1730

SEG11

JL1731

SEG10

JL1732

SEG9

SEG5

SEG7

SEG8

SEG6

JL1733

JL1736

JL1734

JL1737

JL1738

SEG4

SEG5

SEG6

SEG7

SEG8

SEG4

JL1739

SEG3

COM15

COM14

COM12

COM13

COM10

COM8

COM11

COM9

COM6

COM7

COM3

COM4

COM5

COM2

JL1753

COM4

JL1754

COM3

JL1755

COM2

COM1

JL1756

COM1

SEG3

SEG2

SEG1

JL1741

JL1742

JL1743

JL1740

JL1744

JL1748

JL1749

JL1745

JL1747

JL1746

COM10

COM11

COM12

COM13

COM14

COM15

SEG1

SEG2

COM9

COM8

JL1750

COM7

JL1751

COM6

JL1752

COM5

B-

C1707

C1705

0.1u

C1704

FLD1_CS

R1709

4.4

-19.4

AD1

100

AD1

FLD_RESET

100

R1710

5.0

-17.9

SEG1

R1711

RESET

SEG1

3300

JL1735

2.3

-17.9

SEG2

COM16

SEG6

COM15

-20.9

-19.4

SEG7

COM15

SEG7

COM14

-20.9

SEG8

COM14

SEG8

COM13

-20.9

COM13

SEG9

-17.9

SEG9

IC1701

FL DRIVE

COM10

COM11

COM12

-20.9

COM12

COM11

COM10

IC1701

ML9206-07MBZ03B

SEG11

SEG10

SEG12

-16.4

-13.4

-20.9

SEG10

SEG11

SEG12

COM9

-20.9

-19.4

SEG13

COM9

SEG13

COM8

-20.9

SEG14

COM8

SEG14

COM7

-20.9

-14.9

SEG15

COM7

SEG15

COM6

-20.9

-11.9

SEG16

COM6

SEG16

COM5

-20.9

-22.4

SEG17

COM5

SEG17

COM4

-20.9

SEG18

COM4

SEG18

COM3

-20.9

SEG19

COM3

SEG19

COM2

-20.9

-14.9

SEG20

COM2

SEG20

COM1

-20.9

-11.9

SEG21

COM1

SEG21

SEG35

-17.9

SEG35

SEG22

-19.4

SEG22

C1706

47p

2.3

-22.4

VFL

GND

OSC0

OSC1

SEG2

SEG4

SEG3

SEG5

-16.4

-20.9

-14.9

SEG3

SEG4

SEG5

SEG6

FLD_RESET

FLD1_CS

FLD_SCLK

FLD_SOUT

(POWER)

R1702

S1701

S1702

R1704

220

POWER STANDBY

Q1703

UN2211-TX

LED DRIVE

R1703

D1702

SML-512MWT86

0.1

R1705

470

D1703

CL-196HR-CD-T

5.0

4.1

2SB709A-QRS-TX

5.0 Q1704

LED DRIVE

JL1701

JL1771

JL1727

JL1728

R1706

FLD_SCLK

C1702

47u

16V

FLD_SOUT

C1703

0.01u B

B+

100

R1707

R1708

5.1

0.6

1.1

VDD

P1P2AD2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

5.0

-20.8

R1723

R1724

AD2

10k

SIGNAL PATH

CHROMA Y

REC

VIDEO SIGNAL

Y/CHROMA

AUDIO

SIGNAL

SEG34

-14.9

-19.4

SEG23

SEG34

SEG23

-F

SEG33

-14.9

-19.4

SEG24

SEG33

SEG24

-F

SEG32

-16.4

-13.4

SEG25

SEG32

SEG25

SEG31

-17.9

-13.4

SEG26

SEG31

SEG26

SEG30

-14.9

-22.4

SEG27

SEG30

SEG27

SEG29

-20.9

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

-22.4

SEG28

SEG29

SEG28

R1718

C1712

FB1704

FB1701

FB1702

100p

0uH

C1710

R1719

D1712

144 1763

UDZSTE-174.7B

FB1703

0uH

C1711

100p

TPB- 1

TPB+ 2

TPA- 3

TPA+ 4

MA152WK-TX

STZ6.8N-T146

D1704

D1705

D1706

D1707

D1708

D1709

D1710

C1708

0.01u B

129 1825 15 16

CN1703

DV IN

D1711

STZ6.8N-T146

J1701

LINE 2 IN

S VIDEO

L(MONO)

VIDEO

CGND

D1713

1SS355TE-17 1 YGND 5S2

VGND

LGND

RBR

RGND

12 15

RDR-GX7

CN1704 6P

JL1757

DGND1

JL1758

TPB-2

JL1759

TPB+3

JL1760

TPA-4

JL1761

TPA+5

JL1762

DGND6

R1712

R1713

R1714

R1716

220k

R1715

220k

JL1763 JL1764 JL1765 JL1766

JL1767

JL1768 JL1769 JL1770

CN1705 11P

S2 SW1 Y2 IN2 AN GND3 C2 IN4 AN GND5 V2 IN6 AN GND7 L2 IN8 AU GND9 R2 IN10 AU GND11

TO RD-45 BOARD CN2001

THROUGH THE RF-113 HARNESS

(NOT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM)

TO AV-071 BOARD (4/9) CN801

THROUGH THE AL-066 HARNESS

(SEE PAGE 4-17)

4-29 4-30

FL DRIVE

FL-130

Page 60

RDR-GX7

FR-195 (SWITCH, LED) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

FR-195 BOARD (SIDE A)

CN102

CN101

S101

C101

D116

IC101

D105

S112

S116

D117

D106

D102

S121

S114

D118

D107

• : Uses unleaded solder.

D103

S119

D104

D108

S107

D119

D111

S117

S103

D114

S122

D109

D112

S108

D115

S120

D110

D113

S106

S118

C104

S102

FL-130 board

Power block

CN-177 board

FR-195 board

AV-071 board

RD-045 board

S115

FR-195 BOARD (SIDE B)

JL155

R134

JL118

R135

JL134

R120

JL137

R121

R122

R113

R115

S113

JL113

JL129

R123

Q102

R112

S111

R152

Q101

JL117

R126 R127

R124

JL112

R114

JL142

JL128

JL138

R125

R151

R138

R117

R118

JL127

JL131

JL132

JL106

R128

R144

JL136

JL130

S110

R111

JL110

JL109

JL126

R116

1732

R139

R140

JL140

JL143

R107

JL144

R106

IC103

R136

JL122

S109

JL116

S104S105

JL108

JL107

R101

R137

JL115

JL146

JL149

JL133

R119

JL151

JL147JL148

JL153

JL145

JL152

JL150

JL154

R102

JL119

R142

JL121

R143

JL120

R141

JL123

R109

JL124JL125

R110

JL104

JL103

JL101

JL105

JL102

C105

R108

JL111

JL114

R147

R149

C106

R148

R105

R132

JL139

R131

R133

R129

JL141

R133

R130

JL135

SWITCH, LED

FR-195

4-31 4-32

Page 61

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-31 for printed wiring board.

FR-195 BOARD

25 15

SWITCH,LED

-REF.NO.;20000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

IC101

REMOTE CONTROL

RECEIVER

IC101

GP1UM28SXK0F

C101

47u

6.3V

5.2 JL111

123

5.1

R102

RDR-GX7

810 137

R141

IC103

LED DRIVE

IC103

BU2152FS

0.7

2 3

0.2

5.2

VSS CLK VSS DATA PLAY PAUSE REC REC_PAUSE DVD

-RW +RW

-R CD VR VIDEO Reserve17SYNCRO_REC

JL107

FLD_SCLK

JL108

FLD_SOUT

PLAY PAUSE REC REC_PAUSE DVD

Q101

2SB710A-RTX

SWITCH

B+

9.2

R151

2200

4.3

JL112

4.8

R152 2200

2.6

Q102

UN2211-TX

SWITCH

JL113

DIMMER

2.5

-RW +RW MS

-R CD VR VIDEO RESERVE

VDD

CLB STB

P24 P23 P22 P21 P20 P19

PROGRESSIVE

FINALIZED

DT_REC

TIMER

B+

JL114

5.2

JL105

5.1

JL106

5.2

JL101

JL102

JL103

JL104

JL109

JL110

5.2

R105

R149

R148

100

10k

C106

R147

FLD_RESET

PROGRESSIVE

FINALIZED

DT_REC

TIMER

SYNCRO_REC

LED_STB

JL115

JL116

JL117

JL118

R101

R106 2200

R112 2200

R113 2200

680

D102

SML-512MWT86

(PLAY)

D103

SML-512WWT86

(PAUSE)

D114

CL-196HR-CD-T

(REC)

D115

SML-512WWT86

(REC_PAUSE)

JL119

JL120

JL121

JL122

JL123

JL124

JL125

JL126

R142

R143

R107

R108

R109

R110

R111

D116

SML-512WWT86

DVD

D117

SML-512WWT86

-RW

D118

SML-512WWT86

+RW

D104

SML-512WWT86

-R

D105

SML-512WWT86

D106

SML-512WWT86

D107

SML-512WWT86

VIDEO

D108

JL127

JL128

JL129

JL130

JL131

JL132

129

R144

R114

R115

R116

R117

R118

D119

CL-196HR-CD-T

SYNCRO_REC

D109

CL-196HR-CD-T

TIMER

D110

CL-196HR-CD-T

D111

SML-512WWT86

FINALIZED

D112

SML-512WWT86

PROGRESSIVE

D113

REC

-F +F VFL

KEY4 FLD_RESET FLD_CS

FLD_SCLK

FLD_SOUT

B+

C104

C105

47u

0.01u

6.3V

JL151 JL152 JL153

JL154

JL155

14463

11PCN102

-F

BB+

VFL

3 4

KEY4

FLD RESET

FLD CS

GND

FLD SCLK

GND

FLD SOUT

TO FL-130 BOARD CN1702

THROUGH THE FFF-018 FLAT CABLE

(SEE PAGE 4-33)

TO AV-071 BOARD

(8/9) CN602

THROUGH THE FAR-003 FLAT CABLE

(SEE PAGE 4-26)

19PCN101

FLD RESET

FLD CS

SIRCS

FLD CLK

FLD DATA

LED STB

DIMMER

KEY4

KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY5

-F

VFL

GND

JL150

1 2 3

JL145

JL146

JL147

6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

JL148

JL149

17 18 19

B-

B+

FLD_RESET

FLD_CS

FLD_SCLK

FLD_SOUT

LED_STB

DIMMER

KEY4

-F

VFL

OPEN

/CLOSE ZOOM+

)

(

S101

JL133

R119 2200

“«'¤

JL134

JL135

R124 2200

(NEXT)

S111

R129 2200

(STOP) REC STOP (PAUSE) REC PAUSE (PLAY) REC

S108

INPUT

SELECT

SYSTEM

S102

R120 2200

R125 2200

S112

R130 2200

ZOOM-

S103

JL137 JL143

R121

3300

ENTER

456

JL138 JL144

R126

3300

S113

JL139 JL141

R131

3300

TOOL

S105

S104

R122

R123

5600

8200

R128

R127

8200

5600

CH+ CH-PROGRESSIVE(PREV)

S114

S115

R132

R133

5600

8200

CURSOR

REC MODEMODE

S106

R139

22k

ONE TOUCH

RETURN DUBBING

S109

R140

22k

S116

S107

S110

S122

5600

S120

R138 8200

S121

S117

S118

R135 2200

S119

JL140 JL142

R137

R136

3300

JL136

R134 2200

SWITCH, LED

4-33 4-34

FR-195

Page 62

RDR-GX7

CN-177 (CONNECTOR) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

CN-177 BOARD (SIDE A)

CN-177 BOARD (SIDE B)

JL1830

JL1801

JL1803

JL1802

JL1804

JL1805

JL1808

JL1807

JL1809

JL1811

JL1813

JL1806

JL1810

JL1812

JL1815

JL1814

JL1816

JL1817

#PC00050

JL1823

JL1818

JL1821

JL1828

JL1819

JL1820

JL1822

• : Uses unleaded solder.

JL1835

JL1833

JL1825

JL1824

JL1837

JL1826

#PC00049

JL1827

CN1802

JL1829

JL1831

JL1832

JL1836

JL1834

CN1801

CN-177 BOARD

TO RD-045 BOARD CN1103 (NOT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM)

CN1801

40P

IDE_DREQ

IDE_IORDY

IDE_DACK

IDE_HD16

IDE_A4(CS0) IDE_A4(CS1)

IDE_RST

GND IDE_D7 IDE_D8 IDE_D6 IDE_D9 IDE_D5

IDE_D10

IDE_D4

IDE_D11

IDE_D3

IDE_D12

IDE_D2

IDE_D13

IDE_D1

IDE_D14

IDE_D0

IDE_D15

GND

IDE_W

GND

IDE_R

GND

IDE_INT

IDE_A1

IDE_A0 IDE_A2

DASP

GND

N.C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

JL1801 JL1802 JL1803 JL1804 JL1805 JL1806 JL1807 JL1808 JL1809 JL1810 JL1811 JL1812 JL1813 JL1814 JL1815 JL1816 JL1817 JL1818 JL1819

JL1820 JL1821 JL1822 JL1823 JL1824 JL1825 JL1826

JL1827 JL1828 JL1829 JL1830 JL1831

JL1832 JL1833 JL1834 JL1835 JL1836 JL1837

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

40PCN1802 IDE_RST GND IDE_D7 IDE_D8 IDE_D6 IDE_D9 IDE_D5 IDE_D10 IDE_D4 IDE_D11 IDE_D3 IDE_D12 IDE_D2 IDE_D13 IDE_D1 IDE_D14 IDE_D0 IDE_D15 GND N.C IDE_DREQ GND IDE_W GND IDE_R GND IDE_IORDY N.C IDE_DACK GND IDE_INT IDE_HD16 IDE_A1 N.C IDE_A0 IDE_A2 IDE_A4(CS0) IDE_A4(CS1) DASP GND

BASE

UNIT

CONNECTOR

CN-177

Power block

FL-130 board

CN-177 board

FR-195 board

AV-071 board

RD-045 board

4-35 4-36E

Page 63

SECTION 5

IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

5-1. IT CONTROL IC (IC605: µPD703033BYGF-M29-3BA-A (AV-071 BOARD))

Pin No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

Pin Name

SOUT

SCLK

IIC1 SDA

IIC SW for GR

IIC1 SCL

IT SIN IT SOUT IT SCLK

EVDD

EVSS

LED LCK

BUZZER SIRCS in

FL PCONT

FLD IN

FLD DATA

FLD CLK

FLD XRST

FLD CS

F MONO

VPP

AV LINK OUT

XL3MUTE

EEP WP

DIMMER

RESET5V

UVIC CS

IT XRST

XFLMRST

STATUS0 STATUS1

AWAKE

AWAKE DONE

RESET

XT1 XT2

REGC

X1 X2

VSS

VDD

CLKOUT

XNENTMUTE

VYL1 VYL3

TUDVD

XRGBSEL

CDINSEL DVDEXT

RELAY

I/O

Serial data output Serial clock

I/O

IIC data input/output IIC bus switch control

IIC clock output

Input of Communication data with SH

Output of communication data with SH

Output of communication clock with SH – –

LED serial/parallel latch output

Buzzer output

Remote control output

FL power supply ON/OFF

FLD driver data

FLD driver clock

Reset for FLD driver

CS for FLD driver

Switching to monaural –

AVLINK output

Write protect

Dimmer pulse

Reset output to 5V series LSI

Reset output to SH

Flash memory reset

SH status input

AWAKE request to SH

Input of SH wake up state

Reset input

Oscillation

Muting components

L1 terminal V/Y switching

L3 terminal V/Y switching

Tuner/DVD switching

RGB/YV switching

INSEL switching to C+dec

DVD (this unit)/external

Relay control

Function

RDR-GX7

5-1

Page 64

Pin No.

51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99

100

Pin Name

H DET

DSEL(CMUTE)

Syncro Power

YC SEP ON

S2SW

L1 SEL

XP MUTE

BDVV

BVSS

MAIN/SAP

SAP DET

JUST CLK

AUTO PRESET

TA MUTE

TU PCONT

TU V DET

INSEL1 INSEL2

INSEL TU

FAN SPEED

FAN ONOFF

RELAY CONT

IDET

AVDD

AVSS

Avref

AREA

F AN DET

KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 KEY5

TU AFT

EURO 8DET

STEREO DET

AGC

ONDO

iMute

P FAIL

IT REQ

SYNC V

XPDCDAV

AV LINK IN

UVIC BUSY

TTXT ENABLE

TTXT SDA

WIDE

TTXT SCL

SIN

I/O

With sync / no sync Mute of C+ signal Power supply ON during Syncro standby YC sep circuit ON/OFF With S PIN input

Audio mute

Sound multiplex MSP

Tuner power supply control With V sync/no V sync Output switching Output switching Output switching Speed switching FAN ON/OFF AC relay ON/OFF With L3 Icont/no L3 Icont

Abbreviation FAN stopping detection

L3 8PIN input

Tuner gain Temperature detection Mute ICONT signal AC off detection

Request input from SH

V sync input PDC data reception OK

AV LINK input

TTXT data Wide switching TTNT clock

Serial data input

Function

5-2E

Page 65

RDR-GX7

SECTION 6

SERVICE MODE

This is the diagnostics to locate the faulty position. The diagnostics can be executed using the remote commander (Remote Control Mode1) and a monitor. To execute the diagnostics mode, connect the VIDEO OUT (L2 OUT) connector to a monitor. While pressing INPUT SELECT, REC MODE and STOP of the main unit, connect the AC power cord to the power outlet to start the diagnostics. Keep pressing INPUT SELECT , REC MODE and STOP of the main unit (about 10 seconds) until the diagnostics screen appears on monitor display. Either “OK” or “NG” appears on the monitor screen while the diagnostics is in progress. You can judge the respective device or its peripheral from the message of either “OK” or “NG” on the monitor screen. When an abnormality is detected, the diagnostics is stopped at that moment and you can select to proceed the diagnostics or to stop it. Use the remote commander (DVD1) keys or the keys on the front panel of the main unit to operate the diagnostics.

6-1. Device relation diagram.

Display data (for your reference to check the signal path)

Video signal

Audio signal

VIDEO

DECODER

ADC

DAC

VIDEO

ENCODER

CONVERTER

TL750

GT R

FBI

Data read

ENCODER

Data rea

MSP

DECODER

Checking item IC name REF

VIDEO ENC IC ADV7300AKST IC2303 IP CONV IC CXD9698R IC2301 TL750 IC TL750B5 IC1402 GTR IC CXD9735Q IC701 FBI IC CXD9537AR IC1301 VIDEO DEC IC SAA7118E/V1.518 IC2202 AVENC IC UPD61052GD-LML IC903 MSP IC CXD9736GG IC1101 AVDEC IC CXD1935Q IC1203

DV CPRM

CCM

IC UPD72852GB-8EU IC2001 IC UPD72893GD-LML IC2102

IC CXD9754R IC1001

EPGSLICER IC TC90A73U IC1802 GEMSTAR IC UPD65881GB-072-8ES IC1807

All parts are mounted on the RD045M’T assembly.

If NG is displayed as the result of DEVICE test, IC is defective or peripheral of the IC is defective. If NG is displayed as the result of “PATH” test, defect exists in between ICs.

6-1

Page 66

6-2. Block diagram (for your reference to check the devices)

Video out

Audio In

Tuners

Video In

ADV7300

NT/PAL Enc

(

VIDEO ENC

Audio Out

Display

Tube

uPD703033A

IT Con

uPD72852

PHY

)

Conv

CXD9698R

UVIC

MC68HC68VBIFB

Audio

ADC

DV+

LINK

AD1895A

R/C

TL750

Audio

DAC

CXD9627A

HD6417292ABP200

Syscon

uPD72893

OSD

AK5365

SAA7118E

NT/PAL

(VIDEO

DEC)

ROM

Dec

Host Glue

A/V

Glue

GTR

(

Post

Video

(FBI)

CXD9537AR

CXD9734AQCXD9741R

RAM

CXD9735Q

)

Host Glue

uPD61052

Enc

SM8707EV

PLL

CXD1935

Dec

CXD9754R

CCM

(CPRM)

CXD9736GG

ATA I/F

(

MSP

Power Supply

)

DVD Drive

6-3. Screen Transition in the Service Mode

Main menu

<< MAIN MENU >>

1) DEVICE TEST

2) PATH TEST

3) TEST MODE

1<>

DEVICE TEST menu

<< DEVICE TEST MENU 1/2 >>

0) ALL CHECK

1) VIDEO ENC

2) IPCONV

<< PATH TEST MENU 1/2 >>

1) VIDEO ENC

2) IP CONV

3) TL750

<< TEST MODE MENU >>

1) Version No

•

MENU 2

•

MENU 2

DEVICE TEST menu

<< DEVICE TEST MENU 2/2 >>

1) DV

T< t>>/ <

menuPATH TEST

T< t>>/ <

menuTEST MODE

2) CPRM

•

MENU 1

menuPATH TEST

<< PATH TEST MENU 2/2 >>

1) FBI-GTR

2) AVDEC-FBI

3) MSP-AVDEC

4) ADC

•

MENU 1

6-2

Page 67

6-4. Service Mode. Menu Items and Description

1) When the key ‘1’ is pressed down, the monitor display moves to the device check menu screen.

2) When the key ‘2’ is pressed down, the monitor display moves to the path check menu screen between devices.

3) When the key ‘3’ is pressed down, the monitor display moves to the version check screen.

<< MAIN MENU >>

1) DEVICE TEST

2) PATH TEST

3) TEST MODE

6-5. Device Check Menu (1/2)

0) When the key ‘0’ is pressed down, all devices are checked automatically.

1) When the key ‘1’ is pressed down, the VIDEOENC de vice check will be executed.

2) When the key ‘2’ is pressed down, the IPCONV device check will be executed. (This item is not installed in the EUR O models, NG is displayed but it is not indicating any default of the main unit.)

3) When the key ‘3’ is pressed down, the TL750 device check will be executed.

4) When the key ‘4’ is pressed down, the GTR device check will be executed.

5) When the key ‘5’ is pressed down, the FBI device check will be executed.

6) When the key ‘6’ is pressed down, the VIDEODEC de vice check will be executed.

7) When the key ‘7’ is pressed down, the AVENC device check will be executed.

8) When the key ‘8’ is pressed down, the MSP device check will be executed.

9) When the key ‘9’ is pressed down, the AVDEC device check will be executed.

10) When the key ‘t’ is pressed down, the monitor display moves to the next path check menu screen.

<< DEVICE TEST MENU 1/2 >>

0) ALL CHECK

1) VIDEO

2) IPCONV

3) TL750

4) GTR

5) FBI

6) VIDEO DEC

7) AVENC

8) MSP

9) AVDEC

MENU 2

ENC

6-6. Device Check Menu (2/2)

1) When the key ‘1’ is pressed down, the DV device chec k will be executed.

2) When the key ‘2’ is pressed down, the CPRM device check will be executed.

3) When the key ‘3’ is pressed down, the CCM device check will be executed.

4) When the key ‘4’ is pressed down, the EPGSLICER device check will be executed. (This item is not installed in the EURO models, NG is displayed but it is not indicating any default of the main unit.)

5) When the key ‘5’ is pressed down, the GEMST AR device check will be executed. (This item is not installed in the EUR O models, NG is displayed but it is not indicating any default of the main unit.)

6) When the key ‘T’ is pressed down, the monitor display returns to the previous device check menu screen.

<< DEVICE 2/2TEST MENU >>

1) DV

2) CPRM

3) CCM

4) EPGSLICER

5) GEMSTAR

MENU 1

6-3

Page 68

6-7. Path Check Menu (1/2)

1) When the key ‘1’ is pressed down, VIDEOENC path check is executed.

2) When the key ‘2’ is pressed down, IPCONV path check is executed. (This item is not installed in the EUR O models, NG is displayed but it is not indicating any default of the main unit.)

3) When the key ‘3’ is pressed down, TL750 path check is executed.

4) When the key ‘4’ is pressed down, path check from GTR t AVENC is executed.

5) When the key ‘5’ is pressed down, path check from GTR t TL750 is executed.

6) When the key ‘6’ is pressed down, path check from GTR t FBI is executed.

7) When the key ‘7’ is pressed down, path check from VDEC t GTR is executed.

8) When the key ‘8’ is pressed down, path check from AVENC t MSP is executed.

9) When the key ‘9’ is pressed down, path check from AVENC t GTR is executed.

10) When the ke y ‘t’ is pressed down, the monitor display moves to the previous device check menu screen.

<< PATH TEST MENU 1/2 >>

1) VIDEO ENC

2) IPCONV

3) TL750

t4) GTR AVENC t5) GTR TL750 t6) GTR FBI

t7) VDEC GTR

t8) AVENC MS P t9) AVENCtGTR

MENU 2

6-8. Path Check Menu (2/2)

1) When the key ‘1’ is pressed down, path check from FBItGTR is executed.

2) When the key ‘2’ is pressed down, path check from AVDEC t FBI is executed.

3) When the key ‘3’ is pressed down, path check from MSP t AVDEC is executed.

4) When the key ‘T’ is pressed down, the monitor display returns to the previous path check menu screen.

<< PATH 2/2TEST MENU >>

t1) FBI GTR

t2) AVDEC FBI

t3) MSPTAVDEC

1MENU

6-4

Page 69

6-9. Device All Check. Screen Transition

<< DEVICE TEST MENU 1/2 >>

· · · ·

3) TL750

· · · ·

<< TL750 >> REGISTER OK SDRAM OK

<< OK >>

<< TL750 >> REGISTER OK SDRAM NG

<< NG >>

1. Select the item “ALL CHECK” from the menu.

2. Device check is executed automatically starting from No. 1 one device after another.

3. When all devices are checked, number of OK/NG items and names of the NG devices are displayed as the RESULT.

4. When the ENTER key of the remote commander is pressed, the monitor display returns to the menu screen.

<< DEVICE TEST MENU 1/2 >>

0) ALL CHECK

<< VIDEO ENC >> REGISTER OK

<< OK >>

<< IP CONV >> REGISTER NG

<< NG >>

6-10. Device Individual Check. Screen Transition

1. Select the TL750 item from the menu.

2. The register read/write that is the first item of the check is executed and its result is displayed.

3. The SDRAM check that is the second item of the check is executed and its result is displayed.

4. When check results of all items are OK, the message OK is displayed. If any one of the check items is found NG, the message NG is displayed.

5. When the ENTER key is pressed, the monitor display moves the to the menu screen.

<< RESULT >>

-- OK [27] -- NG [1] - NG[ IP CONV ]

6-5

Page 70

6-11. Path Individual Check (Pasted Screen Check).

Screen Transition

1. Select the TL750 item from the menu.

2. The device pasted screen (top of the color bar) is displayed. (When visual check is required, the display does not move the judgment screen but remains displaying the picture.

3. When the ENTER key is pressed, the monitor display moves the to the judgment screen.

4. When the ENTER key is pressed on the judgment screen again, the monitor display moves the to the menu screen.

<< PATH TEST MEN

U 1/2 >>

· · · ·

3) TL750

· · · ·

Pasted picture

(Top of color bar is displayed.)

<< OSD >> GRAPHICS OK

<< OK >>

6-12. Path Individual Check

(Data Check Confirmation). Screen Transition

1. Select the check item “AVDEC t FBI” from the menu.

2. The path check is executed and result of judgment is displayed.

3. When the ENTER key is pressed on the judgment screen again, the monitor display moves the to the menu screen.

<< PATH TEST MEN

· · · ·

3) TL750

· · · ·

<< PATH TEST MEN

· · · · t2) AVDEC

FBI

· · · ·

Pasted picture

<< AVDEC FBI >>

CAPTURE OK

<<OK>>

U 1/2 >>

U 2/2 >>

6-6E

<< PATH TEST MEN

· · · · t3) AVDEC

FBI

· · · ·

U 2/2 >>

Page 71

SECTION 7

ADJUSTMENT

RDR-GX7

7-1. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT

Reference Disk

HLX-505 (NTSC Single layer disk) J-6090-089-A HLX-504 (NTSC Dual layer disk) J-6090-088-A

1. Video Level Adjustment (RD-045 Board)

< Purpose >

This adjustment is made to satisfy the NTSC standard. If it is adjusted incorrectly, brightness will be too bright or too dark.

Mode Video level adjustment in test mode Signal Colour bars Test point LINE OUT (VIDEO) connector

(terminated in 75Ω)

Instrument Oscilloscope Adjusting element RV2301 Specification 1.00 Vp-p

Adjusting method:

1 ) Insert the reference disk and play back the 100% colour bars. 2 ) Adjust RV2301 for 1.0 Vp-p.

2. Component Video Output Level Adjustment (RD-045 board)

< Purpose >

This is the adjustment for component video output. If this adjustment is made incorrectly, brightness of the component signal that is connected to the projector having COMPONENT input will have incorrect brightness.

Mode Video level adjustment in test mode Signal Colour bars Test point COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y)

Instrument Oscilloscope Adjusting element RV2302 Specification 1.00 Vp-p

+ 0.04 – 0.02

1.0 Vp-p

Fig. 7-1

connector (terminated in 75Ω)

+ 0.04 – 0.02

3. S-Video Output S-Y Level Check

< Purpose >

This check confirms that the video output level at the S-video output connector is correct. If this adjustment is made incorrectly, picture will not be displayed correctly when the S-video connector output signal is connected to TV using cable.

Mode Video level adjustment in test mode Signal Colour bars Test point S-VIDEO OUT (S-Y) connector

(terminated in 75Ω)

Instrument Oscilloscope Specification 1.0 ± 0.05Vp-p

Adjusting method:

1 ) Insert the reference disk and play back the 100% colour bars. 2 ) Check that the S-Y level is 1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p.

1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p

Fig. 7-3

4. S-Video Output S-C Check

< Purpose >

This check confirms that the S-video output S-C conforms to the NTSC standard. If it is adjusted incorrectly, colour will be too dark or too thin.

Mode Video level adjustment in test mode Signal Colour bars Test point S-VIDEO OUT (S-C) connector

(terminated in 75Ω)

Instrument Oscilloscope Specification 286 ± 30mVp-p

Checking method:

1 ) Insert the reference disk and play back the 100% colour bars. 2 ) Confirm that the burst signal level of S-C is 300 ± 30mVp-p.

286 ± 30 mVp-p

Fig. 7-4

Adjusting method:

1 ) Insert the reference disk and play back the 100% colour bars. 2 ) Check that the Y level is 1.00 Vp-p.

+ 0.04 – 0.02

+ 0.04

1.0 Vp-p

– 0.02

Fig. 7-2

7-1

Page 72

5. Component Video Output Y Check

< Purpose >

This check confirms that the Y signal output is correct. If this signal level is not correct, brightness of video signal will be too bright or too dark when the COMPONENT connector output signal is connected the projector having COMPONENT input.

Mode Video level adjustment in test mode Signal Colour bars Test point

Instrument Oscilloscope Specification 1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p

Checking method:

1 ) Insert the reference disk and play back the 100% colour bars. 2 ) Check that the Y level is 1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p.

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y) connector, D1/D2 VIDEO OUT connector, pin-1 (terminated in 75Ω)

1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p

Fig. 7-5

7. Component Video Output R-Y Check

< Purpose >

This check confirms that the R-Y signal of the component video output is correct. If this signal level is not correct, colour of the video signal will have different colour when the COMPONENT connector output signal is connected the projector having COMPONENT input.

Mode Video level adjustment in test mode Signal Colour bars Test point COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (PR/CR)

connector, D1/D2 VIDEO OUT connector, pin-5 (terminated in 75Ω)

Instrument Oscilloscope Specification 700 ± 50 mVp-p

Checking method:

1 ) Insert the reference disk and play back the 100% colour bars. 2 ) Confirm that the R-Y level is 700 ± 50 mVp-p.

700 ± 50 mVp-p

6. Component Video Output B-Y Check

< Purpose >

This check confirms that the B-Y signal of the component video output is correct. If this signal level is not correct, colour of the video signal will have different colour when the COMPONENT connector output signal is connected the projector having COMPONENT input.

Mode Video level adjustment in test mode Signal Colour bars Test point COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (PB/CB)

connector, D1/D2 VIDEO OUT connector, pin-3 (terminated in 75Ω)

Instrument Oscilloscope Specification 700 ± 50 mVp-p

Checking method:

1 ) Insert the reference disk and play back the 100% colour bars. 2 ) Confirm that the B-Y level is 700 ± 50 mVp-p.

700 ± 50 mVp-p

Fig. 7-7

Fig. 7-6

7-2E

Page 73

8-1. EXPLODED VIEWS

NOTE:

• -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may

have some differences from the original one.

• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they

are seldom required for routine service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items.

8-1-1. OVERALL

SECTION 8

REPAIR PARTS LIST

• The mechanical parts with no reference number in the exploded views are not supplied.

not supplied

RDR-GX7

The components identified by mark 0or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

not supplied

not supplie

not supplied

Front panel block (See page 8-2)

Chassis block (See page 8-3)

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks

1 X-3953-198-1 COVER ASSY, TRAY 2 3-081-148-01 EMBLEM (DUAL), DVD 3 4-942-568-61 EMBLEM (NO.5), SONY 4 3-970-608-11 SUMITITE (B3), +BV 5 3-081-120-01 COVER, FL

* 6 A-6061-470-A FL130 (E) COMPL

7 3-081-137-01 CURSOR

* 8 A-6071-047-A FR195 (U) COMPL

9 8-457-501-00 DRIVE, DVD DW-U11A 10 3-070-883-11 SCREW, TAPPING 11 3-081-139-11 TOP CASE

* 12 3-632-494-01 RE-USE CLAMP * 13 A-6071-264-A RD045 (U) COMPL (SVC)

* 14 A-6061-471-A CN177 (E) COMPL

15 3-970-608-51 SUMITITE (B3), +BV

8-1

Page 74

8-1-2. FRONT PANEL SECTION

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks

51 3-081-146-02 PANEL, ALUMINUM 52 3-081-147-11 WINDOW, INDICATION 53 3-081-126-22 DOOR, ALUMINUM 54 4-921-277-11 SCREW (B2.6X8), TAPPING, BIND 55 3-081-128-01 PLATE, GROUND DOOR

56 3-736-779-71 MAGNET 57 3-081-129-01 SHAFT (R) 58 3-081-127-01 RETAINER, MAGNET 59 3-081-131-01 SHAFT (C) 60 3-047-468-01 DAMPER

61 3-081-125-01 BASE, DOOR

62 3-081-117-03 BUTTON, CONTROL 63 3-081-118-01 INDICATOR(PLAY) 64 3-081-130-01 SHAFT (L) 65 3-081-156-01 CUSHION, DRIVE 66 3-080-678-11 PANEL, BASE

67 3-081-119-02 SPRING, GROUND 68 X-3953-197-1 BUTTON ASSY, POWER 69 X-3953-196-1 BUTTON ASSY, PLAY 70 3-081-428-01 CUSHION, DOOR 71 3-083-631-11 DAMPER, SOUND

8-2

Page 75

8-1-3. CHASSIS SECTION

102

101

103

102

103

106

not supplied

105 107

104

not supplied

107

not supplied

107

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks 0 101 1-468-785-11 POWER BLOCK

102 3-970-608-11 SUMITITE (B3), +BV

* 103 3-691-950-01 SPACER, P.C.BOARD

104 1-787-006-11 FAN, D.C.

105 X-3953-201-1 FOOT ASSY

* 106 A-6071-051-A AV071 (U) COMPL

107 3-970-608-51 SUMITITE (B3), +BV

Note :

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number

8-3

specified.

Note :

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

Page 76

AV-071

8-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

NOTE:

• Due to standardization, replacements in the parts list may be different from the parts specified in the diagrams or the components used on the set.

• -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may have some difference from the original one.

• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items.

• CAPACITORS: uF: µF

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks

* A-6071-051-A AV-071 (U) BOARD, COMPLETE

*************************

< BUZZER >

BZ601 1-544-886-11 BUZZER

< CAPACITOR >

C101 1-115-339-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 50V C102 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C103 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C104 1-126-964-11 ELECT 10uF 20.00% 50V C108 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V

C109 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C110 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C111 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C115 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 25V C117 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V

C208 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C209 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C210 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C211 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C212 1-126-963-11 ELECT 4.7uF 20.00% 50V

C218 1-126-963-11 ELECT 4.7uF 20.00% 50V C220 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C221 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C222 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C223 1-126-964-11 ELECT 10uF 20.00% 50V

C224 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C226 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C227 1-126-961-11 ELECT 2.2uF 20.00% 50V C228 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C235 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V

C236 1-126-964-11 ELECT 10uF 20.00% 50V C301 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 25V C302 1-126-924-11 ELECT 330uF 20.00% 6.3V C308 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C310 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V

C313 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C314 1-127-715-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 10% 16V C315 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C323 1-107-737-11 MYLAR 560PF 5.00% 50V C324 1-107-737-11 MYLAR 560PF 5.00% 50V

C326 1-162-923-11 CERAMIC CHIP 47PF 5% 50V C329 1-130-472-00 MYLAR 0.0012uF 5% 50V C330 1-130-472-00 MYLAR 0.0012uF 5% 50V C331 1-126-960-11 ELECT 1uF 20.00% 50V C338 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V

• COILS uH: µH

• RESISTORS All resistors are in ohms. METAL: metal-film resistor METAL OXIDE: Metal Oxide-film resistor F: nonflammable

• SEMICONDUCTORS In each case, u: µ, for example: uA...: µA... , uPA... , µPA... , uPB... , µPB... , uPC... , µPC... , uPD..., µPD...

C340 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C343 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C344 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C347 1-104-987-11 MYLAR 0.001uF 5.00% 200V C348 1-104-987-11 MYLAR 0.001uF 5.00% 200V

C349 1-104-987-11 MYLAR 0.001uF 5.00% 50V C350 1-104-987-11 MYLAR 0.001uF 5.00% 50V C351 1-106-351-00 MYLAR 2200PF 5% 200V C352 1-106-351-00 MYLAR 2200PF 5% 200V C353 1-162-927-11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5% 50V

C354 1-162-927-11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5% 50V C355 1-162-927-11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5% 50V C356 1-162-927-11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5% 50V C357 1-126-934-11 ELECT 220uF 20.00% 16V C358 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V

C359 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C360 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C361 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C362 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C363 1-164-315-11 CERAMIC CHIP 470PF 5.00% 50V

C364 1-164-315-11 CERAMIC CHIP 470PF 5.00% 50V C367 1-164-217-11 CERAMIC CHIP 150PF 5.00% 50V C368 1-164-217-11 CERAMIC CHIP 150PF 5.00% 50V C369 1-164-217-11 CERAMIC CHIP 150PF 5.00% 50V C370 1-164-217-11 CERAMIC CHIP 150PF 5.00% 50V

C401 1-126-964-11 ELECT 10uF 20.00% 50V C402 1-126-964-11 ELECT 10uF 20.00% 50V C404 1-127-715-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 10% 16V C409 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C412 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V

C413 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C414 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C415 1-125-838-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V C416 1-164-227-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 25V C418 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V

C419 1-162-968-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0047uF 10% 50V C422 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V C429 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C430 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C431 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V

C432 1-104-665-11 ELECT 100uF 20.00% 10V C436 1-126-963-11 ELECT 4.7uF 20.00% 50V C437 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C438 1-126-916-11 ELECT 1000uF 20.00% 6.3V C439 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V

When indicating parts by reference number, please include the board name.

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

8-4

Page 77

AV-071

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks

C440 1-115-339-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 50V C441 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C444 1-126-963-11 ELECT 4.7uF 20.00% 50V C447 1-115-339-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 50V C448 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 35V

C741 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C743 1-162-968-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0047uF 10% 50V C745 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C746 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C748 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V

C469 1-162-925-11 CERAMIC CHIP 68PF 5.00% 50V C603 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C604 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C605 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C607 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V

C608 1-126-935-11 ELECT 470uF 20.00% 6.3V C610 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C611 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C612 1-165-176-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10.00% 16V C613 1-162-919-11 CERAMIC CHIP 22PF 5% 50V

C614 1-162-919-11 CERAMIC CHIP 22PF 5% 50V C615 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V C616 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C618 1-126-916-11 ELECT 1000uF 20.00% 6.3V C619 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V

C620 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V C621 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V C622 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V C623 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V C624 1-115-456-21 CAPACITOR 0.22F 5.5V

C627 1-126-935-11 ELECT 470uF 20.00% 6.3V C628 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C631 1-126-934-11 ELECT 220uF 20.00% 16V C632 1-163-024-00 CERAMIC CHIP 0.018uF 10.00% 50V C633 1-163-024-00 CERAMIC CHIP 0.018uF 10.00% 50V

C753 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C754 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C763 1-126-961-11 ELECT 2.2uF 20.00% 50V C764 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C765 1-164-172-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0056uF 10.00% 25V

C766 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C801 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C802 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C803 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C804 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V

C805 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C806 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C807 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C808 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C811 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V

C812 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C814 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C815 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C816 1-164-005-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 25V C817 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V

C818 1-164-005-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 25V C819 1-126-935-11 ELECT 470uF 20.00% 6.3V C820 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C821 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C1101 1-128-551-11 ELECT 22uF 20.00% 25V

C634 1-100-566-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 25V C635 1-126-965-91 ELECT 22uF 20.00% 50V C636 1-115-339-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 50V C638 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C639 1-125-838-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V

C640 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C642 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V C643 1-163-022-00 CERAMIC CHIP 0.012uF 10% 50V C644 1-163-021-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10.00% 50V C701 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V

C702 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C704 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C705 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C706 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C707 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V

C708 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C709 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C710 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C711 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C715 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V

C716 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C717 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C720 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C724 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C726 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V

C728 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C735 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 20.00% 16V C738 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C739 1-125-838-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V C740 1-164-227-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 25V

C1103 1-162-920-11 CERAMIC CHIP 27PF 5% 50V C1104 1-162-920-11 CERAMIC CHIP 27PF 5% 50V C1105 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C1106 1-126-964-11 ELECT 10uF 20.00% 50V C1107 1-128-551-11 ELECT 22uF 20.00% 25V

C1108 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C1109 1-126-960-11 ELECT 1uF 20.00% 50V C1110 1-128-551-11 ELECT 22uF 20.00% 25V C1111 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C1112 1-126-964-11 ELECT 10uF 20.00% 50V

C1113 1-126-964-11 ELECT 10uF 20.00% 50V C1114 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C1116 1-162-920-11 CERAMIC CHIP 27PF 5% 50V C1117 1-162-917-11 CERAMIC CHIP 15PF 5% 50V C1118 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V

C1119 1-164-230-11 CERAMIC CHIP 220PF 5.00% 50V C1120 1-126-964-11 ELECT 10uF 20.00% 50V C1121 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V

< CONNECTOR >

CN101 1-778-317-11 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 13P CN102 1-794-509-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) (3P) CN602 1-779-937-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 19P CN801 1-573-489-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 11P

< DIODE >

D302 8-719-075-77 DIODE EC10DA40-TE12 D303 8-719-914-44 DIODE DAP202K-T-146 D351 8-719-914-43 DIODE DAN202K-T-146 D408 8-719-988-61 DIODE 1SS355TE-17 D411 8-719-058-24 DIODE RB501V-40TE-17

8-5

Page 78

AV-071

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks

D602 8-719-075-77 DIODE EC10DA40-TE12 D603 8-719-075-77 DIODE EC10DA40-TE12 D605 8-719-988-61 DIODE 1SS355TE-17 D606 8-719-988-61 DIODE 1SS355TE-17 D607 8-719-988-61 DIODE 1SS355TE-17

D608 8-719-988-61 DIODE 1SS355TE-17 D609 8-719-083-85 DIODE UDZS-TE17-22B D610 8-719-422-62 DIODE MA8062-L-TX D611 8-719-914-43 DIODE DAN202K-T-146 D612 8-719-017-58 DIODE MA8068-TX

D705 8-719-988-61 DIODE 1SS355TE-17 D706 8-719-988-61 DIODE 1SS355TE-17 D707 8-719-988-61 DIODE 1SS355TE-17 D801 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL D802 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL

D803 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL D807 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL D808 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL D809 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL D810 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL

D811 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL D812 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL D813 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL D1201 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL D1202 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL

< FERRITE BEAD >

FB301 1-414-766-22 FERRITE 0uH FB302 1-414-766-22 FERRITE 0uH FB303 1-414-766-22 FERRITE 0uH FB304 1-414-766-22 FERRITE 0uH FB801 1-414-230-22 FERRITE 0uH

FB802 1-414-230-22 FERRITE 0uH

< FILTER >

FL601 1-233-893-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI FL801 1-233-893-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI FL802 1-233-893-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI FL803 1-233-893-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI FL804 1-233-893-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI

< IC >

IC101 8-759-521-89 IC PQ20WZ5U IC102 6-703-758-01 IC PQ050DZ01ZPH IC105 8-759-521-89 IC PQ20WZ5U IC106 6-703-756-01 IC PQ1L503M2SPQ IC201 6-703-503-01 IC AK5365VQ

IC301 6-701-565-01 IC CXD9627A-E2 IC302 8-759-052-52 IC NJM78M05DL1A-TE1 IC303 8-759-909-71 IC BA4558F-E2 IC304 8-759-909-71 IC BA4558F-E2 IC402 8-759-712-65 IC PQ070XZ01ZP

IC406 6-703-750-01 IC TK11850L-1TL IC603 6-702-767-01 IC BD4745G-TR IC604 6-703-873-01 IC PST3241NL IC605 6-704-473-01 IC uPD703033BYGF-M29-3BA-A IC701 6-703-155-01 IC LA73030-TLM-E

IC801 8-759-667-17 IC L79M05TLL-SONY-TL IC802 6-701-820-01 IC LA73053-TLM-E IC1101 8-759-349-01 IC MC68HC68VBIFB

J601 1-764-188-21 JACK (SMALL TYPE) (DIA. 3.5) J801 1-785-535-11 JACK BLOCK, PIN J802 1-785-535-11 JACK BLOCK, PIN J805 1-815-360-11 JACK, PIN 3P (COMPONENT OUT)

JR001 1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP 0 JR002 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 JR003 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 JR004 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 JR005 1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP 0

JR006 1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP 0 JR007 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 JR008 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 JR009 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 JR010 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0

JR011 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 JR012 1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP 0 JR013 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 JR014 1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP 0 JR015 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0

L401 1-469-967-21 INDUCTOR 10uH L402 1-469-967-21 INDUCTOR 10uH L404 1-469-967-21 INDUCTOR 10uH L406 1-414-187-11 INDUCTOR 47uH L407 1-414-187-11 INDUCTOR 47uH

L409 1-414-187-11 INDUCTOR 47uH L411 1-414-187-11 INDUCTOR 47uH L412 1-410-431-11 INDUCTOR 100uH L601 1-412-755-11 INDUCTOR 47uH L701 1-469-967-21 INDUCTOR 10uH

L702 1-469-967-21 INDUCTOR 10uH L703 1-469-967-21 INDUCTOR 10uH L801 1-419-387-21 INDUCTOR 100uH L802 1-419-387-21 INDUCTOR 100uH L803 1-400-145-21 INDUCTOR 47uH

L1101 1-469-967-21 INDUCTOR 10uH L1102 1-469-967-21 INDUCTOR 10uH L1103 1-469-967-21 INDUCTOR 10uH L1104 1-400-145-21 INDUCTOR 47uH

PS101 1-576-509-21 IC LINK 1A 50V PS102 1-576-508-21 IC LINK 0.7A 50V PS401 1-576-259-11 IC LINK 0.7A 50V

Q103 8-729-421-19 TRANSISTOR UN2213-TX Q107 8-729-424-08 TRANSISTOR UN2111-TX Q108 8-729-048-28 TRANSISTOR 2SD1766-T100-QR Q301 8-729-045-17 TRANSISTOR 2SB1561T100Q Q302 8-729-422-27 TRANSISTOR 2SD601A-QRS-TX

Q303 8-729-045-17 TRANSISTOR 2SB1561T100Q Q304 8-729-421-19 TRANSISTOR UN2213-TX Q306 8-729-027-53 TRANSISTOR DTC124TKA-T146 Q308 8-729-424-02 TRANSISTOR 2SB709A-QRS-TX Q310 8-729-046-97 TRANSISTOR 2SD1938(F)-T(TX).SO

< JACK >

< JUMPER RESISTOR >

< COIL >

< IC LINK >

< TRANSISTOR >

8-6

Page 79

AV-071

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks

Q311 8-729-046-97 TRANSISTOR 2SD1938(F)-T(TX).SO Q312 8-729-046-97 TRANSISTOR 2SD1938(F)-T(TX).SO Q313 8-729-046-97 TRANSISTOR 2SD1938(F)-T(TX).SO Q314 8-729-424-18 TRANSISTOR UN2113-TX Q315 8-729-230-49 TRANSISTOR 2SC2712-YG-TE85L

R112 1-216-210-00 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/8W R113 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R114 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R115 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R116 1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP 0

Q316 8-729-230-49 TRANSISTOR 2SC2712-YG-TE85L Q317 8-729-216-22 TRANSISTOR 2SA1162-YG-TE85L Q404 8-729-422-27 TRANSISTOR 2SD601A-QRS-TX Q406 8-729-421-19 TRANSISTOR UN2213-TX Q408 8-729-422-27 TRANSISTOR 2SD601A-QRS-TX

Q409 8-729-422-27 TRANSISTOR 2SD601A-QRS-TX Q410 8-729-424-02 TRANSISTOR 2SB709A-QRS-TX Q412 8-729-421-22 TRANSISTOR UN2211-TX Q414 8-729-424-02 TRANSISTOR 2SB709A-QRS-TX Q415 8-729-421-22 TRANSISTOR UN2211-TX

Q416 8-729-045-17 TRANSISTOR 2SB1561T100Q Q420 8-729-422-27 TRANSISTOR 2SD601A-QRS-TX Q606 8-729-421-22 TRANSISTOR UN2211-TX Q607 8-729-424-08 TRANSISTOR UN2111-TX Q608 8-729-921-73 TRANSISTOR 2SD1781K-T146-QR

Q609 8-729-056-46 TRANSISTOR 2SC5053T100Q Q610 8-729-056-46 TRANSISTOR 2SC5053T100Q Q611 8-729-026-49 TRANSISTOR 2SA1037AK-T146-QR Q612 8-729-424-18 TRANSISTOR UN2113-TX Q613 8-729-421-19 TRANSISTOR UN2213-TX

Q705 8-729-424-02 TRANSISTOR 2SB709A-QRS-TX Q706 8-729-424-59 TRANSISTOR UN2212-TX Q708 8-729-045-17 TRANSISTOR 2SB1561T100Q Q709 8-729-120-28 TRANSISTOR 2SC2412K-T-146-QR Q710 8-729-216-22 TRANSISTOR 2SA1162-YG-TE85L

R117 1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP 0 R118 1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP 0 R120 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R121 1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP 0 R123 1-208-818-11 METAL CHIP 33K 0.5% 1/10W

R124 1-208-808-11 METAL CHIP 12K 0.5% 1/10W R125 1-216-665-11 METAL CHIP 3.9K 0.5% 1/10W R126 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R127 1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP 0 R128 1-208-810-11 METAL CHIP 15K 0.5% 1/10W

R129 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R130 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R131 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R132 1-216-210-00 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/8W R135 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0

R137 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R209 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R210 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R214 1-218-887-11 METAL CHIP 47K 0.5% 1/10W R215 1-218-887-11 METAL CHIP 47K 0.5% 1/10W

R216 1-218-887-11 METAL CHIP 47K 0.5% 1/10W R217 1-218-887-11 METAL CHIP 47K 0.5% 1/10W R218 1-218-879-11 METAL CHIP 22K 0.5% 1/10W R220 1-218-887-11 METAL CHIP 47K 0.5% 1/10W R221 1-218-879-11 METAL CHIP 22K 0.5% 1/10W

Q711 8-729-026-49 TRANSISTOR 2SA1037AK-T146-QR Q712 8-729-216-22 TRANSISTOR 2SA1162-YG-TE85L Q713 8-729-216-22 TRANSISTOR 2SA1162-YG-TE85L Q715 8-729-230-49 TRANSISTOR 2SC2712-YG-TE85L Q716 8-729-422-27 TRANSISTOR 2SD601A-QRS-TX

Q801 8-729-424-08 TRANSISTOR UN2111-TX Q802 8-729-048-28 TRANSISTOR 2SD1766-T100-QR Q809 8-729-422-27 TRANSISTOR 2SD601A-QRS-TX Q810 8-729-422-27 TRANSISTOR 2SD601A-QRS-TX Q811 8-729-422-27 TRANSISTOR 2SD601A-QRS-TX

Q812 8-729-422-27 TRANSISTOR 2SD601A-QRS-TX Q813 8-729-422-27 TRANSISTOR 2SD601A-QRS-TX Q814 8-729-422-27 TRANSISTOR 2SD601A-QRS-TX Q815 8-729-421-19 TRANSISTOR UN2213-TX Q816 8-729-424-08 TRANSISTOR UN2111-TX

Q1101 8-729-402-81 TRANSISTOR XN4501-TW Q1102 8-729-402-81 TRANSISTOR XN4501-TW Q1103 8-729-422-27 TRANSISTOR 2SD601A-QRS-TX Q1104 8-729-424-02 TRANSISTOR 2SB709A-QRS-TX Q1105 8-729-424-02 TRANSISTOR 2SB709A-QRS-TX

< RESISTOR >

R104 1-218-857-11 METAL CHIP 2.7K 0.5% 1/16W R105 1-218-849-11 METAL CHIP 1.2K 0.5% 1/16W R106 1-218-849-11 METAL CHIP 1.2K 0.5% 1/16W R108 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R111 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W

R222 1-218-887-11 METAL CHIP 47K 0.5% 1/10W R224 1-218-887-11 METAL CHIP 47K 0.5% 1/10W R227 1-218-887-11 METAL CHIP 47K 0.5% 1/10W R248 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R250 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W

R253 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R255 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R256 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R257 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R258 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W

R277 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R278 1-216-837-11 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R279 1-216-837-11 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R280 1-216-837-11 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R301 1-216-849-11 METAL CHIP 220K 5% 1/16W

R302 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R303 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R307 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R308 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R309 1-216-830-11 METAL CHIP 5.6K 5% 1/16W

R310 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R311 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R313 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R320 1-216-049-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/10W R322 1-218-869-11 METAL CHIP 8.2K 0.5% 1/10W

R323 1-218-869-11 METAL CHIP 8.2K 0.5% 1/10W R324 1-218-869-11 METAL CHIP 8.2K 0.5% 1/10W R325 1-218-869-11 METAL CHIP 8.2K 0.5% 1/10W R326 1-218-871-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/10W R327 1-218-871-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/10W

8-7

Page 80

AV-071

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks

R328 1-216-823-11 METAL CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W R329 1-216-823-11 METAL CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W R330 1-216-823-11 METAL CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W R331 1-216-823-11 METAL CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W R332 1-218-871-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/10W

R432 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R437 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R438 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R439 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R440 1-218-446-11 METAL CHIP 1 5% 1/10W

R333 1-218-871-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/10W R334 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R335 1-216-824-11 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W R336 1-216-824-11 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W R338 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W

R340 1-216-824-11 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W R341 1-216-824-11 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W R343 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R344 1-216-841-11 METAL CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R350 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W

R352 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R353 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R354 1-216-841-11 METAL CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R355 1-216-841-11 METAL CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R356 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W

R357 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R359 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R361 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R362 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R363 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W

R364 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R365 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R366 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R370 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R371 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W

R441 1-216-857-11 METAL CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R450 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R451 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R454 1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP 0 R459 1-216-837-11 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W

R460 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R461 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R462 1-216-837-11 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R463 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R465 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W

R467 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R468 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R469 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R470 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R482 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W

R483 1-208-842-11 METAL CHIP 330K 0.5% 1/10W R484 1-208-800-11 METAL CHIP 5.6K 0.5% 1/10W R485 1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/10W R486 1-216-789-11 METAL CHIP 2.2 5% 1/16W R488 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W

R509 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R603 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R604 1-208-774-11 METAL CHIP 470 0.5% 1/10W R605 1-208-774-11 METAL CHIP 470 0.5% 1/10W R606 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W

R372 1-216-837-11 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R373 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R374 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R375 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R377 1-216-807-11 METAL CHIP 68 5% 1/16W

R378 1-216-807-11 METAL CHIP 68 5% 1/16W R382 1-216-041-00 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/10W R401 1-216-049-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/10W R402 1-208-830-11 METAL CHIP 100K 0.5% 1/10W R403 1-208-800-11 METAL CHIP 5.6K 0.5% 1/10W

R405 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R408 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R409 1-208-818-11 METAL CHIP 33K 0.5% 1/10W R410 1-216-838-11 METAL CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W R411 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W

R412 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R413 1-216-841-11 METAL CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R415 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R418 1-216-823-11 METAL CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W R419 1-216-828-11 METAL CHIP 3.9K 5% 1/16W

R420 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R421 1-216-826-11 METAL CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W R423 1-216-857-11 METAL CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R424 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R426 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W

R608 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R609 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R610 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R611 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R612 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W

R613 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R614 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R615 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R616 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R617 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W

R618 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R619 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R620 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R621 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R622 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W

R623 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R624 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R625 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R626 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R627 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W

R628 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R629 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R630 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R631 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R632 1-216-853-11 METAL CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W

R427 1-216-823-11 METAL CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W R428 1-216-864-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R429 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W R430 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R431 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W

R633 1-216-849-11 METAL CHIP 220K 5% 1/16W R634 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R635 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R636 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R637 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W

8-8

Page 81

AV-071

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks

R638 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R639 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R640 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R641 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R642 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W

R728 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R729 1-216-822-11 METAL CHIP 1.2K 5% 1/16W R730 1-216-826-11 METAL CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W R731 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R732 1-216-828-11 METAL CHIP 3.9K 5% 1/16W

R645 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R646 1-216-210-00 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/8W R647 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R648 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R650 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W

R651 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R652 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R653 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R654 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R655 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W

R657 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R658 1-216-824-11 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W R659 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R661 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R663 1-216-832-11 METAL CHIP 8.2K 5% 1/16W

R665 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R672 1-216-210-00 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/8W R673 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R674 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R675 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W

R676 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R677 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R678 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R679 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R680 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W

R733 1-216-857-11 METAL CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R734 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R735 1-216-823-11 METAL CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W R742 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R743 1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W

R744 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R745 1-216-819-11 METAL CHIP 680 5% 1/16W R746 1-216-813-11 METAL CHIP 220 5% 1/16W R747 1-216-813-11 METAL CHIP 220 5% 1/16W R748 1-216-857-11 METAL CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W

R749 1-218-289-11 METAL CHIP 510 5% 1/10W R751 1-218-850-11 METAL CHIP 1.3K 5% 1/10W R752 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R753 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R755 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0

R756 1-218-289-11 METAL CHIP 510 5% 1/10W R764 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R765 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R767 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R801 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W

R802 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R803 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R804 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R805 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R806 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W

R681 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R682 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R683 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R684 1-216-841-11 METAL CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R685 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W

R687 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R688 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R689 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 R690 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R691 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W

R694 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R695 1-208-798-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 0.5% 1/10W R697 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R698 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R699 1-216-208-00 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/8W

R700 1-216-838-11 METAL CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W R702 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R712 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R715 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R716 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W

R717 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R718 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R719 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R720 1-216-815-11 METAL CHIP 330 5% 1/16W R721 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W

R807 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R808 1-216-206-00 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/8W R809 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R810 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R811 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W

R812 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R813 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R814 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R815 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R816 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W

R817 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R818 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R819 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R820 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R821 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W

R822 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R823 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R824 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R825 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R826 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W

R827 1-216-206-00 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/8W R834 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W R840 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R841 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R842 1-216-807-11 METAL CHIP 68 5% 1/16W

R723 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R724 1-216-823-11 METAL CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W R725 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R726 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R727 1-216-828-11 METAL CHIP 3.9K 5% 1/16W

R843 1-216-807-11 METAL CHIP 68 5% 1/16W R844 1-216-807-11 METAL CHIP 68 5% 1/16W R845 1-216-807-11 METAL CHIP 68 5% 1/16W R846 1-216-807-11 METAL CHIP 68 5% 1/16W R847 1-216-807-11 METAL CHIP 68 5% 1/16W

8-9

Page 82

AV-071 CN-177 FL-130

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks

R848 1-216-807-11 METAL CHIP 68 5% 1/16W R849 1-216-807-11 METAL CHIP 68 5% 1/16W R850 1-216-807-11 METAL CHIP 68 5% 1/16W R855 1-218-285-11 METAL CHIP 75 5% 1/10W R865 1-218-285-11 METAL CHIP 75 5% 1/10W

R866 1-218-285-11 METAL CHIP 75 5% 1/10W R867 1-218-285-11 METAL CHIP 75 5% 1/10W R868 1-218-285-11 METAL CHIP 75 5% 1/10W R869 1-218-285-11 METAL CHIP 75 5% 1/10W R897 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W

R1101 1-216-841-11 METAL CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R1102 1-216-841-11 METAL CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R1103 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R1104 1-216-853-11 METAL CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R1105 1-216-813-11 METAL CHIP 220 5% 1/16W

X601 1-781-913-11 VIBRATOR, CRYSTAL (32.768kHz) X602 1-795-721-21 VIBRATOR, CERAMIC (20MHz) X1101 1-579-041-11 VIBRATOR, CRYSTAL (3.579545MHz)

************************************************************

* A-6061-471-A CN-177 (E) BOARD, COMPLETE

************************************************************

* A-6061-470-A FL-130 (E) BOARD, COMPLETE

3-081-222-01 SPACER

< VIBRATOR >

*************************

< CAPACITOR >

R1106 1-216-849-11 METAL CHIP 220K 5% 1/16W R1107 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R1108 1-216-837-11 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R1109 1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R1110 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W

R1111 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R1112 1-216-816-11 METAL CHIP 390 5% 1/16W R1113 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R1114 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R1115 1-216-836-11 METAL CHIP 18K 5% 1/16W

R1116 1-216-837-11 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R1117 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R1118 1-216-815-11 METAL CHIP 330 5% 1/16W R1119 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R1120 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W

R1121 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R1122 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R1123 1-216-841-11 METAL CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R1124 1-216-841-11 METAL CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R1125 1-216-841-11 METAL CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W

R1126 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R1127 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R1128 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R1129 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R1130 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W

C1702 1-124-589-11 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C1703 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C1705 1-115-339-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 50V C1706 1-162-923-11 CERAMIC CHIP 47PF 5% 50V C1708 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V

C1711 1-162-927-11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5% 50V C1712 1-162-927-11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5% 50V

< CONNECTOR >

CN1702 1-774-766-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 11P CN1703 1-785-828-21 CONNECTOR, SQUARE TYPE 4P

* CN1704 1-695-108-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 6P

CN1705 1-573-489-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 11P

< DIODE >

D1702 6-500-287-01 DIODE SML-512MWT86 D1703 8-719-077-09 DIODE CL-196HR-CD-T D1704 8-719-801-78 DIODE MA152WK-TX D1705 8-719-067-40 DIODE STZ6.8N-T146 D1706 8-719-067-40 DIODE STZ6.8N-T146

D1707 8-719-067-40 DIODE STZ6.8N-T146 D1708 8-719-067-40 DIODE STZ6.8N-T146 D1709 8-719-067-40 DIODE STZ6.8N-T146 D1710 8-719-067-40 DIODE STZ6.8N-T146 D1711 8-719-067-40 DIODE STZ6.8N-T146

R1204 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R1207 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R1208 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R1209 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R1213 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W

R1217 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R2601 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R2602 1-216-853-11 METAL CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R2603 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R2604 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W

< TRANSFORMER >

T601 1-439-651-11 TRANSFORMER, DC-DC CONVERTER

< TUNER >

TU401 8-598-612-00 TUNER, FSS BTF-DA401

D1712 8-719-083-60 DIODE UDZSTE-174.7B D1713 8-719-988-61 DIODE 1SS355TE-17

< FERRITE BEAD >

FB1701 1-414-233-22 FERRITE 0uH FB1702 1-414-233-22 FERRITE 0uH FB1703 1-414-233-22 FERRITE 0uH FB1704 1-414-230-22 FERRITE 0uH

< IC >

IC1701 6-703-765-01 IC ML9206-07MBZ03B

< JACK >

J1701 1-694-980-21 TERMINAL BOARD (S TERMINAL+3P)

8-10

Page 83

FL-130 FR-195

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks

< FLUORESCENT INDICATOR >

< IC >

ND1701 1-518-883-11 TUBE, FLUORESCENT INDICATOR

< TRANSISTOR >

Q1703 8-729-421-22 TRANSISTOR UN2211-TX Q1704 8-729-424-02 TRANSISTOR 2SB709A-QRS-TX

< RESISTOR >

R1704 1-216-813-11 METAL CHIP 220 5% 1/16W R1705 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R1707 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R1708 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R1709 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W

R1710 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R1711 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W R1712 1-218-285-11 METAL CHIP 75 5% 1/10W R1713 1-218-285-11 METAL CHIP 75 5% 1/10W R1714 1-218-285-11 METAL CHIP 75 5% 1/10W

R1715 1-216-849-11 METAL CHIP 220K 5% 1/16W R1716 1-216-849-11 METAL CHIP 220K 5% 1/16W R1718 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R1719 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R1724 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W

< SWITCH >

S1701 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT

************************************************************

* A-6071-047-A FR-195 (U) BOARD, COMPLETE

*************************

< CAPACITOR >

C101 1-124-589-11 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C104 1-124-589-11 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C105 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V

< CONNECTOR >

CN101 1-779-937-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 19P CN102 1-774-766-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 11P

IC101 6-600-162-01 IC GP1UM28SXK0F IC103 6-701-888-01 IC BU2152FS

< TRANSISTOR >

Q101 8-729-049-31 TRANSISTOR 2SB710A-RTX Q102 8-729-421-22 TRANSISTOR UN2211-TX

< RESISTOR >

R101 1-216-819-11 METAL CHIP 680 5% 1/16W R102 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R106 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R107 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R108 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W

R109 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R110 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R112 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R113 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R114 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W

R116 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R117 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R119 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R120 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R121 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W

R122 1-216-830-11 METAL CHIP 5.6K 5% 1/16W R123 1-216-832-11 METAL CHIP 8.2K 5% 1/16W R124 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R125 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R126 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W

R127 1-216-830-11 METAL CHIP 5.6K 5% 1/16W R128 1-216-832-11 METAL CHIP 8.2K 5% 1/16W R129 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R130 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R131 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W

R132 1-216-830-11 METAL CHIP 5.6K 5% 1/16W R133 1-216-832-11 METAL CHIP 8.2K 5% 1/16W R134 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R135 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R136 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W

< DIODE >

D102 6-500-287-01 DIODE SML-512MWT86 D103 6-500-252-01 DIODE SML-512WWT86 D104 6-500-252-01 DIODE SML-512WWT86 D105 6-500-252-01 DIODE SML-512WWT86 D106 6-500-252-01 DIODE SML-512WWT86

D107 6-500-252-01 DIODE SML-512WWT86 D109 8-719-077-09 DIODE CL-196HR-CD-T D111 6-500-252-01 DIODE SML-512WWT86 D112 6-500-252-01 DIODE SML-512WWT86 D114 8-719-077-09 DIODE CL-196HR-CD-T

D115 6-500-252-01 DIODE SML-512WWT86 D116 6-500-252-01 DIODE SML-512WWT86 D117 6-500-252-01 DIODE SML-512WWT86 D118 6-500-252-01 DIODE SML-512WWT86 D119 8-719-077-09 DIODE CL-196HR-CD-T

R137 1-216-830-11 METAL CHIP 5.6K 5% 1/16W R138 1-216-832-11 METAL CHIP 8.2K 5% 1/16W R139 1-216-837-11 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R140 1-216-837-11 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R141 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W

R142 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R143 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R144 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R147 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R148 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W

R149 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R151 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R152 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W

8-11

Page 84

FR-195 POWER RD-045

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks

< SWITCH >

S101 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT S102 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT S103 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT S104 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT S105 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT

S106 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT S107 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT S108 1-786-502-11 SWITCH, TACTILE S109 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT S110 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT

S111 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT S112 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT S113 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT S114 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT S115 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT

1-477-804-31 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-D203A) 1-751-271-11 CORD, CONNECTION (AV CABLE) 1-765-635-71 CORD, CONNECTION (NTSC)

0 1-823-701-11 CORD, POWER

3-071-119-81 LID, CASE BATTERY (FOR RMT-D203A)

3-081-195-71 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (OPERATIONS)

3-081-195-81 MANUAL,INSTRUCTION (OPERATIONS)

3-081-196-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (HOOKUPS)

************************************************************

ACCESSORIES & PACKING MATERIALS

********************************

(ENGLISH)

(FRENCH) (CANADIAN)

**************

HARDWARE LIST

**************

S116 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT S117 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT S118 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT S119 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT S120 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT

S121 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT S122 1-771-349-21 SWITCH, TACT

************************************************************

0 1-468-785-11 POWER BLOCK

************

************************************************************

* A-6071-264-A RD-045 (UC2) COMPLE(SVC)

***********************

************************************************************

MISCELLANEOUS

**************

9 8-457-501-00 DRIVE, DVD DW-U11A

0 101 1-468-749-11 POWER BLOCK

104 1-787-006-11 FAN, D.C.

************************************************************

#1 7-682-544-09 SCREW +B 3X3

Note :

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Note :

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

8-12E

Page 85

RDR-GX7

9-929-744-21

Sony Corporation

Home Storage Company

— 110 —

2003F1600-1

Published by Customer Support Dept.

Sony RDRGX-7 Service manual

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SERVICE NOTE

2-1. TOP CASE

2-2. POWER BLOCK

2-3. D. C. FAN

2-4. REAR PANEL

2-5. TRAY COVER ASSEMBLY

2-6. FRONT PANEL SECTION

2-7. ALUMINUM DOOR, DOOR BASE

2-8. SHAFT (R)

2-9. RD-045 BOARD

2-10.FL-130 BOARD

2-11.FR-195 BOARD

2-12.DVD DRIVE

2-13.AV-071 BOARD

2-14.CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION

3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2)

3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)

4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

WAVEFORMS

AV-071

FL-130

FR-195

CN-177

6-2. Block diagram (for your reference to check the devices)

6-3. Screen Transition in the Service Mode

6-4. Service Mode. Menu Items and Description

6-5. Device Check Menu (1/2)

6-6. Device Check Menu (2/2)

6-7. Path Check Menu (1/2)

6-8. Path Check Menu (2/2)

6-9. Device All Check. Screen Transition

6-10. Device Individual Check. Screen Transition

7-1. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT